User Guide
AccountRight Plus 2011 AccountRight Standard 2011

MYOB Australia Pty Ltd Website: myob.com.au © MYOB Technology Pty Ltd 2011 All rights reserved. Writers Suchitra Govindarajan, Merrin Hughes, Claire Mahoney, Rachael Mullins, Kylie Nicholson, Steven Rao, Ron Tierney, John Wilson.

Disclaimer
Information supplied by the member companies of the MYOB group (whether in user documentation and other literature, video or audio material, training courses, websites, advice given by staff, or provided by other means) is intended only to illustrate general principles, and may not be complete, accurate or free of error. As accounting standards, taxation requirements, legislation and the circumstances of individual businesses vary widely, this information cannot be considered authoritative and may not apply to your specific situation. You should obtain competent advice from a qualified accounting, taxation, information‐technology or legal professional before acting on such information. To the extent permitted by law, member companies of the MYOB group are not liable for any special, consequential, direct or indirect damages arising from loss of function, profits or data resulting from your application of such information. In the event that any of the above limitations are found to be unenforceable, the MYOB member company's liability is limited to the return of any fees or monies paid for the purchase of the product or service.

Decisions, Inc. in the United States or other countries. FlexNet Connect® is a registered trademark of Flexera Software™ Inc. Google Maps™ card links included with permission. MasterCard® is a registered trademark of MasterCard International Inc, xerces is licenced under Apache Software. Microsoft, Access, Azure, DotNetZip, Excel, Fluent.Net, Internet Explorer, .Net Framework,Office, Outlook, Smart Tags, Ribbon Control Library, SQL Azure, SQL CE, Windows, Word and WFPToolkit, are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States or other countries. Quicken® and QuickBooks® are registered trademarks of Intuit Inc. SM2DGraphView Copyright 2002‐2008 Snowmint Creative Solutions LLC snowmintcs.com/. VISA® is a registered trademark of Visa International Service Association. RightNow CX® is a registered trademark of RightNow Technologies Inc. Sentry Spelling Checker Engine for Windows, copyright Wintertree Software Inc. Other products mentioned may be service marks, trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

MYOB AccountRight Software Licence Agreement
IMPORTANT–READ THIS CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. This is the Software Licence Agreement (“Licence Agreement”). As you have purchased the Product (consisting of the User Documentation and the installation CD or other media containing the Software) following notification of the Licence Agreement you are now legally bound by its conditions. HOWEVER, if the Licence Agreement contains anything of which you were not aware prior to purchasing the Product or do not agree to be bound by, DO NOT INSTALL THE SOFTWARE but return the Product to the seller in its entirety and a full refund of the purchase price will be made. By installing the Software and keeping the Product you are confirming that you have purchased the Product subject to this Licence Agreement and are bound by its provisions. TRIAL VERSION SOFTWARE LIMITATION. If you use this Software on a trial basis prior to purchase, then additional restrictions govern its use. The Trial Version is intended to be used only for evaluation purposes and whilst you may create your own company data files (“Company Files”) you will have access to your Company Files only until the earlier of 30 days from the date of creation of each Company File or until your have entered a total of 1000 transactions into the Company files you have created. Thereafter, you will be able to access the Company Files created by you only upon your purchase of the full version of the Software Product Licence. Upon your purchase of the full version of the Software Product Licence, the restrictions in this paragraph (Trial Version Software Limitation) shall no longer apply, but you acknowledge that your use of the full version of the Software Product Licence will be conditioned on your agreeing to the terms of the Licence Agreement (including the limitation on the number of Company Files) accompanying the full version of the Software Product Licence.

Trademarks
MYOB®, MYOB Accountants Office®, MYOB AccountEdge®, MYOB AccountEdge® Network Edition, MYOB AccountRight™, MYOB AccountRight Basics™, MYOB AccountRight Standard™, MYOB AccountRight Plus™, MYOB AccountRight Premier™, MYOB AccountRight Enterprise™, MYOB Accounting™, MYOB Accounting Plus™, MYOB BusinessBasics™, MYOB CashBasics™, MYOB ClientConnect™, MYOB FirstEdge®, MYOB M‐Powered®, MYOB M‐Powered Services™, MYOB M‐Powered Bank Statements™, MYOB M‐Powered Invoices™, MYOB M‐Powered MoneyController™, MYOB M‐Powered Payments™, MYOB ODBC DeveloperPack™, MYOB ODBC Direct™, MYOB PowerPay®, MYOB Premier®, MYOB Premier Enterprise®, RetailManager®, Accountants Office®, AccountEdge®, Accounting Plus™, AccountRight Basics™, BusinessBasics™, ClientConnect™, FirstEdge®, M‐Powered®, M‐Powered Superannuation™, ODBC DeveloperPack™, ODBC Direct™, PowerPay® and Premier® are registered trademarks or trademarks of MYOB Technology Pty Ltd and their use is prohibited without prior consent. Ceedata, Solution 6 MAS and Xlon are registered trademarks or trademarks of Solution 6 Holdings Limited, a member of the MYOB group. Adobe®, Acrobat®, Acrobat Reader®, Adobe Reader®, PDF™, and PostScript® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. AddressBook, Apple®, iMac, AirPort, iCal, Macintosh®, and QuickTime® and the QuickTime logo are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. MobileMeSM is a service mark of Apple Inc. Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., used under licence. Brio Intelligence and Hyperion Intelligence are trademarks or registered trademarks of Hyperion Solutions Corporation, Ctree use by permission from Faircom, Google Maps™ card links included with permission, NiXPS used under licence, WinForms control set used by permission from DevExpress. Crystal Reports® is a registered trademark of Crystal

1

Scope of Licence
MYOB Technology Pty Ltd (the Publisher), through its local publishers and distribution agents, hereby grants to you, the original purchaser, a paid‐up, personal, non‐exclusive and non‐transferable Licence to use the Software and the User Documentation only in the region, territory or country specified on the packaging or download, subject to the terms and conditions of this Licence Agreement. a Activation of Company Files You must register the Product and activate the Company Files you create or upgrade with the Software. Company Files may only be activated or upgraded in respect of the business that you operate. You are entitled to activate or upgrade only the number of Company Files that you have purchased. If required, you can obtain additional Company files by contacting the local publisher.

2

i) New Company Files You may only access each new Company File you create for 30 days without registering the Product and activating the Company File. After 30 days each new Company File will become read-only until you activate it. b Product Installation and usage If you have purchased a: i) Single User Software Licence then you may install the Software on any computer that you operate at your principal place of business in respect of Company Files you have activated, provided that you do not use or permit the usage of the Software on more than one computer or computer terminal at a time. In event of an upgrade or Product exchange the Licence hereby granted shall automatically transfer to the new version or Product. ii) Multi-User Software Licence then you may use the Software on only one computer network that you operate and only then in respect of Company Files created and activated by you or by another licensed user. You may transfer the Software from one computer to another that you own or operate on this network provided that you only use or permit the usage of the Software on the number of computers or computer terminals at a time for which you have purchased user licences, nor permit the usage of the Software on more than one network at any one time, nor permit the Software to be used in respect of Company Files that you have not activated or have not been created by you or by another licensed user. c Number of Users At any given time, you or your delegated agents may only launch and simultaneously run the number of Software runtime instances equivalent to or less than the number of user licences you have purchased and open and simultaneously work with only the same number of Company Files, which must be created and activated by you or your related entities.

you fail to meet the ongoing obligations accepted by you at the time of registration (if applicable) or if you fail to comply with any term or condition of this Licence Agreement, this Licence will terminate and, upon any such termination, you agree to destroy the Software and User Documentation, together with all copies, or to return them to the Publisher. Termination of this Licence Agreement shall be in addition to and not in lieu of any other remedies available to the Publisher. In the event that the Publisher deems this product to be redundant then the Publisher may at its option supply you with an alternative product and terminate this Licence Agreement. h Protection and Security This Licence Agreement specifically prohibits the reverse engineering or decompiling or interference in any manner with the Software’s source code. Further you agree to use your best endeavours and to take all reasonable steps to safeguard the Software to ensure that no unauthorised person has access to the Product and that there is no unauthorised copying or distribution of the Software or User Documentation. i Partner Program If this Product is being used in the context of the MYOB Professional Partner Program in either Australia or New Zealand, then the usage of the Software and any Company files is strictly restricted to being within the practice itself. Without in any way limiting the scope of this restriction, the sharing of Company files or Software with any clients of the practice is specifically prohibited.

2

Limited Warranty & Disclaimer
The Publisher warrants that the media on which the Software is recorded or the downloaded installer and the User Documentation provided with them are free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of 90 days from the date of your original purchase. Except for the limited warranty described above, the Software is sold ‘as is’, and you are assuming the entire risk as to its quality and performance. It is your responsibility to verify the results obtained from the use of the Software. If during the 90‐day limited warranty period, you discover physical defects in the media on which the Software was recorded or the downloaded installer or in the User Documentation, the Publisher will replace them at no charge to you, provided you return the item to be replaced with proof of purchase to the Publisher. THIS IS YOUR SOLE REMEDY. IN NO EVENT WILL THE PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SIMILAR DAMAGES, EVEN IF THE PUBLISHER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state. In the event that any of the above limitations or exclusions are held to be unenforceable, the Publisher’s total liability shall not exceed the amount of the Licence fee you paid.

d Updates and Upgrades In the event of an upgrade, update or product exchange, the Licence hereby granted shall automatically transfer to the new version or product. All rights in respect of the original Product shall lapse and no further use of these shall be permitted. e Portable or Home Computer and Archive Copies You may make a copy of the Software and install it on either a portable computer or a computer located in your home provided that the copy is for your own exclusive use and is not operated simultaneously with the original of the Software. Otherwise you may not copy or duplicate the Software, except as necessary solely for archival purposes, Software error verification, or to replace defective storage media, provided you keep the original and the copies. You may not alter, decompile or disassemble the Software. You may make copies of the User Documentation up to but not exceeding the number of multi‐user Licences you have purchased. Transfers You may not sub-license, lease, rent or lend the Software or the User Documentation or otherwise transfer any of your rights under this Licence Agreement. Subject to the prior written consent of the Publisher and the agreement of the transferee to be bound by the terms of this Licence Agreement, you may permanently transfer the Software (together with any backup copies you have made) and the User Documentation. However, you may not retain any copies of either the Software or the User Documentation.

f

3

Entire Agreement
This Licence Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the Publisher and the Licensee and any prior representations, statement or undertaking howsoever made are expressly cancelled. No amendment or modification to this Licence Agreement shall be valid unless it shall be in writing and signed by an authorised representative of the Publisher.

g Term The Licence granted in this Licence Agreement is effective until terminated. You may terminate it at any time by destroying the Software and User Documentation, together with all copies, or by returning them to the Publisher. If

3

4

Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................7
Learning about AccountRight ...............................................................7 Where to start ......................................................................................9 Exploring AccountRight ......................................................................10 Recording miscellaneous transactions............................................... 59 Credit card transactions..................................................................... 60

5 Sales..............................................................................61
Creating a customer card................................................................... 61 Entering sales..................................................................................... 63 Recording sales with insufficient on‐hand item quantities................ 67 Changing a sale’s type........................................................................ 69 Reviewing your sales information...................................................... 70 Receiving payments ........................................................................... 72 Printing payment receipts.................................................................. 74 Credit control..................................................................................... 75 Customer credits................................................................................ 78 Dealing with a supplier who is also a customer................................. 81 Accounting for bad debts................................................................... 81

2 Creating a company file .................................................17
Overview ............................................................................................17 Create a company file.........................................................................18 Activate the company file...................................................................21 Set up accounts ..................................................................................23 Enter account opening balances ........................................................26 Set up preferences .............................................................................28 Set up software management ............................................................28 Set a password for the Administrator user account...........................29

3 Setting up......................................................................31
Overview ............................................................................................31 Set up sales.........................................................................................33 Set up purchases ................................................................................34 Set up payroll......................................................................................35 Set up electronic payments ................................................................36 Do an initial bank reconciliation .........................................................39 Create item records............................................................................42 Enter your inventory opening balances..............................................43

6 Purchases ......................................................................83
Creating a supplier card ..................................................................... 83 Entering purchases ............................................................................ 85 Receiving items without a supplier bill .............................................. 89 Creating a purchase order from a sale............................................... 91 Changing a purchase’s type ............................................................... 92 Reviewing your purchases information ............................................. 93 Paying bills ......................................................................................... 95 Recording and settling supplier debits .............................................. 97 Adding finance charges paid to suppliers ........................................ 100

4 Banking .........................................................................45
Receiving money ................................................................................45 Preparing a bank deposit....................................................................47 Spending money .................................................................................48 Electronic payments ...........................................................................51 Entering transactions in the Bank Register window...........................52 Transferring money between accounts..............................................54 Tracking petty cash expenses.............................................................55 Reconciling your bank accounts .........................................................56 Importing statements ........................................................................58

7 Paying your employees................................................101
Creating payroll categories .............................................................. 102 Creating employee cards ................................................................. 110 Entering employee payroll information........................................... 110 Timesheets....................................................................................... 114 Processing your payroll.................................................................... 116 Payroll liabilities............................................................................... 124 Superannuation reporting ............................................................... 126

5

Payroll tax reporting .........................................................................128 Processing termination payments....................................................129 Reviewing payroll information .........................................................133

13 Forms ..........................................................................195
Finding forms ................................................................................... 195 Sending forms .................................................................................. 196 Customising forms ........................................................................... 199 Adding and editing form elements .................................................. 201 Saving customised forms ................................................................. 206 Exporting and importing customised forms .................................... 206

8 Billing for time............................................................. 137
Overview ..........................................................................................137 Setting time billing preferences .......................................................138 Setting billing rates ...........................................................................139 Creating activities .............................................................................140 Creating activity slips........................................................................142 Changing and reviewing activity slips...............................................144 Creating time billing invoices ...........................................................145 Work in progress ..............................................................................148

14 Contact management ..................................................209
Creating a card................................................................................. 209 Keeping in touch with your contacts ............................................... 210 Grouping your contacts ................................................................... 214 Synchronising cards with Microsoft Outlook................................... 217 Customising cards ............................................................................ 222 Reviewing your contact information ............................................... 224

9 Inventory..................................................................... 149
Creating items ..................................................................................149 Making inventory adjustments.........................................................152 Building items ...................................................................................153 Recording stocktakes........................................................................155 Reviewing your inventory information.............................................156 Setting item prices............................................................................157 Customising inventory......................................................................159

15 Financial control ..........................................................225
Tracking financial information ......................................................... 225 Reimbursable expenses ................................................................... 229 Budgets ............................................................................................ 231 Reviewing financial information ...................................................... 234 Auditing your records ...................................................................... 236

10 Lists ............................................................................. 163
Adding a record ................................................................................163 Setting up tax codes .........................................................................164 Finding a record................................................................................167 Changing a record.............................................................................168 Inactivating or reactivating a record ................................................168 Deleting a record ..............................................................................169 Combining records ...........................................................................169

16 End‐of‐period procedures ............................................239
Month‐end procedures.................................................................... 239 Closing a financial year .................................................................... 249 Closing a payroll year....................................................................... 252

17 Managing user accounts and company files .................259
Managing user accounts .................................................................. 259 Backing up and restoring company files .......................................... 260 Confirming activated company files ................................................ 262 Managing software updates ............................................................ 263

11 Transactions ................................................................ 173
Finding a transaction ........................................................................173 Changing or deleting a transaction...................................................177 Reversing a transaction ....................................................................178 Recurring transactions......................................................................179

18 Importing and exporting data ......................................265
Exporting data.................................................................................. 266 Importing data ................................................................................. 268

12 Reports ....................................................................... 185
Producing reports .............................................................................185 Customising reports .........................................................................187

Index ................................................................................279

6

CONTENTS

1 Introduction
Before you begin using AccountRight, take some time to explore the software and find out about the basic features of navigation, record management and transaction entry. This chapter provides an overview of your software and describes the tools, resources and primary features of AccountRight. Note that the term AccountRight refers to AccountRight Standard and AccountRight Plus. Note that some sections don’t apply to AccountRight Standard, such as Payroll.

Learning about AccountRight
MYOB is committed to developing accounting software that is easy to use. To that end, AccountRight is accompanied by comprehensive information resources to help you learn about your software and to provide support as you set up your records and enter transactions. Release Notes The Release Notes are provided to existing users of AccountRight software. They explain how to upgrade your software and describe new features and software changes. User Guide The User Guide introduces the principal features, functions and capabilities of your AccountRight software. It is designed to be used as a reference for everyday transaction entry and periodic tasks, such as issuing invoices, making payments and end‐of‐period processing. The user guide is provided as a PDF on the AccountRight software CD, and is also available to download from the MYOB website. Note that all of the content in the user guide is available through the Help Centre.

Manuals
MYOB provides supporting documentation to help you install and use AccountRight. These documents are provided as part of the software CD you purchased, or can be downloaded from the MYOB website. Note that you need a PDF viewer to view the manuals. Getting Started guide The Getting Started guide is provided to first‐time users of AccountRight. It contains information on how to install and register the software and how to obtain technical support. A printed version of this guide is provided with the AccountRight software CD.

7

Help Centre
The Help Centre is a comprehensive resource that describes all functions and features of your software. It also includes window descriptions and tips for helping solve common problems. The Help Centre is installed when you install your software, however we recommend you use the online version of help if you are usually connected to the internet. The online version of help is updated regularly between product releases and may contain new help topics relevant to you.

Help in AccountRight windows
Opening the Help Centre from any window—other than command centre windows—displays descriptions or procedures relevant to that window. Click Help ( ) and choose Help for this Window, Tell Me About or Search.

To use the online help version
1 2

These options are described below.
Select…
Help for this Window Tell Me About

Open your company file. Go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. The Preferences window appears. Select the I Prefer to Use Help From the Internet, Rather Than My Computer option and click OK.
If you want to… see a description of the window, which includes links to topics that give you tips to solving common problems and direct you to other sources of help. display a list of topics that tell you how to perform various tasks in the window, or other related tasks. search the help using keywords.

3

To display the Help Centre
In any window, press the F1 key. In any window—other than command centre windows—click the help icon ( ) and choose Help for this Window. Choose Search from the Help menu. Go to help.myob.com.au
Search

Help in command centres
The main windows in your AccountRight software are known as command centres. You can view help for a command centre by going to the Help menu and selecting Help for this Window. The Help Centre displays a description of the command centre and its various functions. For more information, see ‘Command centres’ on page 11.

8

C H A P T E R 1

INTRODUCTION

Help in fields
You can choose to display a short description of buttons, text fields, columns and command centre items when you hover the mouse over them.

Show Me How videos
Show Me How videos demonstrate how to use many of the new features, and run between one and four minutes. Note that internet access is required to view videos.

To view Show Me How videos
1

Go to the Help menu and select Learning Centre. The Help Centre appears. In the Videos section, click View all videos. A list of available videos appears in your browser. Click the video you want to view.

2

To turn field help on or off, go to the Setup menu and select Preferences. In the Preferences window that appears, go to the Windows tab and select or deselect the Show Field Help When Hovering Over a Field option.

3

Where to start
When you start your AccountRight software, a welcome window displays the following options:
Option
Open a company file Create a company file Upgrade a company file Recently opened company files Explore a sample company Restore a backup file Help Centre

Select this option to...
Open an existing company file. Create a company file for your business. See page 17. Upgrade a company file created with a previous version of AccountRight. To open a company file in the list, click the file name. To remove a company file from the list, right‐click it and select Remove from list. Experiment with a sample company’s data and learn how to use AccountRight. Restore a backed up company file. Access the Help Centre and learn about AccountRight.

WHERE TO START

9

Experiment with sample data
Before you create a new company file, we recommend that you experiment with a sample company’s data. There is also a tutorial you can use to help you get to know the core features and functions of AccountRight.
3

The Sign‐on window for the sample file appears. Click OK. The command centre window appears. A command centre window always appears when a company file is opened. Notice that the name of the sample company, Clearwater Pty Ltd, appears at the top left of the window. Now that the sample company file is open, you can browse through the software, explore the transactions that have already been entered and enter some transactions yourself.

Explore the Clearwater company file
1

Start your AccountRight software and, in the welcome window that appears, click Explore a sample company. The Open a company file window appears with a list of sample company files for different AccountRight products.

Complete the AccountRight tutorial
A tutorial has been provided for you to learn how to set up and use AccountRight, using the Clearwater sample file. You can access the tutorial PDF through the online help. Go to help.myob.com.au/tutorials to download the tutorial.

2

Select the Clearwater company file you want to explore and click Open.

Exploring AccountRight
You should become familiar with the following tools and aids:
Tool
Command centres Date‐entry calendars The business calendar Calculators Zoom arrows Selection lists Select columns Mouse shortcuts

Tool
Spell‐check Shortcut keys

See page 14 page 15

See page 11 page 11 page 12 page 13 page 13 page 13 page 13 page 14

10

C H A P T E R 1

INTRODUCTION

Command centres
In AccountRight Standard, there are six command centres. In AccountRight Plus, which includes the Time Billing and Payroll features, there are eight command centres. The following is an illustration of the Sales command centre.

There are four menus at the bottom of each command centre. The options available from these menus are described below.
Select...
To Do List

If you want to... record and manage tasks that need your attention, such as paying invoices to take advantage of early‐payment discounts, or restocking items when inventory is low. find transactions relating to accounts, sales, purchases, cards, items, payroll and jobs. view a list of the available reports. view information about the current financial state of your business.

Find Transactions Reports Business Insights

There are two ways to select an option: Click the menu name to display the window relevant to the command centre you are in. Click the arrow ( ) next to the menu name and select from a list of the available options for all command centres (not just the command centre you are currently in). Each command centre contains a row of icons in the top section of the window. These icons allow you to switch between command centres. The selected icon represents the current command centre, and the flowchart displayed below the icons illustrates the major tasks associated with that command centre. (For example, when the Sales icon is selected, tasks such as Enter Sales and Print/Email Statements—typical tasks you would complete in relation to sales—appear in the command centre’s flowchart.)

Date-entry calendars
The calendar simplifies date entry. For example, suppose you’re entering a sale and have promised the goods to the customer on the last Friday of the month. Rather than figuring out the date and entering it manually, you can display the calendar in the Promised Date field of the Sales window and click the date.

EXPLORING ACCOUNTRIGHT

1 1

To display the calendar, click the arrow next to the date field or put the cursor in a date field and press the SPACEBAR on your keyboard. Select a date by clicking it. The selected date appears in the date field.
The current date is highlighted. You can use the arrow keys next to the month and year to select a different month or year.

To set up your business calendar
1

Go to the Setup menu and choose Business Calendar. The Business Calendar window appears.

To close the calendar without selecting a date, press ESC.

The business calendar
You can use the business calendar to specify which days of the week your business is open, as well as holidays and important business events. As well as being a handy reference, the business calendar affects the Contact Alert function in the To Do List. If you set a reminder to call a customer on a day that your business is indicated in the business calendar as being closed, the reminder will appear in the To Do List window on the business day before the task is due. For example, if a reminder is scheduled for Saturday but your business is closed on Saturdays, the reminder will appear in the To Do List window on Friday.
2

The current month is displayed in the calendar at the top of the window. Days that appear in grey are days when your business is closed. If you want to mark a specific day as closed, click the date in the calendar. If your business is always open or closed on a specific day of the week, click that day in the Shortcut for setting average business week section. A message will confirm that you are changing the day’s status.
3

Add any important events that occur during the month in the Important Days section. If you want to enter information for other months in the business calendar, click the arrows at the top of the calendar. Click OK to close the business calendar.

4

5

12

C H A P T E R 1

INTRODUCTION

Calculators
A pop‐up calculator is available to simplify calculating and entering numeric data, including money amounts, item quantities and units. The calculator is available in every field where you may need to calculate an amount or total figure. To display the calculator, click the arrow next to the numeric data field or press = (equals) or the SPACEBAR when the cursor is in a numeric data field. In the calculator, enter your calculation and then press ENTER. The result appears in the numeric data field.

Selection lists
Search icons ( ) displayed next to various fields allow you to open selection lists containing records that you have previously entered, such as customers and shipping methods, or records provided by default.

Select columns
Select columns allow you to select items from a list. There are two select icons: the Select icon for each entry in the list and the Select/Deselect All icon located at the top of the column.

Zoom arrows
Zoom arrows, displayed next to various fields, allow you to display more detailed information about a specific entry, such as a transaction or customer record. A blue zoom arrow ( ) indicates that you can display more detailed information about a record and make changes to or delete it. A grey zoom arrow ( ) allows you to display more detailed information, but the information cannot be changed. If you want to change the information, you can reverse the transaction and re‐enter it (see ‘Reversing a transaction’ on page 178). Alternatively, you can change your security preference selection to make all transactions changeable (see ‘Set up preferences’ on page 28).

Select an item by clicking the Select icon next to it. You can select all listed items by clicking the Select/Deselect All icon, and deselect them by clicking the Select/Deselect All icon again.

EXPLORING ACCOUNTRIGHT

1 3

Mouse shortcuts
You can right‐click in a window to open a shortcut menu with options relevant to the window and to the field you are entering data in. Mouse shortcuts are an easy way to erase a transaction, find transactions, or get help for a window.

Spell-check
When entering sale, purchase or item information, you can check your spelling in most text fields, including memos, descriptions, addresses and item names. You can choose to set a preference to automatically check spelling or manually check spelling. To manually check spelling, click Spell. When you check the spelling in a field, the Spelling window appears. You can also customise your spelling preferences. For example, you can change the main dictionary language and choose a preference to ignore words that include numbers.

To set spelling preferences
1

Go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. The Preferences window appears. Click the Windows tab. If you want to automatically check spelling select the Automatically Check Spelling in Text Fields Before Recording Transactions option. If you want to customise your spelling preferences, click Spelling. The Spelling Options window appears. Select your preferences and click OK.

If you are entering information in a text field, right‐click options include Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear and Spelling.

2 3

4

5

For more information about the spelling feature, see the Help Centre.

14

C H A P T E R 1

INTRODUCTION

Shortcut keys
You can use shortcut keys to speed up data entry. All the shortcut keys correspond to menu commands. Listed below are the shortcuts relating to the menu commands.
Menu
File

Menu
Command Centres > Sales

Command
Command Centre Enter Invoices Receive Payments

Shortcut keys
CTRL+3 CTRL+J CTRL+B CTRL+4

Command
New (Company File) Open Close Window Print

Shortcut keys
CTRL+N CTRL+O ESC CTRL+P CTRL+Z or ALT+BACKSPACE CTRL+X or SHIFT+DELETE CTRL+C or CTRL+INSERT CTRL+V or SHIFT+INSERT CTRL+A CTRL+L CTRL+R CTRL+T CTRL+Y CTRL+1 CTRL+G CTRL+2 CTRL+K CTRL+H CTRL+D Command Centres > Payroll [AccountRight Plus only] Command Centres > Inventory Command Centres > Card File Lists Reports Command Centres > Time Billing [AccountRight Plus only] Command Centres > Purchases

Command Centre

Command Centre Enter Purchases Pay Bills Command Centre

CTRL+5 CTRL+E CTRL+ M CTRL+6

Edit

Undo Cut Copy Paste Select All Select from List Recap Transaction

Command Centre Command Centre Cards List Index to Reports Refresh All AccountRight Help

CTRL+7 CTRL+4 CTRL+F CTRL+I F5 F1

Command Centres (All) Command Centres (All) Command Centres > Accounts

To Do List Find Transactions Command Centre Record Journal Entry

Window Help

We also support the following shortcut key combinations: Close Window Next Window Cycle Task Bank Register Spend Money Receive Money CTRL+F4 CTRL+F6 or CTRL+TAB ALT+TAB or ALT+ESC

Command Centres > Banking

Command Centre

EXPLORING ACCOUNTRIGHT

1 5

16

C H A P T E R 1

INTRODUCTION

2 Creating a company file
Your financial data is stored in a company file. If you don’t already have a company file, you must create it before you can begin recording transactions.

Overview
When you create a company file, you record basic information about your business, such as the business name and your contact details. You must also specify the month and financial year in which you want to start recording transactions. Depending on the features you want to use, there are some tasks that you should complete. This chapter guides you through the essential ones. Essential tasks The tasks you need to do depend on whether your accountant has created and set up a company file for you, the information you currently have and when your business started.
Task
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Create a company file Activate the company file Set up accounts Enter account opening balances Set up preferences Set up software management Set a password for the Administrator user account

See page 18 page 21 page 23 page 26 page 28 page 28 page 29

Additional tasks Once you have completed the essential tasks, you can start recording transactions. However, before you use some features of this software, such as the sales or inventory features, you will need to do further setup tasks. These tasks are covered in Chapter 3, ’Setting up,’ starting on page 31.

17

Create a company file
You can create a company file using the New Company File Assistant. This assistant is a series of interactive windows that guide you through the process of creating a new company file.
Do you already have a company file? If your accountant or MYOB consultant has provided you with a company file, or if you want to use a file that you created with a test drive version of this software, you don’t need to create a company file.
NOTE :

You need to know…
The default list of accounts that you want to start with

Description
Accounts are the categories that you will allocate each of your transactions to. When you create a company file, you need to select a default list of accounts. You can: • start with an accounts list provided by MYOB. You can select a predefined accounts list suitable for your business. • import a list of accounts. You can import an accounts list from another company file or from one that has been provided by your accountant or MYOB Certified Consultant. • build your own list. You can start with an accounts list that has the minimum accounts required by your AccountRight software and then add to it. Note that you can modify your accounts list after creating your company file.

Before you start:
You need to know…
Your current financial year

Description
This is the financial year for which you want to start recording transactions in your company file. Note that a financial year is represented by the calendar year in which the financial year ends. For example, if your financial year ends in June 2012, your financial year is 2012. This is the month in which your financial year ends. For most businesses the last month is June. This is the earliest month for which you want to record transactions. For example, if you want to enter transactions dated 1 September or later, your conversion month is September. You cannot enter transactions dated before the conversion month.

The last month of your financial year Your conversion month

To create a company file
1

Start your AccountRight software. A welcome window appears.

18

C H A PT E R 2

C RE A T I NG A C O MP A NY F I L E

2

Click Create a company file. The New Company File Assistant appears.

8 9 3

Click Next. The Accounts List Options window appears. Select the default accounts list you want to start with.

Select the AccountRight product you want to create a company file for. This should be the product you are licensed to use, unless you want to evaluate another AccountRight product. If you are not licensed to use the selected product, the company file can only be edited for 30 days, after which it will become a read‐only file.

4 5

Click Next. The Company Information window appears. Enter your business contact and registration details. If available, also enter your AccountRight serial number. Click Next. The Financial Year window appears. Enter your financial year details and conversion month.
NOTE : Set your financial year Remember that this is the financial year for which you want to start recording transactions in your company file. It does not need to be the financial year that your business is currently operating in.

6 7

If you choose to... start with an accounts list provided by MYOB import a list of accounts build your own list
10

Continue with... step 10 step 12 step 12

Click Next. The Accounts List Selection window appears.

CREATE A COMPANY FILE

1 9

11

Select the industry that best matches your own business.

14

By default, the company file will be saved in your computer’s AccountRight library.
NOTE : AccountRight libraries An AccountRight library is a folder on your computer, or a network computer, where company files may be saved. Only files saved in an AccountRight library can be opened.

A suitable accounts list for the industry you selected appears. If you want to print the list, click Print. Later you can tailor the list to meet the needs of your business.
12 13

If you want to save your company file in another library: a Click Change Location. The Select a company file location window appears. b Select the library you want to save the file in: My library located at C:\Users\Public\Documents\MYOB\My AccountRight Files. If there are folders in your library (created using Windows Explorer), you can also select a folder. another computer. You will need to add the library if it is the first time you are accessing it (press F1 for information about adding network libraries). c Click OK.
15

Click Next. The Create Company File window appears. If you want to change your company file name, you can edit it in the Company File Name field.

Click Create Company File. Your company file is created and the Conclusion window appears. Click Command Centre to display the Command Centre window.

16

20

C H A PT E R 2

C RE A T I NG A C O MP A NY F I L E

Activate the company file
Activation is a process that verifies you have a legal installation of AccountRight. You can activate your company file online or over the phone.
NOTE : Do you need to complete this task? You don’t need to activate a company file that you have created for testing purposes or any file you are no longer entering transactions into.

Activation limits There is a limit to the number of company files you can activate under your software licence. If you need to activate multiple company files (for example, yours is a bookkeeping business looking after many clients), you’ll need to obtain licence extensions to activate additional company files. Contact MYOB Customer Service about obtaining licence extensions.

After creating a company file, you can use it for 30 days in trial mode, after which you must activate the file if you want to continue entering transactions into it. If you don’t activate the file within 30 days, it will become read‐only, which means you can open, view, print and export information, but you will not be able to enter new information into the file until you activate it. After activating a file, you must confirm the company file once or twice a year, that is, extend its activation throughout its working life. For more information, see ‘Confirming activated company files’ on page 262.
NOTE : Automatic confirmation If you want, you can set a preference to automatically confirm an activated company file over the internet when required.

Before you begin
Before you can activate a company file, you need to: know your product serial number. If you didn’t enter your serial number when creating the company file, you will need to enter it during the activation process. You can find your serial number on the software CD sleeve or on a confirmation email from MYOB if you downloaded your product. register your software. Registration enables MYOB to contact you should there be any issues with your software. See the Getting Started guide for information on how to register your software.

ACTIVATE THE COMPANY FILE

2 1

To activate a company file
1

Method
Activate by Phone

Steps
1 2 3

Open the company file to be activated and sign on. The Activation Assistant appears.

Select the Activate by phone option and click Next. If you have not previously entered your serial number, type it in the Serial Number field. Call MYOB on the phone number displayed above the Serial Number field and request a licence file to be emailed to you. Once you have received the email, detach your licence file and save it to your computer (for example, your desktop). In the Activation Assistant, click Browse next to the Select the licence file to load field, to locate the licence file. Select the file and click Open. Click Activate to activate the file.

4

5

6 7 3 4

2

Click I use this company file to record or edit my business transactions, then choose an activation option:
Method
Activate Online

Close the assistant. If you want to activate another company file: a Go to the File menu and choose Open. The Open window appears. b Open the company file to be activated and sign on to the file. c Continue from step 2 above.

Steps
1 2 3 4

Ensure you are connected to the internet. Choose Activate Online and then click Next. The Details window appears. If you have not previously entered your serial number, type it in the Serial Number field. Click Activate to activate the file.

22

C H A PT E R 2

C RE A T I NG A C O MP A NY F I L E

Set up accounts
Accounts provide a means for grouping similar transactions. For example, if your business pays rent for the use of its premises, you would create a rent account and then allocate all rent payments to that account. The accounts you use for your business are grouped in an accounts list.
Do you need to complete this task? If your accountant or MYOB Certified Consultant has provided you with a company file, this task may have been completed for you. In this case, go to ‘Enter account opening balances’ on page 26.
NOTE :

Account classifications and types are described in the following table.
Classification
Asset (1‐xxxx)

Type
Bank Accounts Receivable Other Current Asset Fixed Asset

Description
Money in the bank, for example, in a cheque or savings account. Money owed to you by your customers. Assets that, if required, can be turned into cash within a year. These may include your term deposits. Assets which have a long life, for example, buildings, cars and computers. Fixed assets are usually depreciated. Other assets you own such as loans made to others and goodwill. Repayments required to service credit card debt. Money owed by you to your suppliers. Money owed by you that is due in less than a year, for example, GST. Money owed by you that is due in more than one year, for example, a business loan. Other money you owe. The business’s net worth, that is, its assets minus its liabilities. Common equity accounts are current year earnings, retained earnings and shareholders’ equity.

When you created your company file, you selected a default accounts list to start with. This list may already have the accounts you need. If not, you can change the list to suit your needs. If you are unsure, ask your accountant which accounts you should create, edit or delete. If you chose to import a list of accounts, you should import this list now. See ‘Importing data’ on page 268. Account numbers Each account is identified by a unique five‐digit number. The first digit indicates the account’s classification (for example, accounts starting with 1 are asset accounts). The remaining four digits determine its location within the classification. The lower the number, the higher up in the list it appears. For example, account 1‐1100 appears above 1‐1200. Account classifications and types The accounts list groups accounts into eight classifications—Asset, Liability, Equity, Income, Cost of Sales, Expense, Other Income and Other Expense. Within each account classification there is at least one account type.
Equity (3‐xxxx) Liability (2‐xxxx)

Other Asset Credit Card Accounts Payable Other Current Liability Long Term Liability Other Liability Equity

SET UP ACCOUNTS

2 3

Classification
Income (4‐xxxx) Cost of Sales (5‐xxxx) Expense (6‐xxxx) Other Income (8‐xxxx) Other Expense (9‐xxxx)

Type
Income Cost of Sales

Description
Revenue from the sale of goods and services. The direct cost of selling your goods and providing services, for example, purchase costs and freight charges. The day‐to‐day expenses of running your business, for example, utility bills, employee wages and cleaning. Other revenues, for example, interest earned on savings and dividends paid from shares. Other expenses, for example, interest charged.

You group accounts by indenting the detail accounts located directly below a header account. For more information, see ‘To group detail accounts with a header account’ on page 26.
Header accounts Detail accounts

Expense

Other Income

Note that: You cannot allocate transactions to a header account. The balance of a header account is the sum of the detail accounts indented directly below it. You can have up to three header account levels. How you group your accounts can affect how totals and subtotals are calculated on reports.

Other Expense

Header and detail accounts Your accounts list consists of detail accounts (the accounts to which you allocate transactions) and header accounts. Header accounts group related detail accounts to help you organise your accounts list. For example, you could group your telephone, electricity and gas expense accounts using a Utilities header account. This makes it easier for you to locate the utility expense accounts in the accounts list and to see your combined utility expenses.

Setting up accounts
If you want to...
Create an account Change the details of an account Group detail accounts with a header account Import an accounts list

See page 25 page 168 page 26 page 268

24

C H A PT E R 2

C RE A T I NG A C O MP A NY F I L E

To create an account
1

7

Click the Details tab.

Go to the Accounts command centre and click Accounts List. The Accounts List window appears. Click New. The Account Information window appears.

2

8

If you want, type a brief description of the account in the Description field. In the Tax Code field, enter the tax code that you use most often with transactions that will be posted to this account. If you are creating an asset, liability or equity account (other than an asset with the account type of Bank), select an option from the Classification for Statement of Cash Flows list. Classifying the accounts allows you to generate a statement of cash flows. This report shows how your cash position has changed over time, profit earned and where your cash was spent. If you’re unsure about which classification to use, consult your accountant or an MYOB Certified Consultant.

9 3

If you want to create a header account, select the Header Account option or if you want to create a detail account, select Detail. Select the account type from the Account Type list. The Account Classification field changes according to the selection you make. For more information on account classifications, see ‘Account classifications and types’ on page 23. Enter a four‐digit number for the account in the Account Number field. The number must be unique within each account classification. Press TAB and type a name for the account.

10

4

5

6

SET UP ACCOUNTS

2 5

11

If you are creating a bank or credit card account, and you want to keep a record of your bank account details, or make electronic payments, click the Banking tab and enter your account details. [Detail accounts only] If you want to enter historical balances for the last financial year, click the History tab and complete the Last FY column. That way you can compare the monthly account balances for this year and last year. Click OK when you have finished. The account now appears in your accounts list.

To group detail accounts with a header account
You group accounts by indenting the accounts located below a header account.
1

12

Go to the Accounts command centre and click Accounts List. The Accounts List window appears. Select the detail account you want to group. Click the Down button at the bottom of the window to group the account with the header located above it.

2 3

13

Enter account opening balances
Account opening balances are the balances of your accounts as at the first day of your conversion month.
Do you need to complete this task? If you were in business prior to your conversion month, most of your accounts probably already have balances. If you want to produce financial reports that include these balances (such as a balance sheet), or you want to track the balance of accounts with a cumulative balance (such as your bank account), you need to enter these balances.
NOTE :

The balances you enter depend on whether your conversion month is also the first month of your financial year. If your conversion month: is the first month of your financial year, you enter the opening balances of your asset, liability and equity accounts only. is not the first month of your financial year (for example, if your financial year starts in July but your conversion month is September), you can enter the opening balances of all your accounts. Opening bank account balances You can enter the following amounts as the opening balance of a bank account: the bank account balance that appears on your balance sheet or trial balance reports as at the day prior to your conversion date. For example, if your conversion date is 1 July 2011, this is the bank account balance as at 30 June 2011. These reports can be provided by your accountant, or, if you were previously using other accounting software, printed using that software. the cashbook balance of the account as at the end of the day prior to your conversion date. You can calculate your cashbook balance by taking into account the transactions not yet cleared by your

You can find your account opening balances on a trial balance report, a balance sheet or a profit & loss report prepared for the period immediately prior to your conversion date. You can ask your accountant to prepare these reports. You may also be able to find your account opening balances using your previous accounting software or paper‐based records.

26

C H A PT E R 2

C RE A T I NG A C O MP A NY F I L E

bank as at the conversion date and the balance that appears on your bank statement at that date. For example, assume that $500 worth of deposits and $1000 worth of payments were uncleared as at your conversion date (that is, they had not appeared on a bank statement). The cashbook balance would be calculated as shown below:
Bank statement balance as at the conversion date ADD uncleared deposits SUBTRACT uncleared payments Cashbook balance as at the conversion date $21,000.00 + $500.00 – $1,000.00 $20,500.00

To enter opening balances
1

3

Go to the Setup menu, choose Balances and then Account Opening Balances. The Account Opening Balances window appears. Enter the balances in the Opening Balance column.
NOTE : Enter opening balances as positive numbers Don’t, for example, enter your liability account balances as negative numbers. Enter negative amounts only if accounts truly have negative balances. As a rule, these will be asset accounts that record accumulated depreciation.

Check that the amount in the Amount left to be allocated field at the bottom of the window shows $0.00. If this field displays an amount other than $0.00, check your opening balances again because they are either incomplete or incorrect. However, you can continue the setup process if there is an amount in the Amount left to be allocated field. The amount will be assigned to a special equity account called Historical Balancing.

2

4

Click OK.

ENTER ACCOUNT OPENING BALANCES

2 7

Set up preferences
Preferences are settings that enable you to tailor AccountRight to your business requirements and processes. For example, you can choose to automatically print invoices after recording them, or prevent users from editing transactions.
NOTE : Do you need to complete this task? While you can complete this step later, you should review the default preferences that have been set before you start entering transactions.

Customise Easy Setup Assistant. This assistant guides you through setting up key preferences. To access the assistant, go to the Setup menu, choose Easy Setup Assistant and then click Customise. Preferences window. This window lists all of the preferences. To view this window, go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. Some preferences you should consider choosing include: Transactions CAN’T be Changed; They Must be Reversed If you don’t want to allow users to edit or delete transactions, select this option. If they want to change or delete a transaction, they will need to do so by recording a reversal transaction. For more information, see ‘Reversing a transaction’ on page 178.

Before setting preferences, close any open windows (apart from the Command Centre). You will not be able to change preferences if you have other windows open. You can set up your preferences using the:

Set up software management
Software Manager is a web‐based tool that notifies you that your software has been updated, and enables you to install the update from the web. Note that you may have already set up this feature when you installed your software. For more information about how to set up and use Software Manager, see ‘Managing software updates’ on page 263.

28

C H A PT E R 2

C RE A T I NG A C O MP A NY F I L E

Set a password for the Administrator user account
When you created your company file, a user account called Administrator was automatically created. A user account is the means for: controlling access to a company file tracking transaction record history saving individual preferences. By default, the Administrator user account does not have a password assigned to it. Anyone who signs on with the Administrator user ID will have access to all command centres, functions and windows and will be able to create, edit and delete other user accounts. For that reason, as soon as you create a company file, you should assign a password to the Administrator user account; otherwise, anyone can sign on and then enter, edit and delete transactions.
3

Leave the Existing Password field blank, type the password in both the Password and Confirm Password fields. Click Record.

4

Will more than one person access your company file? If you want to restrict other users from accessing certain features or information, you can create additional user accounts and specify their access restrictions. For more information, see ‘Managing user accounts’ on page 259.
NOTE :

To set a password for the Administrator user account
1

Start AccountRight and open your company file to the Sign‐on window. Type Administrator in the User ID field and then click Change Password. The Change Password window appears.

2

SET A PASSWORD FOR THE ADMINISTRATOR USER ACCOUNT

2 9

30

C H A PT E R 2

C RE A T I NG A C O MP A NY F I L E

3 Setting up
When you have created a company file and completed the company file setup tasks (see ‘Creating a company file’ on page 17), you can start recording transactions in your company file. However, if you want to use other features of your software (such as tracking amounts you owe or the quantity of items sold), you need to complete additional setup tasks. This chapter details the additional tasks.

Overview
The setup tasks you need to complete depend on the features you want to use and whether your business was operating prior to your conversion month.
Your needs
Sales and Purchases

Setup required
If you want to track the money that you owe suppliers or that you are owed by customers, you will need to use the Purchases and Sales command centres. Before you can use these command centres, you need to complete the sales and purchases setup tasks in this chapter. If you want to track the on‐hand quantity and value of items you buy and sell, you need to create records to store the details of your items. You do this using the Inventory command centre. Also, when you buy and sell an item, you will need to record details about each transaction (such as who you purchased the items from, how many you purchased and the price). You do this using the Sales and Purchases command centres. Hence, you need to complete the sales and purchases setup tasks in this chapter

What features do you want to use?
The following table provides some examples of different setup requirements.
Inventory

Your needs
Banking

Setup required
If you only want to use your software to fulfil basic accounting requirements (such as report tax payable or produce a year‐end balance sheet), you may only need to do an initial bank reconciliation for each of your bank accounts. Reconciling accounts helps ensure the integrity of the information you record in your company file (see ‘Do an initial bank reconciliation’ on page 39).

31

When did your business start operating?
The setup tasks you need to complete will also depend on whether your business was operating prior to your conversion month. The following table describes the setup required for new and existing businesses.
Business status
New

Setup tasks
You may not need to do every task. An introduction to each task helps you determine whether you need to do the task and, if so, the information you need.
Task See
Set up sales Set up purchases Set up payroll [AccountRight Plus only] Set up electronic payments Do an initial bank reconciliation Create item records Enter your inventory opening balances page 33 page 34 page 35 page 36 page 39 page 42 page 43

Setup required
If you have just started your business, you may have very little information about your future customers, suppliers, employees and items that you buy or sell. You can add these details later when you have more information. However, you should read through the setup tasks to see which features you might use and the tasks you need to complete to start using them. If your business was operating prior to your conversion month, it is likely that transactions that occurred prior to your conversion month still affect your business. For example, a customer may owe you money for sales you made prior to your conversion month, or you may have outstanding bills to pay. You will need to enter these historical details in your company file.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Existing

32

C H A P T E R 3

S E T T I N G U P

Set up sales
You can use the sales features to: prepare sales quotes, orders and invoices generate statements view customer sales history see how much your customers owe you.
Do you need to do this task? If you want to record sales and print invoices or statements, you need to set up the sales features.
NOTE :

Optional sales setup tasks
In addition to the Sales Easy Setup Assistant tasks, you may also want to do the following tasks if they are relevant to your business.
Task
Customise forms Import cards Change the appearance of the default invoice and statement forms. Import customer information from: • another company file • another accounting system • a spreadsheet • a text file. Synchronise your customer records with your contact records in Microsoft Outlook. Create job records to track the progress and profitability of the work you do for your clients. Use identifiers and custom lists to group the cards of customers who have similar attributes.

See page 199 page 268

Before you start using the sales features, you should use the Sales Easy Setup Assistant to enter the following information: Credit terms and credit limits Enter the credit terms and credit limits you generally extend to your customers. Customer details Create a record for each of your customers and enter details such as their addresses and phone numbers. Pre‐conversion sales [Existing businesses only] If customers owed you money on the first day of your conversion month, you will need to record some details about the corresponding sales, such as the invoice date and the amount that is outstanding. To access the assistant, go to the Setup menu, choose Easy Setup Assistant, and then click Sales. You can also use the Sales Easy Setup Assistant to specify your preferred invoice layout, the income account you will allocate most of your sales to, and several other settings. These settings will automatically be selected for records you create for your customers; however, you can change them as required.

Synchronise customer records with Outlook Create job records Group cards

page 217

page 227

page 214

SET UP SALES

3 3

Set up purchases
You can use the purchases features to: record quotes, orders and bills view your purchase history see what you owe your suppliers.
Task Do you need to do this task? If you want to record the orders and purchases you make with suppliers and track the amounts you owe, you need to set up the purchases features.
NOTE :

Optional purchases setup tasks
In addition to the Purchases Easy Setup Assistant tasks, you may also want to do the following tasks if they are relevant to your business.
See
Change the appearance of the default purchase orders and other forms. Import supplier information from: • another company file • another accounting system • a spreadsheet • a text file. Synchronise your supplier card records with your contact records in Microsoft Outlook. Use identifiers and custom lists to group the cards of suppliers who have similar attributes. page 199 page 268

Customise forms Import cards

Before you start using the purchases features, you should use the Purchases Easy Setup Assistant to enter the following information: Supplier details Create a card record for each of your suppliers and enter details such as their addresses and phone numbers. Pre‐conversion purchases [Existing businesses only] If you had outstanding bills on the first day of your conversion month, you will need to record some details about them, such as outstanding bill amounts and the credit terms. To access the Purchases Easy Setup Assistant, go to the Setup menu, choose Easy Setup Assistant and then click Purchases. You can also use the Purchases Easy Setup Assistant to choose the payment method you normally use to pay bills, your preferred purchase order layout and several other settings that will help you record purchases faster. These settings will automatically apply to cards you create for your suppliers; however, you can change them as required.
Synchronise supplier records with Outlook Group cards

page 217

page 214

34

C H A P T E R 3

S E T T I N G U P

Set up payroll
Payroll is not available in AccountRight Standard You use the payroll feature to: process pays for your employees calculate superannuation amounts and make superannuation payments track employee entitlements (such as personal and annual leave) pay accrued payroll liabilities print pay slips and paycheques prepare payment summaries.
Do you need to do this task? If you want to process employee pays, track amounts you owe to the ATO and print payment summaries, you need to set up the payroll features.
NOTE :

Review payroll categories The components of an employee’s pay, such as wages, entitlements and taxes, are called payroll categories. These are assigned to an employee’s card to calculate their standard pay. Review the details of each payroll category to make sure it matches the way you do business. Enter employee details Create a card record for each of your employees and enter details such as their addresses and payroll information. Enter pay history [Existing businesses only] If you have already paid the employee in the current payroll year, you should enter the amounts you have paid your employees. These amounts will be used on payment summaries and reports not derived from payroll activity (such as register reports). They are not recorded as transactions in your accounts. You can use the Payroll Easy Setup Assistant to do these tasks. To access the Payroll Easy Setup Assistant, go to the Setup menu, choose Easy Setup Assistant and then click Payroll. For more information on creating payroll categories and entering employee payroll information, see ‘Creating payroll categories’ on page 102 and ‘Entering employee payroll information’ on page 110.

Before you start using the payroll features, you need to: Load tax tables PAYG withholding taxes are amounts that are calculated and deducted from employee pays according to the rules established by the Australian Taxation Office (ATO). In AccountRight, these calculation rules are stored in a tax table file that you need to load into your company file.
NOTE : Receive alerts for tax table updates and software updates You can register to be alerted about updates to your tax tables, as well as compliance updates and new versions of your software. For more information, see ‘Managing software updates’ on page 263.

Enter general payroll information Enter the current payroll year, number of hours in your normal working week, your Withholding Payer Number (if you have one) and the default superannuation fund for your employees.

SET UP PAYROLL

3 5

Optional payroll setup tasks
In addition to the Payroll Easy Setup Assistant tasks, you may also want to do the following tasks if they are relevant to your business.
Task
Set up timesheets Use timesheets to record all the hours worked by hourly employees or to record extra hours worked by employees that are paid based on a standard pay. If you pay employees for time‐billing activities, you can also enter activity details on timesheets and use these details to create activity slips. Calculate your state or territory payroll tax amounts using the payroll information in your AccountRight software.

Task
Customise forms Import cards Change the appearance of the default pay slip and paycheque forms. Import employee information from: • another company file • another accounting system • a spreadsheet • a text file. Synchronise your employees records with your contact records in Microsoft Outlook.

See page 199 page 268

See page 114

Synchronise employees records with Outlook page 128 Group cards

page 217

Set up payroll tax

Use identifiers and custom lists to group the cards of employee who have similar attributes.

page 214

Set up electronic payments
If you want, you can use your AccountRight software to pay your suppliers and employees electronically.
NOTE : Do you need to complete this task? If you want to pay your suppliers and employees electronically using AccountRight, you need to set up this feature.

Before you can prepare an electronic payment file, you need to complete the following steps.
Step
1 2 Record your bank account details Set up a clearing account Record the bank details of suppliers Record the bank details of employees

See page 37 page 37 page 37 page 38

You can make electronic payments by preparing an electronic payment file (ABA file) for your bank to process—discussed in this section.

3 4

36

C H A P T E R 3

S E T T I N G U P

Task 1: Record your bank account details
To record your bank account details
1

Task 2: Set up a clearing account
When you record a transaction you want to pay electronically, the transaction is posted to a temporary holding account until you create the electronic payment file. This holding account is called a clearing account. Check your accounts list for an account named ‘Electronic Clearing Account’. If it doesn’t exist, you need to create it (see ‘Set up accounts’ on page 23) and then make this account the linked (default) account for electronic payments.

Go to the Accounts command centre and click Accounts List. The Accounts List window appears. Select the bank account (that is, an account with a Bank or Credit Card account type) that you want to use for electronic payments. Click Edit. The Account Information window appears. Click the Banking tab.

2

3 4

To link the clearing account
1

Go to the Setup menu, choose Linked Accounts and then Accounts & Banking Accounts. The Accounts & Banking Linked Accounts window appears. In the Bank Account for Electronic Payments field, type or select the Electronic Clearing Account. Click OK.

2

3

Task 3: Record the bank details of suppliers
5

Enter your bank account details in the fields. Copy this information exactly as it appears on your bank statement or chequebook. Select I create Bank Files (ABA) for This Account and enter the electronic payment file (ABA file) details. If your bank file requires a self‐balancing transaction, select Include a Self‐Balancing transaction. Click OK to return to the Accounts List window. Repeat from step 2 above for each bank account you want to make electronic payments from.

To record the bank details of a supplier
1

6

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Locate the supplier you pay electronically and click Edit. The Card Information window appears.

2

7

8 9

SET UP ELECTRONIC PAYMENTS

3 7

3

Click the Payment Details tab.
NOTE : If you haven’t created a card for the employee... You can create an employee card now by clicking New in the Cards List window and entering the employee’s details.

3 4 5

Click the Payment Details tab. Select Electronic from the Payment Method list. Select the number of bank accounts (up to three) the employee wants their pay to be distributed to. Enter the employee’s bank account details. Type the statement text (Account 1 only) you want to appear on the employee’s bank statements, for example ‘monthly pay’. If you are distributing to more than one account, in the Value field, type the amount or percentage of the pay to be deposited into the account and select the distribution method (Percent or Dollar). Note that the final account will receive the remaining amount of your employee's net pay.

6 7

8

4 5

Enter the supplier’s bank account details. In the Statement Text field, type the text you want to appear on your supplier’s bank statements. For example, you may want the text ‘monthly rent’ to be shown on your real estate agent’s bank statement since this will be a recurring transaction each month. Click Refund Details and enter the payment method by which the supplier refunds you and click OK. The Card Information window appears. Click OK to return to the Cards List window. Repeat from step 2 above for each supplier you pay electronically.

6

7 8

Task 4: Record the bank details of employees
To record the bank details of an employee
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Locate the employee you pay electronically and click Edit. The Card Information window appears.

9 10

Click OK to return to the Cards List window. Repeat from step 2 above for each employee you pay electronically.

2

38

C H A P T E R 3

S E T T I N G U P

Do an initial bank reconciliation
To check the accuracy of your business records, you should check that the record of your bank account balances matches the amounts on your bank statements. This task is called reconciling accounts. If your business traded prior to your conversion month and you have uncleared banking transactions as at the first day of your conversion month, you need to do an initial bank reconciliation. Uncleared banking transactions are withdrawals and deposits that have not been cleared by your bank as at the start of your conversion month.
NOTE : Do you need to complete this task? The initial bank reconciliation procedure needs to be done for each bank account that had uncleared transactions as at the first day of your conversion month.

For example, in June, the month prior to your conversion month, you wrote a cheque for $1,000 and deposited $500 you received from a customer. If these transactions had not appeared on a bank statement by 30 June, you need to record both transactions in your company file.

Task 2: Record uncleared withdrawals and deposits
You need to record uncleared transactions in such a way that the opening bank account balance is not affected. To do this, you need to post a debit and a credit of equal amounts for each transaction against the applicable bank account.

To do an initial bank reconciliation:
Task
1 2 3 Identify uncleared withdrawals and deposits Record uncleared withdrawals and deposits Reconcile

To enter uncleared withdrawals
1

See below below page 41
3 2

Go to the Banking command centre and click Spend Money. The Spend Money window appears. In the Pay from Account field, type or select the bank account you want to reconcile. In the Cheque No. field, enter a reference number for the withdrawal. In the Date field, type the first day of your conversion month. For example, if your conversion month is July 2011, enter 01/07/11. In the Amount field, type the amount of the withdrawal. In the Acct No. field, type or select the bank account you want to reconcile. This must be the account entered in step 2 on page 39. In the Tax field, select the N‐T tax code.

4

Task 1: Identify uncleared withdrawals and deposits
Compare your banking source information (such as your chequebook and deposit book) with your bank statements for the period that includes your conversion date. If you find transactions that have not been cleared by your bank as at this date, you will need to record the details of these transactions in your company file.

5 6

7

DO AN INITIAL BANK RECONCILIATION

3 9

8

Enter details of the withdrawal in the Memo field.

3

In the Date field, type the first day of your conversion month. For example, if your conversion month is July 2011, enter 01/07/11. In the Amount Received field, type the amount of the deposit. In the Acct No. field, type or select the bank account you want to reconcile. This must be the account entered in step 2 above. In the Tax field, select the N‐T tax code. Enter details of the deposit in the Memo field.

4 5

6 7

9 10

Click Record. Repeat from step 3 on page 39 for each uncleared withdrawal.
8 9

To enter uncleared deposits
1

Click Record. Repeat from step 3 above for each uncleared deposit.

Go to the Banking command centre and click Receive Money. The Receive Money window appears. In the Deposit to Account field, type or select the bank account you want to reconcile.

2

40

C H A P T E R 3

S E T T I N G U P

Task 3: Reconcile
To reconcile the account
1

5

For each uncleared withdrawal, click the select column next to the deposit. For each uncleared deposit, click the select column next to the withdrawal. When each uncleared transaction is selected, $0.00 appears in the Out of Balance field.

6

Go to the Banking command centre and click Reconcile Accounts. The Reconcile Accounts window appears.

2 3

In the Account field, select the bank account you want to reconcile. In the Closing Statement Balance field, enter the closing bank balance as at the day prior to your conversion month (for example, the closing balance as at 30/06/2011). In the Bank Statement Date field, enter the first date of your conversion month. (For example, if your conversion month is July 2011, enter 01/07/11.) Your uncleared transactions appear. When you recorded uncleared transactions, the same account was debited and credited. Therefore, an uncleared transaction appears as both a deposit and a withdrawal.

7

4

Click Reconcile. A confirmation window appears. If you want, do one of the following: To print a report, click Print Report. When the report is printed, click Reconcile. To reconcile without printing a report, click Reconcile. To change any details you entered in the Reconcile Accounts window, click Cancel and make the required changes.

DO AN INITIAL BANK RECONCILIATION

4 1

Create item records
You can use item records to store information about a product and to track the quantities you buy and sell. You can also create records for each type of service you provide.
NOTE : Do you need to complete this task? If you buy and sell items, such as finished goods, components used in production and raw materials, you need to create records for them.

Optional inventory setup tasks
You may want to do the following tasks if they are relevant to your business.
Task
Import items Import item information from: • another company file • another accounting system • a spreadsheet • a text file. Customise item pricing according to customer status and sales quantities. Group and sort items by assigning attributes to your items from custom lists you define. Set up fields to record additional information about your inventory items.

See page 268

Item records enable you to view the sales and purchase history of the products you sell or use in production. You can determine which items are your best sellers and what you have in stock. This can help you identify sales trends and reorder items before you run out of them. You can also create item records for the services you provide. This enables you to list the items and services you buy and sell on the same purchase order or invoice. For example, if you are a plumber, you could set up items for the materials you buy in order to carry out your work. You could also set up item records for the services you provide, such as installation and repairs. You can then record the labour and material charges on the same invoice. For information about creating item records, see ‘Creating items’, on page 149.
Set up pricing levels Group items using custom lists Create custom fields

page 159 page 160

page 161

42

C H A P T E R 3

S E T T I N G U P

Enter your inventory opening balances
If you had items on hand as at the first day of your conversion month, and you want to track the on‐hand quantities and values of these items, you need to enter your inventory opening balances. Before you enter your opening inventory balances, you need a stocktake of the actual items in your inventory. To help you do this, you can print the Inventory Count Sheet report, which lists all your inventoried items, and manually record quantities on it.

To print the inventory count sheet
1

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Count Inventory. The Count Inventory window appears. Click Print. The Inventory Count Sheet report is printed, displaying a list of all your items. Enter all your on hand quantities on this sheet.

2

3

To enter opening on-hand inventory items and values
1

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Count Inventory. The Count Inventory window appears, displaying a list of your inventory items. In the Counted column, type the quantity counted for each item. The Difference column will change to show the difference between the On Hand column and Counted column.

3

When you have entered all your item quantities, click Adjust Inventory. The Adjustment Information window appears advising you to provide a default adjustment (expense) account. Note that when you are entering opening on‐hand balances, you don’t need to enter a default expense account.

2

4

Click Continue. The window that appears depends on whether you have entered an opening balance for your stock asset account (see ‘Enter account opening balances’ on page 26). If you entered a stock opening balance, the Adjust Inventory window appears. If you did not enter an opening quantity for your stock or a stock account balance, the Adjustment Information window appears. From here you can set up opening quantities for your stock and an opening balance for your stock account.

ENTER YOUR INVENTORY OPENING BALANCES

4 3

The Adjust Inventory window displays a line for each item whose opening quantity you entered in the Count Inventory window. The line items display each item's number, name, quantity and the account to which the opening balance will be posted. This account is either your inventory asset account, or, if you have not entered an opening balance for your inventory asset account, your historical balancing account.

5

Enter any changes to the default entries in the Inventory Journal Number, Date and Memo fields. Type the unit cost of each item (that is, how much a unit of each item costs you, not how much you are selling it for).
NOTE : Do not change the account number in the Account column. The selection you made at step 4 on page 43 determines the default account used to record your opening balances.

6

7

Click Record. The value of each item in the list is updated. You can print the Items List Summary report to check your inventory status.

44

C H A P T E R 3

S E T T I N G U P

4 Banking
This chapter shows you how to record the cheques you have written, the cheques and credit card payments you have received, your credit card purchases, your credit card payments and your ATM and internet withdrawals and transfers. You can create any number of bank and credit card accounts in AccountRight, and allocate transactions to as many accounts as you like. If you are familiar with manual multi‐column cashbook systems, you can think of AccountRight as having the capacity to run multiple cashbooks with an infinite number of columns.

Receiving money
In AccountRight, the term receiving money refers to recording receipts that are not payments for invoices. These receipts might include equity injections, interest, adjustments and so on. These can be entered using the Receive Money window or by selecting the Receive Money transaction type in the Bank Register window. In the Receive Money window, you can record more details about the receipt and allocate it to more than one account. This is the procedure covered in this section. If you want to use the Bank Register window—which lets you record a receipt with minimum details—see ‘Entering transactions in the Bank Register window’ on page 52. If you want to record a payment for an invoice entered using the Sales command centre, use the Receive Payments window or select the Receive Payment transaction type in the Bank Register window. See ‘Receiving payments’ on page 72 for more information.

45

Printing payment receipts You can print payment receipts for payments entered in the Receive Money and Bank Register windows. For more information, see ‘Printing payment receipts’ on page 74.

10

Allocate the amount to the appropriate account.
A B C D E

To record money you receive
1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Receive Money. The Receive Money window appears. Choose the account that will be used to record the money. Deposit to Account. Select this option if the money was deposited directly to your bank account. Group with Undeposited Funds. Select this option if the money will be deposited at a later time. For information about undeposited funds and preparing bank deposits, see ‘Preparing a bank deposit’ on page 47. If the deposit amount included tax, select the Tax Inclusive option. In the Payor field, enter the payor’s card. In the Amount Received field, type the amount received. [Optional] In the Payment Method field, select the payment method. [Optional] If you want to record additional details about the transaction, such as a cheque number, click Details and record the details in the Applied Payment Details window that appears. Enter the date of the transaction. [Optional] Type a detailed comment in the Memo field to help you identify the transaction later.
11

A B

Enter an account to which you want to assign the transaction or part of the transaction. Type the amount you want to assign to this account. The total amount in this column must equal the amount in the Amount Received field before you can record the transaction. [Optional] Assign the amount to a job by entering the job code here. [Optional] Type a memo for each entry in the transaction. The tax code that is linked to the allocation account appears here automatically. You can change it if necessary.

2

C D E

3 4 5 6

If the payment covers more than one account, repeat step 10 above on a new transaction line. If you want to view or change the tax amounts assigned to the transaction, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the Tax field. [Optional] If you use categories and want to assign the transaction to a particular category, select a category from the Category list.
TIP : Save the deposit as a recurring transaction To store the transaction as a recurring transaction so that you can use it again, click Save as Recurring. In the Recurring Schedule Information window, enter the necessary information and click OK. For more information, see ‘Recurring transactions’ on page 179.

12

7

13

8 9

14

Click Record.

46

C H A P T E R 4

BANKING

Preparing a bank deposit
When you deposit the payments you receive into your bank, you need to record that deposit using the Prepare Bank Deposit feature. Before you can record a bank deposit, you need to have already posted the payments you received to a temporary holding account (known as an Undeposited Funds account) by having selected the Group with Undeposited Funds option in the Receive Money or Receive Payments windows when you recorded each payment.
4

Enter a date to display undeposited funds up to and including that date. [Optional] Type a description of the bank deposit in the Memo field to help you identify the payment later.

5

NOTE : Don’t group payments made directly to your bank account Payments deposited directly into your bank account (for example a customer payment made by direct credit), need to be posted to the bank account that received the payment. You do not need to group these payments.

6

To prepare a bank deposit
1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Prepare Bank Deposit. The Prepare Bank Deposit window appears. In the Deposit to Account field, enter the account you want to deposit funds into. If you want to group receipts by payment method: a In the Select Receipts by field, select Payment Method. b In the adjacent field that appears, enter one or more payment types. (For credit cards, select one or more credit card types.) Only payments made using that method are listed.

Select the receipts you want to include in the bank deposit by clicking in the Deposit column next to them. If you want to select or deselect all receipts, click the select icon ( ) at the top of the Deposit column.

2

3

PREPARING A BANK DEPOSIT

4 7

7

[Optional] If you need to enter an adjustment transaction—for example, to record credit card transaction fees or to keep part of the deposit as cash—click Deposit Adjustment. The Bank and Deposit Adjustments window appears.

In the Fees and Cash Back and/or the Adjustment for Excess Funds sections: a Type the adjustment amount. b Type the date and an ID number. c Select an expense or income account—as appropriate—for the adjustment amounts. d Type a description in the Memo field and complete other fields as necessary. e Click Record. If you need to record additional adjustments or fees, click Deposit Adjustment again.
8

Click Record to record the bank deposit.

Spending money
In AccountRight, the term spending money refers specifically to recording payments for transactions for which purchases have not been created. These include equity drawings, bank charges, telephone bills and so on. These types of payments can be entered using the Spend Money window or by selecting the Spend Money transaction type in the Bank Register window. The Spend Money window lets you record more details about the payment and allocate the payment to more than one account. This is the procedure covered in this section. If you want to use the Bank Register window—which lets you record a payment with minimum details—see ‘Entering transactions in the Bank Register window’ on page 52. If you want to make a payment to a supplier for a purchase entered using the Purchases command centre, use the Pay Bills window or select the Pay Bill transaction type in the Bank Register window. For more information, see ‘Paying bills’ on page 95. If you want to pay suppliers or employees electronically, you first need to set up your accounts and cards in a particular way. For more information, see ‘Set up electronic payments’ on page 36.

48

C H A P T E R 4

BANKING

The options for recording payments are summarised in the following diagram.

To record money you spend
1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Spend Money. The Spend Money window appears.

2

Select how the payment is to be made. If you are paying electronically—that is, if you will be generating an electronic payment file (ABA file) for this payment—click Group with Electronic Payments.

If you are paying by some other means—such as by cash, cheque, credit card or internet banking—enter the account you are paying from in the Pay from Account field.

3

If the payment amounts you are entering are tax inclusive, select the Tax Inclusive option.

SPENDING MONEY

4 9

Make your selection now Don’t select or deselect the Tax Inclusive option after you enter an amount in the Amount field.
NOTE :

4

Fill in the information in the cheque area of the window. Enter the payee card, cheque number (or other identification number), amount, memo, etc. If you are paying electronically, enter your own unique reference in the Statement Text field or accept the default. The text entered in this field will appear on the payee’s bank statement.
10

Recap transaction Before you record this transaction, you can use the Recap Transaction feature to view the journal entries that will be created when the transaction is recorded. This is useful for confirming that the journal entries are posted to the correct accounts. To recap, choose Recap Transaction from the Edit menu.
TIP :

Complete the payment If you are paying by cheque and have already written a cheque, select the Cheque Already Printed option. If you want to send remittance advice in a batch, select an option from the Remittance Advice Delivery Status list. After you have recorded a number of payments, say, the day’s payments, you can print or email remittance advices in a batch. For more information, see ‘Sending forms’ on page 196.
12

5

If you want to change the default payee address, enter the payee’s address in the Payee field. Allocate the payment to the appropriate account.
A B C D E

11

6

A B C D E

Enter the account you want to assign the payment to. Type the allocation amount. [Optional] Assign the payment to a job by entering the job code here. [Optional] Type a memo to describe the payment. The tax code that is linked to the allocation account appears here automatically. You change or delete it if necessary.
13

If you want to preview the remittance advice or cheque for this transaction, click Print and then choose Preview Cheque or Preview Remittance Advice. Note that the transaction is recorded before it is displayed. If you want to print a cheque or remittance advice now, click Print and select the form type you want to print. Note that the payment is recorded before it is printed.
Save the payment as a recurring transaction If you want to store the payment as a recurring transaction click Save as Recurring. In the Recurring Schedule Information window, enter the necessary information and click OK. For more information, see ‘Recurring transactions’ on page 179.
TIP :

7

If your payment covers more than one account, repeat step 6. You would do this, for example, when paying for a purchase with a number of different types of purchases on it: postage, magazines, stationery, etc. If you want to view or change the tax amounts assigned to the payment, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the Tax field. If you want to assign the payment to a particular category, select a category from the Category list. For more information about categories, see ‘Categories’ on page 226.

14

Click Record.

8

9

50

C H A P T E R 4

BANKING

Electronic payments
You can make electronic payments by preparing an electronic payment file (ABA file) for your bank to process. Electronic payment files contain the payment information for your bank to process, including your bank details, your payees’ bank details and the amounts you want to pay. Electronic payment files are prepared using the Australian Bankers’ Association (ABA) file format. When you have prepared an electronic payment file, you can send it to your bank for processing (for example, by using online banking software provided by your bank). Contact your bank for more information on how to send electronic payment files for processing. Setting up electronic payments Before you can prepare an electronic payment file, you need to complete the electronic payment setup tasks. For more information, see ‘Set up electronic payments’ on page 36. Paying suppliers electronically When you record a supplier payment in the Spend Money window, select the Group with Electronic Payments option to indicate that you want to pay the supplier electronically.
2

To prepare an electronic payment file
1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Prepare Electronic Payments. The Prepare Electronic Payments window appears.

In the Pay From Account field, select the bank account from which you are paying. The banking details of the account you select are included in the file that you send to the bank for processing. If you want to group the electronic payment by payment type—for example, to pay liabilities only—select a type in the Select Payment by field. In the Your Bank Statement Text field, type the text you want to appear on your bank statement. In the Bank Processing Date field, enter the date you want the payment to be processed. Click in the select column ( process. ) next to those payments you want to

3

4

Once you have recorded all the supplier payments you want to pay electronically, you can prepare an electronic payment file.

5

6

7

Click Bank File. A window appears, informing you that the payment will be recorded before the bank file is created. Click OK. The Save As window appears.

8

ELECTRONIC PAYMENTS

5 1

9

Select the destination folder and name for the electronic payment file (the file extension must be ABA) and click Save. The payment information is saved as an ABA file which you can send to your bank for processing.
10

NOTE : Multiple payment files If you are preparing multiple electronic payment files, make sure that you do not overwrite an unprocessed ABA file when saving.

If you want to prepare another electronic payment file, repeat from step 2 on page 51. Click Cancel to exit the Prepare Electronic Payments window.

11

Entering transactions in the Bank Register window
You can enter the following transactions in the Bank Register window: cheques, deposits, payments to suppliers, payments from customers, sales and purchases. The main advantages of using the Bank Register window to enter transactions instead of using transaction windows such as Spend Money, are speed and convenience. For example, you can record a customer payment and then write a cheque without having to open multiple windows and switch between them. As transactions can be recorded with minimum detail, you save time when entering a batch of transactions. Note that you cannot use the Bank Register window to record electronic payments. Importing your online bank and credit card statements You can also use the Bank Register window to import your bank and credit card statements. If a statement contains any transactions that you have not entered, you can add them quickly in the Bank Register window. For more information, see ‘Importing statements’ on page 58.
2

To enter a transaction in the Bank Register window
1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Bank Register. The Bank Register window appears.

In the Account field, select the bank or credit card account that will be used for this transaction. In the lower part of the window, select the transaction type from the Type list.

3

52

C H A P T E R 4

BANKING

4

Enter a transaction reference: If you select Pay Bill, Spend Money or Enter Purchase from the Type list, enter a cheque number (or other transaction reference) in the Cheque No. field. If you select Receive Payment, Receive Money or Enter Sale from the Type list, type a transaction reference in the adjacent ID No. field. In the Date field, enter the date of the transaction. In the Card field, enter the card for this transaction. In the Amount field, type the total amount of the transaction, including tax. If you want to allocate the amount to only one account, enter the account that will be used for this transaction in the Account field [not applicable for Pay Bill and Receive Payment]. If you want to allocate the amount to more than one allocation account, click Split. The corresponding transaction window will appear, and you can then allocate the amount to multiple accounts of your choice. Note that you can also click Split to: apply payments to a particular invoice or bill enter the payment method print the transaction.
NOTE : When the Split button is not available If the transaction type is Enter Sale or Enter Purchase, Split is not available. To open the transaction window, you will need to record the transaction, then click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the transaction in the Bank Register window.

10

Select the appropriate tax code in the Tax field (not applicable for Receive Payment and Pay Bill). [Optional] Assign the payment to a job by entering the job code in the Job field (not applicable for Receive Payment and Pay Bill). [Optional] If you want to record the purpose of the transaction, type a description in the Memo field. [Optional] If you use categories and want to assign the transaction to a category, select a category from the Category list. [Not applicable for Pay Bill and Receive Payment] For more information about categories, see ‘Categories’ on page 226.
TIP : Save the transaction as recurring If you want to store the transaction as a recurring transaction, click Save as Recurring. In the Recurring Schedule Information window, enter the necessary information and click OK. (Note that in the Bank Register this option is available only for Spend Money and Receive Money transaction types.) For more information, see ‘Recurring transactions’ on page 179.

11

12

5 6 7

13

8

9

14

Click Record.

ENTERING TRANSACTIONS IN THE BANK REGISTER WINDOW

5 3

Transferring money between accounts
You can transfer money between bank accounts, including bank and credit card accounts, using the Transfer Money window.
5 6

In the Amount field, type the amount to be transferred. If you want to record the purpose of the transaction, type a description in the Memo field. If you want to assign the transaction to a particular category, select the category from the Category list.
TIP : Saving as a recurring transaction If you want to store the transaction as a recurring transaction, click Save as Recurring. Enter details of the recurring transaction in the Recurring Schedule Information window and click OK. For more information about recurring transactions, see ‘Recurring transactions’ on page 179.

To transfer money between accounts
1

7

Go to the Accounts command centre and click Transfer Money. The Transfer Money window appears.

8

Click Record.

2 3

Enter or select a date for the transfer. In the Transfer Money From field, enter the account from which the funds will be paid. In the Transfer Money To field, enter the account to which the funds will be paid.

4

54

C H A P T E R 4

BANKING

Tracking petty cash expenses
Most businesses keep a small amount of cash handy at the office for miscellaneous expenses—postage, staff amenities, and so on. You can track this petty cash amount separately by using a petty cash account and allocating any miscellaneous expenses to that account. Check your accounts list for an account named ‘Petty Cash’. If it doesn’t exist, you need to create it as a bank account. For information on creating an account, see ‘Set up accounts’ on page 23.

To allocate expenses to the petty cash account
Let’s assume you spent $90 on stationery and $10 on postage from your petty cash float. You would record this transaction in the following way.
1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Spend Money. The Spend Money window appears. In the Pay from Account field, select the Petty Cash account. Enter a description of the transaction in the memo field. Enter or select the date and amount of the transaction. Enter the transactions as line items and allocate them to the relevant expense account (in this example, the Office Supplies account and the Postage account). Since you do not need to print a cheque for this transaction, select the Cheque Already Printed option.

2

To transfer money to your petty cash account
1

3 4 5

Go to the Accounts command centre and click Transfer Money. The Transfer Money window appears. In the Transfer Money From field, enter the account from which the funds will be paid. In the Transfer Money To field, enter the petty cash account.

2

3

6

4

Enter the amount you are transferring in the Amount field and click Record.
7

Click Record.

TRACKING PETTY CASH EXPENSES

5 5

Reconciling your bank accounts
To ensure the accuracy of your business records, you should make sure the bank account balances in your company file match your bank’s records. If you are reconciling your bank account for the first time since you started using AccountRight, see ‘Do an initial bank reconciliation’ on page 39.
4

In the Bank Statement Date field, enter the closing date that appears on your bank statement and then press TAB. Only unreconciled transactions dated on or before that date will appear.

To reconcile your bank accounts
NOTE : Reconciling banking accounts using the Company Data Auditor If you are using the Company Data Auditor to reconcile banking accounts, select the account you want to reconcile in the Account Reconciliation Review window and continue this procedure from step 3 below.

1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Reconcile Accounts. The Reconcile Accounts window appears. In the Account field, enter the account you want to reconcile. In the Closing Statement Balance field, type the closing balance that appears on the statement your bank sent you.

5

2 3

If you want to import bank statement data electronically, click Get Statement. For more information, see ‘Importing statements’ on page 58. For each entry on your bank statement, select the corresponding transaction by clicking in the select column ( ). The selected line is highlighted and the amounts in the Calculated Statement Balance and Out of Balance fields are updated. If there are entries on the statement relating to bank charges or bank interest that do not appear among the transactions on the Reconcile Accounts window, you need to manually enter these transactions. a Click Bank Entry. The Bank and Deposit Adjustments window appears. b Fill in the appropriate transaction details and click Record. The Reconcile Accounts window reappears.

6

7

56

C H A P T E R 4

BANKING

8

Click Reconcile. A window appears indicating whether your account is reconciled or out of balance. If your account is reconciled, you have the option of printing the Reconciliation report by clicking Print Report (recommended). Once the report is printed, the Reconcile Accounts window reappears. Click Reconcile again to complete the reconciliation process. If you don’t want to print the report, click Reconcile. The transactions you selected are considered cleared and won’t appear in the Reconcile Accounts window the next time you display it. If your account is out of balance, the window will indicate the amount by which your account is out of balance. To correct the unreconciled amount, complete the procedure ‘To correct an unreconciled amount’ below.

3

If your account is still out of balance, then you may have deleted a transaction that has been reconciled previously. If you have deleted a reconciled transaction, re‐enter it and then select it in the Reconcile Accounts window when performing the reconciliation.

Undoing an account reconciliation
If you have reconciled a transaction in error or deleted a previously reconciled transaction, you can undo the previous account reconciliation. When you undo a reconciliation, all transactions for that period return to an unreconciled status. If the error was made in a reconciliation earlier than your last reconciliation, you can undo several reconciliation periods in succession in your current financial year. Note, when you undo an account reconciliation, you will need to reconcile each transaction again and reprint your reconciliation reports.

To correct an unreconciled amount
1

Check the following: did you type the correct figure in the Closing Statement Balance field? You need to type the closing balance from your bank statement, not the opening balance. did you enter the correct date (that of the closing balance from your bank statement) in the Bank Statement Date field? An incorrect date may prevent some transactions from appearing in the list. did you select all the transactions that appear on the bank statement? If not, some transactions might not have been accounted for in the reconciled balance. did you select, by mistake, a transaction that didn’t appear on your bank statement? If yes, you need to deselect this transaction. did you record all bank charges and bank interest entries that appear on the bank statement? If not, you need to record them and select them for reconciliation. See step 7 in ‘To reconcile your bank accounts’, on page 56. Repeat the reconciliation procedure.

To undo an account reconciliation
NOTE : Back up before undoing reconciliation We recommend that you back up your company file before you undo a reconciliation. Then, if you want to reverse the undo reconciliation, you can restore the backup file.

1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Reconcile Accounts. The Reconcile Accounts window appears. In the Account field, enter the account for which you want to undo the reconciliation.

2

2

RECONCILING YOUR BANK ACCOUNTS

5 7

3

Click Undo Reconciliation. The Undo Last Reconciliation window appears, confirming the account and date of the reconciliation you are undoing.

4 5

Click Undo Reconciliation. A confirmation window appears. Click OK. The Reconcile Accounts window reappears.

Importing statements
If you have an online banking facility, you can use the Get Statement feature to import bank statement or credit card statement files. This feature enables you to import transactions that you haven’t recorded in your company file (e.g. bank fees). It also enables you to use the imported transactions as part of your reconciliation process. Your AccountRight software can automatically match transactions on your statement with the transactions in your company file. Matched transactions will be marked as cleared for reconciliation, making it easy for you to reconcile your account at month‐end. If some transactions cannot be matched, you have the option of matching them manually with uncleared transactions, adding them or skipping them altogether. Unmatched transactions are usually bank interest, account fees and penalty charges applied by the bank.

To import your statement
NOTE : Download your statement Before you can import your bank or credit card statement, you need to download the statement file from your bank. Your bank’s website should provide instructions on how to download this file. The following file formats are supported: OFX, QFX, QIF and OFC.

1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Bank Register. The Bank Register window appears. In the Account field, enter the account that corresponds to the bank or credit card statement. Click Get Statement. The Select a Bank Statement file window appears. Locate and select the downloaded statement file. Click Open. The Get Statement window appears.

2

3

4 5

58

C H A P T E R 4

BANKING

6

Click OK. The statement transactions are automatically matched with the transactions in your company file using the cheque number, date and amount as the criteria for matching withdrawals and deposits. If: there are unmatched transactions, the Unmatched Statement Transactions window appears. Go to step 7 below. all your transactions match, that’s it. These transactions will be marked as cleared in the Reconcile Accounts window. You can ignore the rest of this procedure. Choose what you want to do with the unmatched transactions. If you want to match a transaction, select the transaction and click Match Transaction. The Match Transaction window appears, listing the uncleared transactions in your company file for the specified account. Select the transaction that you want to match with the statement transaction and click Match. The transaction will be marked as cleared.

If you want to add a transaction to your company file, select the transaction and click Add Transaction. The Spend Money window or the Receive Money window (depending on the type of transaction you are adding) appears. Enter the details of the transaction and record it. The transaction is shown as cleared.
8

Repeat step 7 above for each uncleared transaction you want to add or match.
Match or add all transactions We recommend you finish adding or matching every transaction in the unmatched transaction list before you click Done. If you re‐open the statement file, the original list of unmatched transactions reappears in the Unmatched Statement Transactions window.
CAUTION :

7

9

When you have finished matching and adding transactions, click Done.

Recording miscellaneous transactions
To void a cheque
If you find that one of your cheque forms is damaged and not usable for printing or that you have made a mistake when writing the cheque manually, you may want to void a cheque. Follow the steps below to void a cheque that you have not recorded in your AccountRight software. If you want to make changes to a cheque you have already recorded, see ‘Changing a transaction’ on page 177.
1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Spend Money. The Spend Money window appears. Choose the cheque account from which you want to void the cheque. In the Cheque No. field, type the number of the cheque you want to void. Leave the Amount field and the account allocation fields blank. Click Record, then click OK to confirm that you want to void the cheque.

2

3

4 5

RECORDING MISCELLANEOUS TRANSACTIONS

5 9

To record ATM withdrawals
1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Spend Money. The Spend Money window appears. Select the account from which you withdrew money. In the Cheque No. field, enter a non‐numeric word or phrase to describe the withdrawal. That way you will know the transaction
4 5

isn’t an actual cheque when you view it in a list or in a report. This will also allow you to skip the transaction when you print a range of numbered cheques. Complete the other fields in the window. Click Record.

2 3

Credit card transactions
Before you record credit card transactions, you need to create an account (a liability account) for each credit card you will use. Name the accounts after your credit cards, for example, VISA, American Express, etc. These accounts will keep track of the amount owed to the credit card provider. For information on creating an account, see ‘Set up accounts’ on page 23. When you record the purchase, the payment amount is assigned to your credit card liability account.

For more information, see: ‘Spending money’ on page 48 ‘Entering transactions in the Bank Register window’ on page 52 ‘Paying bills’ on page 95.

Recording credit card purchases
You record a a credit card purchase by specifying the credit card account in the Pay Bills, Spend Money or Bank Register window. The window you use depends on whether you have entered a bill using the Purchases window: If you have recorded a bill, then record the payment in the Pay Bills window. If you do not need to enter a bill, record the credit card purchase in the Spend Money or Bank Register window.

Recording payments to credit card providers
You can record payments to credit card providers using the Transfer Money window. For information about transferring money between accounts, see ‘Transferring money between accounts’ on page 54.

60

C H A P T E R 4

BANKING

5 Sales
This chapter explains how to enter information about sales to your customers. You record a sale by specifying the customer’s details, the invoice layout (item, service, professional, time billing or miscellaneous), the type of the sale (quote, order or invoice) and the details of the items or services sold. The chapter also explains the various ways of sending an invoice, how to record customer payments, how to issue a customer credit, and how to analyse sales activities with a variety of reports and other analytical tools.

Creating a customer card
Before you can record a sale, you need to create a card for your customer.

To create a customer card
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click New. The Card Information window appears.

2

3 4 5

Select Customer from the Card Type list. Select the designation of the card: company or individual. Type the customer name.

61

6

If you use codes to identify customers, type the code for the customer in the Card ID field. For more information, see ‘Card identification codes’ on page 223. Enter contact details for the customer. If you want to enter more contact information, select Address 2 from the Locations list and enter the additional details. You can enter contact details for five locations.

B Tax information

7

The customer’s tax information is entered here. If the customer’s tax status takes precedence over that of the item or service being sold, select the Use Customer’s Tax Code option. See ‘To assign tax codes to cards’ on page 166. The credit terms entered here are used as the default terms for all sales to the customer, but can be changed at any time.

C Credit terms

8

Click the Card Details tab. You can enter notes about the customer, insert a picture and assign attributes.
If you want to... insert a picture assign identifiers to the card assign an attribute from a custom list enter additional information in a custom field

10

See page 223 page 214 page 215 page 222
13 12 11

Click the Payment Details tab and select the method of payment your customer will use to pay you. [Optional] Click the Jobs tab and enter the details of each job you have started or are about to start for the customer. For more information about jobs, see ‘Jobs’ on page 227. [Optional] Click the History tab and type the dollar value of the sales made prior to your conversion month. You can also enter the date that the contact became a customer. Click OK to save the card.

9

Click the Selling Details tab and enter your selling details.

A Selling information

The selections you make here will be used, by default, on quotes, orders and invoices that you create for this customer. You can override these selections when recording a sale.

62

C H A P T E R 5

SALES

Entering sales
You enter a sale as a quote, order or invoice. A quote records an estimated price you have quoted to a customer. A quote has no impact on your inventory levels and can be changed to an order or an invoice when your customer is ready to buy. An order is a sale where no services or goods have been delivered. Orders don’t create transactions unless the customer has paid you a deposit. An order can be changed to an invoice. An invoice is usually created when you deliver the items or services the customer ordered. Invoices can be open (unpaid), closed (paid) or credit (negative sale). An invoice can’t be changed to a quote or an order. You can enter a sale in: the Sales window the Bank Register window. The procedure described in this chapter is for entering sales in the Sales window, which allows you to record full details about a transaction. Bank Register window Entering a sale in the Bank Register window is a fast way to enter a sales transaction. However, you can enter less detail about the sale than if you entered it in the Sales window. For more information, see ‘Entering transactions in the Bank Register window’ on page 52.

Entering a sales transaction
Complete the following steps to enter a sales transaction:
Task
1 2 3 4 5 Enter information about the customer Choose the type of sale Enter the items or services you are selling Enter additional information about the sale Complete the sale

See below page 64 page 64 page 65 page 66

Task 1: Enter information about the customer
1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Enter Sales. The Sales window appears. In the Customer field, enter the customer’s name and press TAB. The terms and ship‐to address shown in the Sales window are the details recorded in the customer’s card.
NOTE : Customer credit limits and accounts on hold You may not be able to record sales for customers who have exceeded their credit limit or whose account has been placed on hold. For more information, see ‘Credit control’ on page 75.

2

ENTERING SALES

6 3

3

Complete the fields as described in the following table.
A B C

2

Select the type from the Sales Type list in the top‐left corner: Quote, Order or Invoice.

Task 3: Enter the items or services you are selling
D A Click the zoom arrow ( ) to alter the credit terms for this sale only. Note that if you want to change the credit terms for all future sales to this customer, you must make that change on the Selling Details tab of the customer’s card. Type the invoice number here or accept the default number. If you are entering prices that include tax, select the Tax Inclusive option. Do not change this setting after you enter an amount in the Amount column. If the customer gave you a purchase order for this transaction, enter that purchase order number here.

The scrolling list in the middle of the Sales window is where you enter details of what you are selling. In this area you will enter item numbers, activity ID numbers (not available in AccountRight Standard), descriptions, account numbers (or account names) and other information to describe your transaction. One row in the scrolling list is one line item of the transaction. You can enter as many line items for a sale as you want. The fields that appear in the scrolling list will depend on the sales layout you chose. The following illustration shows the fields for a sale with an Item layout and an Invoice type.

B C

D

Task 2: Choose the type of sale
Choose the type and layout for the sale. The default layout displayed in the Sales window is determined by the selection you made when setting up sales details (using the Sales Easy Setup Assistant) or when creating the customer’s card.
1

Item sale A A B Ship Backorder B C D E F G H I

The quantity to be delivered. The quantity of the item to be placed on backorder. An order for this amount will be created automatically when you click Record. Enter an item from your item list. A description of the item appears automatically. You can change this if you want. If you want to check spelling in this field, click Spell. For more information, see ‘Spell‐check’ on page 14. The price of the item appears automatically. You can change this if you want. [Optional] Type a volume discount as a percentage.

If you want to, change the layout. There are five layouts for AccountRight Plus and four layouts for AccountRight Standard: Service, Item, Professional, Time Billing (not available in AccountRight Standard) and Miscellaneous. The layout determines what fields appear on the Sales window. a Click Layout. The Select Layout window appears. b Select the appropriate layout and click OK.
Miscellaneous layout The Miscellaneous layout is used only for sales where a form does not need to be printed or emailed.
NOTE :

C D

Item Number Description

E F

Price Disc%

64

C H A P T E R 5

SALES

G H I

Total Job Tax

The total price of the items is calculated automatically. [Optional] Select a job number here to assign a line item to a specific job. The default tax for an item appears here. If you want to change the tax code, enter the required tax code.

Task 4: Enter additional information about the sale
The fields that appear at the bottom of the Sales window depend on the type of sale you are creating.
A D E H

The following illustration shows the fields for a sale with a Service layout and an Invoice type. These fields also apply to the Professional and Miscellaneous layouts.
Service sale
A B C D E

B

C

F

G

A

Description

A description of the goods or services being sold. If you want to check spelling in this field, click Spell. For more information, see ‘Spell‐check’ on page 14. Enter the account to which to allocate the sale. This is usually an income account. You should not select your trade debtors account for ordinary sales. The amount of the sale. [Optional] Select a job number here to assign a line item to a specific job. Select a tax code for the sale.

A

Optional fields

Enter optional information, such as the name of the salesperson, a comment, shipping method and the promised date of goods or services. If you want to print or email the invoice in a batch, select the required delivery method from the list. For more information, see ‘Sending forms’ on page 196. The journal memo is generated automatically. You can change it if you want. Enter any charges for freight. Enter the tax code for the freight charges. Click the zoom arrow ( ) if you want to view or change the tax amounts assigned to the sale. Enter an amount here to record the amount the customer paid you at the time of the sale or, if you are creating an order, the amount the customer gave you as a deposit. Enter the payment method. Click Details if you want to enter details about the payment. For example, if you are being paid by credit card, you can record the last four digits of the credit card number.

B

Acct No. or Account Name Amount Job Tax

B

Invoice Delivery Status Journal Memo Freight Freight tax Tax Paid Today

C D E

C D E F

NOTE : Add lines, subtotals and headers to sales transactions You can add lines, headers and subtotals to invoices to make it easy to separate and subtotal different groups of line items on one invoice. For more information, see ‘Adding and deleting lines, headers and subtotals’ on page 66.

G

H

Payment Method

ENTERING SALES

6 5

Task 5: Complete the sale
There are several ways to complete the transaction.
Save the sale as a recurring sale. You can save the sale as a recurring transaction so you can use it again. Click Save as Recurring. In the Recurring Schedule Information window, enter the necessary information and click OK. For more information, see ‘Recurring transactions’ on page 179.
TIP :

Adding and deleting lines, headers and subtotals
You can add blank lines, transaction lines, headers and subtotals to sales transactions.

To insert a blank line
1

If you want to record the sale without printing or sending it, click Record (for a sales quote, click Save Quote). If you want to record the sale and create a purchase order, click Create PO. The quote or order is recorded and the Purchases window appears. For more information, see ‘Creating a purchase order from a sale’ on page 91. If you want to record the sale and print, send or save it as a PDF, complete the relevant procedure below.
To…
Print

In the Sales window, click in the line below where the line is to appear. Go to the Edit menu and choose Insert Blank Line.

2

To insert a transaction line
1

In the Sales window, click in the line below where the transaction line is to appear. Go to the Edit menu and choose Insert Transaction Line.

2

To insert a header
Do this...
Click Print and choose: • a form from the list. For example, if a specific sales form is selected as a default form in the customer card, this form will be listed. Select Another Form to choose a different sales form. Click Print and choose Preview to preview the sales form for this transaction. Note that the transaction will be recorded before the form is displayed. Click Send To and choose Email. Review and make entries in the Email window and click Send. The email, which will include a PDF (Portable Document Format) attachment, will be sent to the outbox of your default email software. Send the email from your email software. Click Send To and choose Disk. In the window that appears, enter a name and location for the PDF file and click Save.

You can group several line items by inserting a header.
1

In the Sales window, click in the line below where the header is to appear. Go to the Edit menu and choose Insert Header. A blank line will appear in the scrolling list. Type the text for the header in the Description column. Press TAB to complete the header entry. The text appears in grey.

2

Print preview

3 4

Email

Save as PDF

66

C H A P T E R 5

SALES

To insert a subtotal
1

In the Sales window, click in the first line below the items to be subtotalled. Go to the Edit menu and choose Insert Subtotal. A line appears displaying the subtotal of the amounts that appear above the subtotal line and below the last subtotal, if there is one.

To delete a blank line, transaction line, header or subtotal
1

2

In the Sales window, click anywhere in the blank line, transaction line, header or subtotal you want to delete. Go to the Edit menu and choose Delete Line.

2

Recording sales with insufficient on-hand item quantities
If you track item quantities and values, and you want to record a sales invoice for an item with insufficient on‐hand quantities, you can build, buy or backorder the item. Before you can build an item Before you can auto‐build an item, you need to set up your item details. For more information, see ‘Auto‐building items’ on page 154. Before you can order an item Before you can record a purchase order, you need to enter a primary supplier for reorders in the Buying Details tab of the item record. For more information, see ‘Creating items’ on page 149.

Build, buy or backorder items
When you attempt to record a sales invoice for an item you don’t have enough of, the Backorder List window appears. In this window, you can build and order the required quantity, or just choose to place the unavailable quantity on backorder.

RECORDING SALES WITH INSUFFICIENT ON‐HAND ITEM QUANTITIES

6 7

To build, buy or backorder items in the Backorder List window
This window lists items that are either out of stock or would be as a result of recording the sale.

To...
Record a purchase order and a sales order

Do this...
1

Click in the Buy column next to the item you want to order and then click Buy. The Purchases window appears. Complete and record the purchase order. For information, see ‘Entering purchases’ on page 85. Click in the Backorder column next to the item you want to place on backorder. Click Backorder. The Sales window reappears with the Ship and Backorder columns adjusted. Record the sale. A sales order is automatically recorded for the backordered items.

2

Record a sales order

1 2 3

NOTE : Multiple items with insufficient quantities You can use the Backorder List window to backorder multiple items with insufficient quantities. However, you can perform the backordering task only after the other two tasks (build and buy) are completed. For example, if you want to backorder some items and buy others, you need to buy the required items first and then return to this window (by clicking Record in the Sales window again) to complete the backorder.

Decide what you want to do:
To...
Auto‐build items

Do this...
1

Click in the Build column next to the item you want to auto‐build and then click Build. The Auto‐Build Items window appears. Click Build Items. The Build Items window appears. Change the quantity to build if you want to. Click Record to build the finished item. Record the sale.

2 3 4 5

68

C H A P T E R 5

SALES

Changing a sale’s type
The following sale types can be changed:
Sale type
Quote Order Invoice

To change an order to an invoice
See
below below
1

Can change to… order invoice invoice An invoice cannot be changed.

Go to the Sales command centre and click Sales Register. The Sales Register window appears. Click the Orders tab. Select the required order. Click Change to Invoice to change the order to an invoice. Review and update the information in the Sales window as necessary. For example, you might want to change the transaction date to today’s date. Click Record. The new invoice is created and the original order is removed.

2 3 4 5

If you want to change several orders simultaneously, see ‘To change several orders to invoices’ below. You can change a sale’s type from the Sales window or from the Sales Register window.
6

To change a quote to an order or invoice
1

To change several orders to invoices
1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Sales Register. The Sales Register window appears. Click the Quotes tab and select the required quote. If you want to change the quote to: an order, click Change to Order an invoice, click Change to Invoice. The Sales window appears. Make any necessary changes to these and other fields. For example, change the transaction date to today’s date. Click Record. The new order or invoice is created. The original quote will remain in the Sales Register window unless you indicated in the Sales view of the Preferences window that you want quotes to be deleted when they are changed to orders or invoices.

Click To Do List from any command centre. The To Do List window appears. Click the Sales Orders tab to display a list of all your orders. If you want to view the details of a specific order, click the zoom arrow ( ) to the left of the customer’s name. Select the orders you want to change to invoices by clicking in the select column ( ) next to each order. Click Record as Actual. A window appears, requiring you to enter a date for the selected transactions. This is the date that the transactions will be recorded in your company file. Enter a transaction date and click OK.

2 3

2

3

4

4

5

5

CHANGING A SALE’S TYPE

6 9

Reviewing your sales information
There are several tools that you can use to review your sales information.
Tool
Business Insights To Do List Use Business Insights to analyse sales and customer information. The To Do List displays all open sales, recurring sales and orders sorted by overdue dates. Sales reports help you keep track of your sales activities. History lets you view seven years of sales history for an item, a customer or an employee. The Sales Register window gives you a complete picture of your sales activity—open and closed invoices, orders, quotes, returns, credits etc. Find Transactions helps you find individual sales transactions. The Transaction Journal lists journal entries of your sales and other transactions.

To analyse sales and customer information using Business Insights
Business Insights presents a summary of your sales and customer information, including which customers owe you money and how much money is overdue. You can also see how much your customers owe you for each ageing period, as well as the sales history of your customers. To find information specific to your needs, sort the table columns by clicking a column heading. For example, you can sort the list of outstanding invoices to find the most overdue invoice or the largest overdue amount.

See below page 71

Sales reports Sales history

page 71 page 71

To analyse customers page 174
1

Sales Register

Click Business Insights in any command centre. The Business Insights window appears. Click the Customer Analysis tab. This tab shows you: the total you are owed and details of each overdue customer payment (based on their invoiced credit terms), including the number of days overdue your top ten customers by year‐to‐date sales value the amounts owing for each ageing period a summary of your customer sales and payment history. You can use this information to: Contact customers for overdue payments Identify which customer payments are the most overdue or which customers owe you the most money. Renegotiate a customer’s credit terms View the customer’s outstanding balances and payment history, such as the average number of days it takes for them to pay you.

2

Find Transactions Transaction Journal

page 174 page 175

70

C H A P T E R 5

SALES

3

If you want to use one of the graphs or tables in another document, right‐click it and choose: Copy to Clipboard. This copies the graph or table to the clipboard, ready to paste into a document. [Graphs only] Save As. Choose where you want to save the image and click Save. This saves the graph as an image file, so you can use it later. If you want to customise the look of Business Insights, click Customise. The Customise window appears, enabling you to show or hide information in Business Insights.

To view sales reports
There are several sales reports that can help you track your sales activities. For example, you can run an Aged Receivables Summary report to view your customers’ current balances sorted by ageing periods. The Sales Item Summary report shows you which inventory items are selling best. The Referral Source report is useful for finding out which referral source is bringing your business the most money.
1

4

Go to the Reports menu and choose Index to Reports. The Index to Reports window appears. Click the Sales tab. A list of available sales report groups appears. Click a group category to view the available reports.

2

To view a list of all unpaid sales sorted by days overdue
1

3

Click To Do List in any command centre. The To Do List window appears. Click the Accounts Receivable tab. A list of all unpaid sales appears. The Overdue column shows the number of days an invoice is overdue. (A negative number in the Overdue column indicates that the payment is not yet due.) The number of days an invoice is overdue is calculated by checking the original date of the invoice, comparing it to today’s date and looking at the customer’s credit terms.

For information on displaying, customising and printing your reports, see ‘Reports’ on page 185.

2

To view sales history
You can view sales history for an item, customer or employee.
1

Display the Item Information window for an item or the Card Information window for a customer or an employee. Click the History tab. The History tab displays seven years of sales history for the item or card: the five years preceding the current financial year (as displayed in the Company Information window), the current financial year and the next year.
NOTE : Employee sales history To record employee sales history, you need to select the employee as the salesperson when you record a sale in the Sales window.

2

3

If you want to send a collection letter to customers with overdue payments: a Select those customers by clicking in the select column ( ). b Click Mail Merge to create the letter directly in Microsoft Word. Otherwise, click Disk to save a mail merge file that you can use in another word processor.

REVIEWING YOUR SALES INFORMATION

7 1

Receiving payments
When customers make payments against invoices, record them in the Receive Payments window. You can record the payments against one or more of the customer’s outstanding invoices. You can also record payments in the Bank Register window. Recording customer payments through the Bank Register window can save you time if there are several invoices that have been paid and you do not need to record detailed information (such as discounts and finance charges) for each payment. When you use the Bank Register window to record a customer payment, the entire payment is automatically allocated to the customer’s oldest invoices first. For more information, see ‘Entering transactions in the Bank Register window’ on page 52. If a payment you receive is not in response to an invoice you have issued, use the Receive Money window. See ‘Receiving money’ on page 45.
NOTE : Customer payments at point of sale If customers make payments when purchasing merchandise or services and you are issuing them an invoice, you can type the payment amount in the Paid Today field of the invoice. See ‘Enter additional information about the sale’ on page 65.

The options for recording receipts and invoice payments are summarised in the following diagram.

72

C H A P T E R 5

SALES

To record payments against invoices
1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Receive Payments. The Receive Payments window appears. Choose the account that will be used to record the customer payment. Deposit to Account. Select this option if the customer has made a direct payment to your bank account. Group with Undeposited Funds. Select this option if the payment will be deposited at a later time. For information about undeposited funds and preparing bank deposits, see ‘Preparing a bank deposit’ on page 47. In the Customer field, enter the customer’s name. Type the amount received. If you want to record the payment method, select the method in the Payment Method field. Click Details if you want to enter further details about the payment. For example, if you are being paid by credit card, you can record the last four digits of the credit card number. If you want, adjust the memo and payment date. You can change the ID number that is automatically generated. However, we recommend that you use the default number to make sure you don’t use duplicate IDs.
A Discount

A B

2

C

3 4 5

D

If you intend to offer an early‐payment discount for a sale, assign the discount to the appropriate invoice in this column. Note that you won’t be able to assign a discount to an invoice that is not being settled in full. If this is the case, you can give them a customer credit note. See ‘Customer credits’ on page 78. Enter how much of the payment you want to apply to each sale in this column. If part of the payment is to pay finance charges, type the finance charge amount here. For more information, see ‘Finance charges paid by customers’ on page 77. The amount you apply in the Amount Applied column accumulates in the Total Applied field. The Total Received amount (which includes any finance charges) must equal the amount that appears in the Amount Received field in the top half of the window before you can record the transaction. The Out of Balance amount must be zero before you can record the transaction.

B C

6

Amount Applied Finance Charge Out of Balance

D

7

In the scrolling list in the bottom half of the window, indicate which sales are covered by the payment by entering amounts in the Amount Applied column. If the customer is paying a deposit for an order, look for Order in the Status column.

If a customer overpays, you should still enter the amount received. The full payment should be entered in the Amount Received field and in the Amount Applied column in the scrolling list. When you record the payment, a credit invoice for the overpaid amount is created automatically. This can either be refunded to the customer or applied to a future invoice, see ‘Settling credits’ on page 79.
8

Click Record.

RECEIVING PAYMENTS

7 3

Printing payment receipts
For each receipt transaction you record, a corresponding receipt can be printed. Receipt transactions can be recorded using the following windows: Bank Register Receive Money Receive Payments Sales (New Invoice and New Order using Paid Today) Settle Returns & Debits (Receive Refund view). Receipt transactions for which receipts cannot be printed are reversed receipt transactions and voided receipts. Payment receipts correspond directly to receipt transactions. That is, when you record a receipt transaction, the information you entered on the transaction can be printed on a payment receipt. Because of this relationship, if you change, reverse or remove a receipt transaction, the payment receipts that have been printed may no longer be valid.
3

To print payment receipts
1

Go to either the Sales or Banking command centre and click Print Receipts. The Review Receipts Before Printing window appears. If you print receipts on pre‐printed stationery, type the number of the first receipt in the Number of First Receipt in Printer field. The IDs of the recorded receipts will be renumbered to match the printed receipts. Type the number of copies you want to print of each receipt in the Print field. If you want to filter the list of receipts, click Advanced Filters. For more information, see ‘Customising how you send form batches’ on page 198. Click in the select column ( print. Click Print. ) next to each receipt you want to

2

4

5

6

For information about customising your forms, see ‘Forms’ on page 195.

74

C H A P T E R 5

SALES

Credit control
You can control credit by: setting and enforcing customer credit limits, see ‘Credit limits’ below placing customer accounts on hold, see ‘Credit holds’ on page 76 adding finance charges to customer statements, see ‘Finance charges paid by customers’ on page 77.
3

Click Credit Limit & Hold. The Credit Limit & Hold window appears.

Credit limits
A credit limit is the maximum amount of credit you allow a customer to charge to their account. You can set a default credit limit for all new customers (see ‘Set up sales’ on page 33) or set a specific credit limit for a single customer. If you want to enforce credit limits, you can choose to: be informed before recording a sale that will exceed a customer’s credit limit prevent certain users from recording a sale that will exceed a customer’s credit limit. You need to set an override password to allow approved users to record the sale.
4 5 6

Type the customer’s credit limit in the Credit Limit field. Click OK. The Card Information window appears. Click OK to return to the Cards List window.

To receive a warning when a credit limit is exceeded
1

To set or change the credit limit for a single customer
1 2

Open the customer card you are setting a credit limit for. Click the Selling Details tab.

Go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. The Preferences window appears. Click the Sales tab. Select the If Credit Limit is Exceeded on Sale preference and choose Warn and Continue from the list.

2 3

4

Click OK.

CREDIT CONTROL

7 5

To prevent the recording of a sale when a customer exceeds the credit limit
1 2

Credit holds
You can place a credit hold on a customer’s account to prevent further sales being made to the customer. For example, you may want to place a customer on credit hold when the customer’s account is overdue.

Log in to your company file as the Administrator. Go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. The Preferences window appears. Click the Sales tab. Select the If Credit Limit is Exceeded on Sale preference and select Prevent Unless Overridden from the list. The Credit Limit Override Password window appears.

3 4

To place a customer on credit hold
1 2 3 4

Open the customer card you are placing on credit hold. Click the Selling Details tab. Click Credit Limit & Hold. The Credit Limit & Hold window appears. Select the Place this customer on Credit Hold option.

5 6

Type the override password and password confirmation. Click OK. The Preferences window reappears.
NOTE : Changing the credit limit override password You can change the credit limit override password in the Credit Limit Override Password window (choose Preferences from the Setup menu, click the Sales tab and then click Set Override).

5 6

Click OK. The Card Information window appears. Click OK to return to the Cards List window.

7

Click OK to close the Preferences window.

NOTE : Recording sales to customers on credit hold To record a sale to a customer on credit hold, you need to remove the credit hold. To do this, deselect the Place this customer on Credit Hold option in the Credit Limit & Hold window on the customer’s card.

76

C H A P T E R 5

SALES

Finance charges paid by customers
Finance charges are amounts added to an outstanding balance as a penalty for late payment. They are usually added to a customer’s statement. When the charge is paid by the customer, the payment is recorded in the Receive Payments window. How finance charges are calculated Each open invoice’s due date is calculated using the terms specified on the Selling Details tab of the Card Information window. The overdue balance is then increased by 1/30th of the monthly charge for late payment for every day it is overdue, where the monthly charge is calculated by multiplying the amount overdue by the % Monthly Charge for Late Payment value you specified on the customer’s card. If the customer makes a partial payment during the overdue period, the finance charge is adjusted accordingly. Setting up finance charges Before you can apply finance charges, you need to select an account for tracking late‐payment charges. Go to the Setup menu, choose Linked Accounts and then Sales Accounts. Select the I assess charges for late payment option and select an income account to record the late payment charges. Set the percentage you will be charging for late payments in the % Monthly Charge for Late Payment field of the Selling Details tab of each customer card.

The finance charges payable by your customers only appear on their statements, so you may want to keep copies of the statements sent to customers.

Recording finance charges
When your customer pays the late‐payment charge, enter the amount in the Finance Charge field of the Receive Payments window. For more information, see ‘Receiving payments’ on page 72. Although the history of finance charges is not tracked, you can perform an account enquiry (using Find Transactions) on the income account you have set up to record late charges.

Deleting finance charges
When you enter a finance charge in the Receive Payments window, two transactions are recorded for the finance charge—an invoice in the sales journal and a payment in the receipts journal. To delete a finance charge, you must first delete the finance charge payment and then delete the finance charge invoice.

Adding finance charges to customer statements
To show the finance charge owed by customers on their statements, you need to select an option when printing or emailing the statements.
1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Print/Email Statements. The Review Statements Before Delivery window appears. Click Advanced Filters and select the Add Finance Charges to Amount Due option. Click OK.

2

3

For more information about customer statements, see ‘Send customer statements’ on page 245.

CREDIT CONTROL

7 7

Customer credits
A customer credit is money that you owe to a customer. To process a customer credit, you first need to record a credit transaction and then record the settlement of the credit (for example, by printing a refund cheque for your customer).

To manually create a credit for a non-item sale
Use this method to credit the customer for part of a non‐item sale.
TIP : Create an account for tracking sales returns Before you manually create a credit of this type for the first time, you may want to create an account for tracking sales returns and allowances. Make sure this account is an income account.

Recording credits
You can create a customer credit note in the following ways: Reverse an existing sale. Use this method if the customer has paid for the entire sale. Manually create a credit. Use this method if you are crediting the customer for part of a sale.

1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Enter Sales. The Sales window appears. Enter the customer details. Select Invoice from the list in the top left corner of the window. Click Layout, choose Service and click OK. In the Description column, enter a description of the credit for your records. In the Account column, select the account to be credited. This is the income account you use to track sales returns and allowances.

2 3 4

To reverse a sale
Before you can reverse an invoice, the transaction must be unchangeable, that is, the Transactions CAN’T be Changed; They Must Be Reversed option must be selected in the Security tab of the Preferences window.
1 2

5

6

Find and open the invoice. See ‘Finding a transaction’ on page 173. Go to the Edit menu and choose Reverse Sale. A credit note transaction is created in the Sales window. Note that the invoice amount is a negative amount. If you want, you can make some changes to the credit note (such as changing the date and memo), but you can’t change the accounts, amounts and quantities that are associated with the credit.

3

Click Record Reversal. A customer credit appears in the Sales Register window.

78

C H A P T E R 5

SALES

7

In the Amount field, type the amount of the credit as a negative amount.

6

In the Item Number field, enter the item number. The costs of the items appear as negative amounts.

8

Click Record. A credit appears in the Sales Register window.

7

Click Record. A customer credit appears in the Sales Register window.

To manually create a credit for an item sale
Use this method to credit the customer for part of an item sale.
1

Settling credits
You can choose to settle a customer credit in the following ways: Apply the credit to an open invoice. Applying the credit to one or more of the customer’s open invoices reduces the amount the customer owes you. Record a refund. If the customer does not have any open invoices, you can record a refund payment for the amount of the customer credit.

Go to the Sales command centre and click Enter Sales. The Sales window appears. Enter the customer details. Select Invoice from the list in the top left corner of the window. Click Layout and choose Item, then click OK. In the Ship column, type the number of items being returned as a negative number.

2 3 4 5

To apply a customer credit to an open invoice
1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Sales Register. The Sales Register window appears. Click the Returns & Credits tab. A list of customer credits appears.

2

CUSTOMER CREDITS

7 9

3

Locate and select the credit you want to apply and click Apply to Sale. The Settle Returns & Credits window appears, listing all open invoices assigned to the customer. Enter the amounts you want to apply to one or more open invoices in the Amount Applied column.

To pay a refund cheque
1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Sales Register. The Sales Register window appears. Click the Returns & Credits tab. A list of customer credits appears. Locate and select the credit you want to refund and click Pay Refund. A refund cheque for the amount of the credit appears in the Settle Returns & Credits window.

4

2 3

If the Apply Customer Payments Automatically to Oldest Invoice First preference is set, amounts will appear next to the oldest invoices in the Amount Applied column. However, you can apply the credit amount to any one transaction or you can divide it among many transactions in the list. Note that the total amount you apply in the Amount Applied column must equal the amount that appears in the Credit Amount field.
5

4

In the Account field, enter the bank account you are making the payment from. If required, change other information in the window, such as the transaction date. If you are paying by cheque and you have already written it, select the Cheque Already Printed option. Specify how you want to send a remittance advice by selecting a delivery option from the Remittance Advice Delivery Status list. Click Record.

5

6

If you want to apply part of a customer credit to any unpaid finance charge, enter an amount in the Finance Charge field. Click Record to apply the credit.

7

6

8

80

C H A P T E R 5

SALES

Dealing with a supplier who is also a customer
If your business sells goods and services to a business from which you also make purchases, you need to record the transactions using a separate customer and supplier card. You can then record a contra payment to offset the receivable and payable amounts. Before you can record contra payments, create a bank account called Contra Suspense. b In the Customer field, enter the customer’s name. c Enter the amount that you need to offset against an invoice.
2

To record contra payments
1

Record a payment made to the supplier. a In the Pay Bills window, enter the Contra Suspense account in the Pay from Account field. b In the Supplier field, enter the supplier’s card. c Enter the amount that you need to offset against a purchase.

Record a payment from the customer. a In the Receive Payments window, enter the Contra Suspense account in the Deposit to Account field.

After these entries are made, your bank accounts will not have been affected; yet the receivable and payable accounts have been reduced. The Contra Suspense account balance should be zero.

Accounting for bad debts
When you know that a debt will not be recovered, you need to write it off. Before you can write off a bad debt, create a ‘Bad Debt’ expense account in your accounts list or, if you account for bad debts by posting a provision to an asset account, create a ‘Provision for Bad Debts’ asset account.
5

In the Acct No. field, enter the expense account for Bad Debts or the Provision for Bad Debts asset account. In the Amount field, type the bad debt amount as a negative number. In the Tax field, enter the required tax code. Click Record. In the Settle Returns & Credits window, apply the credit against the original open invoice. For more information, see ‘Settling credits’ on page 79.

6

7

To write off a bad debt
1

8 9

Go to the Sales command centre and click Enter Sales. The Sales window appears. Enter the customer’s details. Click Layout, choose Miscellaneous, and then click OK. In the Description field, type a description of the transaction.

2 3 4

DEALING WITH A SUPPLIER WHO IS ALSO A CUSTOMER

8 1

82

C H A P T E R 5

SALES

6 Purchases
This chapter explains how to enter information about your purchases. You record a purchase by specifying the supplier details, the purchase form layout (item, service, professional or miscellaneous), type of the purchase (quoted, ordered or billed) and details of the purchased items or services. This chapter also explains how to pay your suppliers for these purchases, how to deal with suppliers who owe you money (settling a supplier debit) and how to review and analyse your purchasing activity with a variety of reports and analytical tools.

Creating a supplier card
Before you can record a purchase, you need to create a card for your supplier.

To create a card
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click New. The Card Information window appears.

2

3 4 5

Select Supplier from the Card Type list. Select the designation of the card: company or individual. Type the name of the supplier.

83

6

If you use codes to identify suppliers, type the code for the supplier in the Card ID field. For more information, see ‘Card identification codes’ on page 223. Enter contact details for the supplier. If you want to enter more contact information, select Address 2 from the Locations list and enter the additional details. You can enter contact details for five locations.

A Buying information

7

The selections you make here will be used, by default, on quotes, orders and bills that you create for this supplier. You can override these selections when recording a purchase. The supplier’s tax information is entered here. If the supplier’s tax status takes precedence over that of the item or service being sold, click the Use Supplier’s Tax Code option. See ‘Setting up tax codes’ on page 164. The credit terms entered here are used as the default terms for all purchases from the supplier, but can be changed at any time.

B Tax information

8

Click the Card Details tab. You can enter notes about the supplier, insert a picture and assign attributes.
If you want to... insert a picture assign identifiers to the card assign an attribute from a custom list enter additional information in a custom field

C Credit terms

See page 223 page 214 page 215 page 222
12 11 10

If you will pay this supplier electronically, click the Payment Details tab and enter your supplier’s bank account details. [Optional] Click the History tab and type the dollar value of the purchases made prior to your conversion month. You can also enter the date that the contact became a supplier. Click OK to save the card.

9

Click the Buying Details tab and enter your buying details.

A

B

C

84

C H A P T E R 6

PURCHASES

Entering purchases
You can enter a purchase as a quote, order, receive item or bill. You can enter a quote to store an estimate or quote you received from one of your suppliers. A quote has no impact on your inventory levels and can be changed to an order or a bill when you are ready to purchase. An order is a purchase where no service or item has been received. While orders do not affect your financial figures, they do affect your inventory levels. Orders don’t create transactions unless you have paid a deposit to the supplier. An order can be changed to a bill but not a quote. You can use a receive item purchase to record the receipt of items you have ordered but have not yet been billed for. When you record items received, the item is added to your inventory and the cost of the item is added to an accrual account for inventory items until you record a purchase for it. An accounts payable transaction is not recorded at this time. You can only record a received items transaction in the item layout, and only against an order. A bill is usually created when you receive the items or services you ordered and are required to pay the supplier (that is, you have been charged for the purchase). Recording a bill will update the appropriate accounts, including the account for tracking payables. Bills can be open (unpaid), closed (paid) or debit (negative purchase). A bill cannot be changed to a quote or an order. You can enter a purchase in: the Purchases window the Bank Register window. The purchases procedure described in this section is for entering purchases in the Purchases window, which allows you to record full details about a transaction. Bank Register window Entering a purchase in the Bank Register window is a fast way to enter a purchase transaction. However, you can enter less detail about the purchase than if you entered it in the Purchases window. For more information, see ‘Entering transactions in the Bank Register window’ on page 52.

Entering a purchase transaction
Do the following tasks to enter a purchase transaction:
Task
1 2 3 4 5 Enter information about the supplier Choose the layout and purchase type Enter the items or services you are purchasing Enter additional information about the purchase Complete the purchase

See below page 86 page 86 page 87 page 88

Task 1: Enter information about the supplier
1

Go to the Purchases command centre and click Enter Purchases. The Purchases window appears. In the Supplier field, enter the supplier’s name and press TAB. The terms shown in the Purchases window are the terms recorded in the supplier’s card.

2

ENTERING PURCHASES

8 5

3

Complete the fields as described in the following table:
A B C

3

Select the type of purchase from the Purchase Type list in the top‐left corner. You can choose from: Quote, Order, Receive Items or Bill. Note that the Receive Items option only appears for the item purchase layout.

D

A

Click the zoom arrow ( ) to alter the terms for this purchase only. If you want to change the credit terms for all future purchases for this supplier, you must make that change on the Buying Details tab of the supplier’s card. If you are entering prices that include tax, select the Tax Inclusive option. Do not change this setting after you enter an amount in the Amount column. Type the purchase number here or accept the default number. If the supplier gave you an invoice number for this transaction, enter it here.

Task 3: Enter the items or services you are purchasing
The scrolling list in the middle of the Purchases window is where you enter details of what you are buying. In this area, you will enter item numbers, descriptions, account numbers (or account names) and other information about your transaction. One row in the scrolling list is one line item of the transaction. You can enter as many line items for a purchase as you want. The fields that appear in the scrolling list differ according to the purchase layout you chose. The following illustration shows the fields for a purchase with an Item layout and a Bill type.
Item layout
A B C D E F G H I J

B

C D

Task 2: Choose the layout and purchase type
When you enter a purchase, you need to choose the appropriate purchase settings for recording it. This means choosing a purchase type, as well as a purchase layout.

To choose the layout and purchase type
1

A B

Bill Received

The quantity you have been invoiced for. This field is read‐only. It displays the quantity of items received against an order. For more information, see ‘Recording items received without a supplier bill’ on page 90. The quantity of the item to be placed on backorder. An order for this amount will be created automatically when you click Record. Enter the item being purchased.

Click Layout. The Select Layout window appears. You can choose from: Service, Item, Professional or Miscellaneous. Note that the default layout is determined by the selections made when you set up purchase details (using the Purchases Easy Setup Assistant) or when you created the supplier’s card.

C

Backorder

2

Choose the layout you want to use and click OK.
D Item Number

86

C H A P T E R 6

PURCHASES

E

Description

A description of the item appears automatically. You can change this if you want. If you want to check spelling in this field, click Spell. For more information, see ‘Spell‐check’ on page 14. The price of the item appears automatically. You can change this if you want. [Optional] Type a volume discount as a percentage. The total price is calculated automatically. If you change the price, the Disc% field is updated to show the discount applicable. [Optional] Select a job number here to assign the line item to a specific job. Select a tax code for the line item.

NOTE : Add lines, subtotals and headers to purchases You can add lines, headers and subtotals to purchases to make it easy to separate and subtotal different groups of line items on one bill. For more information, see ‘Adding and deleting lines, subtotals and headers’ on page 88.

F G H

Price Disc% Total

Task 4: Enter additional information about the purchase
The fields that appear at the bottom of the Purchases window depend upon the type of purchase you are creating.
A D E G

I J

Job Tax

The following illustration shows the fields for a purchase with a Service layout and a Bill type. These fields also apply to the Professional and Miscellaneous layouts.
Service layout
A B C D E B C F

A B

Optional fields Bill Delivery Status Journal Memo Tax Freight Paid Today Freight tax

Enter optional details, such as a comment, shipping method and the date the goods or services were promised. If you want to print or email the purchase in a batch, select the required bill delivery method from the list. For more information, see ‘Sending forms’ on page 196. The journal memo is generated automatically. You can change it if you want. Click the zoom arrow ( ) if you want to change the tax amount of the purchase. Enter any charges for freight. Enter an amount here to indicate how much money you paid at the time of the purchase or, if you are creating an order, how much money you gave as a deposit. Select the tax code for the freight charges.

A

Description

A description of the service being purchased. If you want to check spelling in this field, click Spell. For more information, see ‘Spell‐check’ on page 14. Enter the account to assign to the purchase. This should be an expense or cost of sales account. You should not select your accounts payable account for supplier purchases. The amount you have been invoiced. [Optional] Select a job number here to assign the line item to a specific job. For more information about jobs, see ‘Tracking financial information’ on page 225. Select a tax code for the line item.

C D E F

B

Acct No. or Account Name

C D

Amount Job

E

Tax

G

ENTERING PURCHASES

8 7

Task 5: Complete the purchase
There are several ways you can complete the purchase.
Save the purchase as a recurring purchase You can save the purchase as a recurring transaction so that you can use it again in the future. Click Save as Recurring. In the Recurring Schedule Information window, enter the necessary information and click OK. (For more information, see ‘Recurring transactions’ on page 179.)
TIP :

Adding and deleting lines, subtotals and headers
You can add lines, headers and subtotals to purchase transactions.

To insert a blank line
1

In the Purchases window, click in the line below where you want the line to appear. Go to the Edit menu and choose Insert Blank Line.

If you want to record the purchase without printing or sending it, click Record. If you want to record the purchase and print, send or save it as a PDF, complete the relevant procedure below. The transaction will be recorded first.
Purchases with the miscellaneous layout Purchases that use the miscellaneous layout cannot be printed, saved or emailed.
NOTE :

2

To insert a transaction line
1

In the Purchases window, click in the line below where you want the transaction line to appear. Go to the Edit menu and choose Insert Transaction Line.

2

To insert a header
To
Print

Do this
Click Print and choose: • a form from the list. For example, if you selected a default purchase form in the supplier card, this form will appear in the list. • Select Another Form to choose a different purchases form. Click Print and choose Preview to preview the purchases form for this transaction. Click Send To and choose Email. Review and make entries in the Email window and click Send. The email, which will include a PDF (Portable Document Format) attachment, will be sent to the outbox of your default email software. Send the email from your email software. Click Send To and choose Disk. In the window that appears, enter a file name and location for the PDF file and click Save.

You can group several line items by inserting a header.
1

In the Purchases window, click in the line below where you want the header to appear. Go to the Edit menu and choose Insert Header. A blank line will appear in the scrolling list. Type the text for the header in the Description column.

2

3

Print preview Email

4

Press TAB to complete the entry. The text appears in grey.

Save as PDF

88

C H A P T E R 6

PURCHASES

To insert a subtotal
1

In the Purchases window, click in the first line below the items to be subtotalled. Go to the Edit menu and choose Insert Subtotal. A line appears, displaying the subtotal of the individual amounts that appear above the subtotal line. Note that if there are amounts that have already been subtotalled above this line, they will be disregarded.

To delete a blank line, transaction line, header or subtotal
1

2

In the Purchases window, click anywhere on the blank line, transaction line, header or subtotal you want to delete. Go to the Edit menu and choose Delete Line.

2

Receiving items without a supplier bill
If you receive items from a supplier and have not been billed for them, you may not know the actual amount payable to the supplier. However, if you inventory these items, you will need to add them to your on‐hand inventory before you can sell them. But, as you don’t know the amount payable, you shouldn’t record an amount owed to the supplier at this time. Instead, you can record the receipt of these items using a purchase transaction with a Receive Item type. When you record a purchase with a Receive Item type, you enter an estimated purchase amount, which is then allocated to the accounts payable accrual account. Your accounts payable is not affected at this time. Later, when your supplier bills you for the items, you can record a purchase with the actual purchase amount. When you record the purchase, the actual purchase amount is allocated to your accounts payable and the estimated amount is removed from the accrual account. Before you can record items received without a supplier bill, you need to set up the accrual account for them.

Set up an accrual account for items received without a supplier bill
When you record items received without a supplier bill, you need to allocate the anticipated purchase amount to an accounts payable or inventory accrual account. If the account does not exist, you need to create it. The account should be a liability account named, for example, ‘AP Accrual ‐ Inventory’. For information on creating an account, see ‘Setting up accounts’ on page 24. Before you can allocate transactions to this account, you need to make it the linked account for items received without a supplier bill.

To link an account for items received
1

Go to the Setup menu, choose Linked Accounts and then Purchases Accounts. The Purchases Linked Accounts window appears.

RECEIVING ITEMS WITHOUT A SUPPLIER BILL

8 9

2 3

Select the I can receive items without a Supplier bill option. In the Liability Account for Item Receipt field, enter the inventory accrual account. Click OK.

5 6

In the Receive field, type the item quantity received. Click Record. The items are recorded in your inventory and the original order is updated with the number of items received. If the total number of items in the Receive and To Date columns of an item receipt is greater than the quantity in the Ordered column, a message appears. You can: Update order: If you choose to update the order, your original order will be updated by the difference between the quantity of the original order and the total received (the quantities in the Receive column plus the quantity in the To Date column). New order: If you choose to create a new order, the quantity of items listed in the new order will equal the difference between the amount of the original order and the total received (the quantities in the Receive column plus the quantity in the To Date column). Cancel: If you choose to cancel, you will return to the Receive Item window without updating or creating any orders. When you receive the supplier’s bill, convert the order to a bill. For more information, see ‘Changing a purchase’s type’ on page 92.

4

7

Recording items received without a supplier bill
You need to record items received against a supplier purchase order. If the order already exists, you can record the items received against the order. If no order exists, you can create one when you record the items received.

To record items received against an order
1

Go to the Purchases command centre and click Purchases Register. The Purchases Register window appears. Click the Orders tab. Find the required order and select it. Click Receive Items. The Purchases window appears with the Receive Items type.
8

2 3 4

To create an order when you record items received
If there is no purchase order for the items received, you can create one when you receive the items.
1

Go to the Purchases command centre and click Enter Purchases. The Purchases window appears.
NOTE : Recording items received from the Inventory command centre You can also record items received by clicking Receive Items from the Inventory command centre. The Purchases window appears with the Receive Item purchase type.

2 3

In the Supplier field, enter the supplier’s name. If the item layout does not appear: a Click Layout. The Select Layout window appears. b Select Item and then click OK.

90

C H A P T E R 6

PURCHASES

4

Select Receive Items from the Purchases Type list in the top‐left of the window.

5 6

Enter the purchase date and your order number. In the Ordered field, type the quantity you ordered. This can be more than the quantity received. In the Receive field, type the quantity received. In the Item Number field, enter the item. In the Price field, type the estimated price for the items. Click Record. The items are recorded in your inventory and a purchase order is created with the number of items received. When you receive the supplier’s bill, convert the order to a bill. For more information, see ‘Changing a purchase’s type’ on page 92.

7 8 9 10

11

Creating a purchase order from a sale
If you want to order items to fulfil a sale, you can create a purchase order using sales quote or sales order details that you have recorded.

To create a purchase order from a sale
1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Sales Register. The Sales Register window appears. Locate and select: a quote—click the Quotes tab and select the required quote an order—click the Orders tab and select the required order.

2

CREATING A PURCHASE ORDER FROM A SALE

9 1

3

Click Create PO. The Purchases window appears with the new purchase order displayed. The items you entered for the sale automatically appear as line items on the purchase order. Select a supplier in the Supplier field. Note, if you have nominated a supplier for these items in the item setup, this supplier will appear by default.

5 6

Enter the cost of the items in the Price column. Complete the purchase order as you normally would. For example, you may want to change the transaction date to today’s date, or add items to the order. Click Record. The new purchase order is created and the original sales quote or order remains in the Sales Register window.

4

7

Changing a purchase’s type
The following purchase types can be changed.
Purchase type
Quote Order Bill

Can be changed to…
• • • order bill bill

See below below

The original quote will remain in the Purchases Register window unless you have indicated in your preferences that you want quotes to be deleted once they are recorded as orders or bills.

To change an order to a bill
You can change an order to a bill in the Purchases window or from the Purchases Register window. If you want to change several orders to bills simultaneously, see ‘To change several orders to bills’ below.
1

A bill cannot be changed.

Quotes and orders must be changed to a bill to show as payable.

Go to the Purchases command centre and click Purchases Register. The Purchases Register window appears. Click the Orders tab. Find the required order and select it. Click Change to Bill. The Purchases window appears, displaying the bill. If you want to, you can update the information in this window, such as the transaction date. Click Record. A new bill is created and the original order is removed.

To change a quote to an order or a bill
1

2 3 4

Go to the Purchases command centre and click Purchases Register. The Purchases Register window appears. Click the Quotes tab. Find the required quote and select it. If you want to change the quote to: an order, click Change to Order. The Purchases window appears. a bill, click Change to Bill. The Purchases window appears. If you want to, you can update the information in the Purchases window, such as the transaction date. Click Record. The bill or order is recorded.

2 3 4

5

6

5

6

92

C H A P T E R 6

PURCHASES

To change several orders to bills
You can change several orders to bills in the To Do List window.
1

4

Select the orders you want to convert to purchases by clicking in the select column ( ). Click Record as Actual. In the window that appears, enter a date for the selected transactions. This is the date that the transactions will be recorded in your accounts. Click OK.

Click To Do List from any command centre. The To Do List window appears. Click the Purchase Orders tab to display a list of all your orders. If you want to view details about a specific order, click the zoom arrow ( ) to the right of the supplier’s name.

5 6

2 3

7

Reviewing your purchases information
There are several tools that you can use to review your purchases information.
Tool
Business Insights To Do List

To analyse purchases information using Business Insights
Business Insights presents a summary of your purchases information, including which suppliers you owe money to and how much is overdue. You can also see how much you owe suppliers for each ageing period, as well as view your purchases history with your suppliers. To find information specific to your needs, sort the table columns by clicking a column heading. For example, you can find the most overdue supplier payments or the largest overdue amounts.
1

Description
Use Business Insights to analyse purchases and supplier information. The To Do List window displays all open purchases, recurring purchases and orders, sorted by due date. Purchase reports help you keep track of your purchase activities. History lets you view seven years of purchase history for an item or a supplier. The Purchases Register window gives you a complete picture of your purchase activity—open and closed purchases, orders, quotes, returns, etc. Find Transactions helps you find purchase transactions. The Transaction Journal lists journal entries of your purchases and other transactions.

See below page 93

Purchase Reports Purchase History Purchases Register

page 94 page 94 page 173

Click Business Insights in any command centre. The Business Insights window appears. Click the Supplier Analysis tab. This tab shows you: the total payments you owe suppliers and details of each overdue supplier payment (based on their credit terms), including the number of days overdue your top ten suppliers by purchase value the amounts owing for each ageing period a summary of your purchase and supplier payment history.

2

Find Transactions Transaction Journal

page 173 page 173

REVIEWING YOUR PURCHASES INFORMATION

9 3

You can use this information to: Keep on top of your supplier payments Identify which supplier payments are due or which suppliers you owe the most money to. Negotiate a payment or discount with a supplier View your payment history with the supplier, such as the average number of days it takes you to pay them.
3

To view purchase reports
There are several purchase reports that can help you track your purchase activity. For example, you can run a Payables Reconciliation Summary report if you want to analyse your payables as of a past date. The Analyse Purchases Items Spreadsheet report shows you the inventory items on which you are spending the most money.
1

If you want to use one of the graphs or tables in another document, right‐click it and choose: Copy to Clipboard. This copies the graph or table to the clipboard, ready to paste into a document. [Graphs only] Save As. Choose where you want to save the image and click Save. This saves the graph as an image file, so you can use it later.

Go to the Reports menu and choose Index to Reports. The Index to Reports window appears. Click the Purchases tab. A list of purchase report groups appears. Select a group to view the available reports. For information on displaying, customising and printing your reports, see ‘Reports’ on page 185.

2 3

To view a list of all unpaid purchases sorted by days overdue
You can view a list of all unpaid purchases in the To Do List and enter supplier payments for those purchases.
1

To view purchase history
You can view the purchase history for an item or a supplier.
1

Display the Item Information window for an item or the Card Information window for a supplier. Click the History tab. The History tab displays a total of seven years of purchase history for the item or card: the five years preceding your current financial year (as displayed in the Company Information window), the current financial year and the next financial year.

Click To Do List in any command centre. The To Do List window appears. Click the Accounts Payable tab. A list of all unpaid purchases appears. The Overdue column shows the number of days a payable is overdue (a negative number in the Overdue column indicates that the payment is not yet due). The number of days a purchase is overdue is calculated by checking the original date of purchase, comparing it to today’s date and looking at your credit terms with the supplier.

2

2

3

If you want to pay a bill, select a purchase in the list and click Pay Bills.

94

C H A P T E R 6

PURCHASES

Paying bills
If you have recorded a purchase, you can pay the supplier in the Pay Bills window. In this window you can record the payments to one or more of your outstanding bills. You can also make payments to suppliers in the Bank Register window. Paying bills through the Bank Register window can save you time if you have several purchases to pay and do not need to record detailed information (such as discounts and finance charges) for each payment. When you use the Bank Register window to make a supplier payment, the entire payment is automatically allocated to the supplier’s oldest purchases first. See ‘Entering transactions in the Bank Register window’ on page 52. You can also pay several outstanding bills at once in the Accounts Payable view of the To Do List window. For more information, see ‘To pay several bills at once’ on page 97.
NOTE : Electronic Payments setup If you pay your suppliers electronically—that is, by sending an electronic payment file (ABA file) to your bank for processing—you need to complete the electronic payment setup tasks. For more information, see ‘Set up electronic payments’ on page 36.

The options for recording payments are summarised in the following diagram.

PAYING BILLS

9 5

To pay bills
1

6

Go to the Purchases command centre and click Pay Bills. The Pay Bills window appears. Select how the payment is to be made. If you are paying the supplier electronically—that is, if you will be generating an electronic payment file (ABA file) for this payment—select the Group with Electronic Payments option.

In the scrolling list in the bottom half of the window, indicate which purchases are covered by the payment by entering amounts in the Amount Applied column.
B C

2

D E

If you are paying the supplier by some other means—such as by cash, cheque, credit card or internet banking, select the Pay from Account option and enter an account in the adjacent field.

A

A

Pay All

If you are settling your account in full, click Pay All. The total payment amount appears in the Amount field and the individual payment amounts are applied to each open purchase. If you are taking an early‐payment discount for a purchase, assign the discount to the appropriate purchase in this column. Note that you cannot assign a discount to a purchase that you are not settling in full. If this is the case and you want to record a discount that the supplier has given you, create a supplier debit. See ‘Settling supplier debits’ on page 98. Enter how much of the payment you want to apply to each purchase in this column. If part of the payment was used to pay finance charges, type the finance charge amount here. The Out of Balance amount must be zero before you can record the transaction. This field will show an out of balance amount if there is any variance between values in the Total Paid and Amount fields. If you have out of balance amounts, correct the amounts in the Amount Applied and Finance Charge fields.

B
3

Discount

In the Supplier field, enter the supplier’s name.
NOTE : If you receive an alert message If you have an outstanding debit with this supplier, a message may appear. You will have the opportunity to settle the debit now, or at a later date. (See ‘Settling supplier debits’ on page 98).

C D E

Amount Applied Finance Charge Out of Balance

4 5

In the Amount field, type the total amount paid. Change the memo and payment date if necessary.

7

If you want to print or email a remittance advice later, select an option from the Remittance Advice Delivery Status list.

96

C H A P T E R 6

PURCHASES

8

If you are recording a cheque payment and the cheque has already been written, or if you are recording a transaction that doesn’t require a printed cheque (such as a petty‐cash payment or internet payment), select the Cheque Already Printed option. If you want to print a cheque or remittance advice now, click Print and select the form type you want to print, or select to preview the form before printing it. Note that the payment is recorded before it is printed or previewed. Click Record.

To pay several bills at once
You can pay several outstanding bills at once in the To Do List window. The linked account for paying bills will be used for all supplier payments made from this window.
1

9

Click To Do List in any command centre. The To Do List window appears. Click the Accounts Payable tab. A list of all unpaid purchases appears. If you want to view details about a specific bill, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the bill.

2

10

Paying bills electronically
When you have recorded the bill payments you want to pay electronically, you can prepare the electronic payment file for your bank to process. See ‘Paying suppliers electronically’ on page 51.
3 4 5

Click in the select column ( Click Pay Bills.

) next to each bill you want to pay.

In the window that appears, enter a date for the selected transactions. This is the date that the transactions will be recorded in your accounts. Click OK and then click Close.

6

Recording and settling supplier debits
A supplier debit is money that a supplier owes you. For example, if you receive goods that are damaged, the supplier may refund you the purchase value or apply the amount to other unpaid purchases you have with them. To process a supplier debit, you first need to record a debit transaction and then record the settlement of the debit (for example, by recording a refund cheque from your supplier).

Recording supplier debits
You can create a supplier debit in one of two ways: Reverse a purchase. Use this method if you have paid for the entire purchase. Manually create a debit. Use this method if you have been debited for part of a purchase.

RECORDING AND SETTLING SUPPLIER DEBITS

9 7

To reverse an existing purchase
Your company file transactions must be set to unchangeable before you can reverse a purchase; that is, the Transactions CAN’T be Changed; They Must be Reversed option must be selected in the Security tab of the Preferences window.
1

8

Click Record. The supplier debit appears in the Purchases Register window.

To manually create a debit for an item purchase
1

Find and display the purchase. See ‘Finding a transaction’ on page 173. Go to the Edit menu and choose Reverse Purchase. A supplier debit appears in the Purchases window. If you want, you can make some changes to the supplier debit (such as changes to the date and memo), but you can’t change the accounts, amounts and quantities that are associated with the debit. Click Record Reversal. The supplier debit appears in the Purchases Register window.

Go to the Purchases command centre and click Enter Purchases. The Purchases window appears. In the Supplier field, enter the supplier’s name. Select Bill from the Purchases Type list in the top left corner of the window. Click Layout, select Item and click OK. In the Bill field, type the quantity of the item you are returning as a negative number. In the Item Number field, enter the item. The cost of the item is displayed as negative amount in the Total field. Click Record. The supplier debit appears in the Purchases Register window.

2 3

2

3

4 5

4

6

7

To manually create a debit for a non-item purchase
TIP : Tracking purchase returns and allowances Before you create a supplier debit for the first time, you may want to create an expense account for tracking purchase returns and allowances.

Settling supplier debits
You can settle a supplier debit in one of two ways: Apply the debit to an unpaid purchase. Use this method to apply the supplier debit to one or more of your unpaid purchases from the supplier, or Receive a refund. Use this method to record the receipt of a refund cheque from the supplier.

1

Go to the Purchases command centre and click Enter Purchases. The Purchases window appears. In the Supplier field, enter the supplier’s name. Select Bill from the Purchases Type list in the top left corner of the window. Click Layout and select Miscellaneous. In the Description field, type the reason for the supplier debit. In the Acct No. field, enter the account number to be debited. This is normally an expense account called ‘Purchases Returns’. In the Amount field, type the amount of the debit as a negative amount.
1

2 3

4 5 6

To apply a supplier debit to an unpaid purchase
Go to the Purchases command centre and click Purchases Register. The Purchases Register window appears. Click the Returns & Debits tab. Locate and select the debit you want to apply and click Apply to Purchase. The Settle Returns & Debits window appears, listing all open purchases that you have made from the supplier.

2 3

7

98

C H A P T E R 6

PURCHASES

4

Type the amount you want to apply to a purchase in the Amount Applied column. If the Apply Supplier Payments Automatically to Oldest Purchase First preference is selected in the Preferences window (Purchases view), amounts will appear next to the oldest purchase in the Amount Applied column. However, you can apply the debit amount to one transaction or you can split it over any of the transactions in the list. Remember that the total amount you apply in the Amount Applied column must equal the amount that appears in the Debit Amount field.

To record a refund cheque
1

Go to the Purchases command centre and click Purchases Register. The Purchases Register window appears. Click the Returns & Debits tab. Locate and select the debit that is being refunded and click Receive Refund. A refund cheque for the amount of the supplier debit appears in the Settle Returns & Debits window. Select a payment method in the Payment Method field and click Details. The Applied Payment Details window appears. Enter the details and click OK.

2 3

4

5

6

Click Record to record the refund cheque.

5

If you want to apply part of the supplier debit to unpaid finance charges you may have accrued, enter an amount in the Finance Charge field. Click Record to apply the supplier debit. If the transaction is unbalanced, that is, if the total amount entered in the Amount Applied column doesn’t equal the amount displayed in the Debit Amount field at the top of the window, a message appears. Click OK to close the message and then check that the amounts you have applied to the various transactions are correct.

6

RECORDING AND SETTLING SUPPLIER DEBITS

9 9

Adding finance charges paid to suppliers
Finance charges are amounts added to an outstanding balance as a penalty for late payment. If your supplier has added a finance charge to your account, you can record the charge in the Pay Bills window. Setting up finance charges Before you can record finance charges, you need to select an account for tracking late payment charges. Go to the Setup menu, choose Linked Accounts, and then Purchases Accounts. Select the I pay charges for late payment option and select an expense account to record the late payment charges. Recording finance charges When you pay the finance charge, type the amount in the Finance Charge field of the Pay Bills window. Although the history of finance charges is not tracked, you can perform an account inquiry (using Find Transactions) on the finance charge linked account to view the amounts paid. Deleting finance charges If you enter a finance charge in the Pay Bills window, two transactions are recorded for the finance charge—a bill in the purchases journal and a payment in the disbursements journal. To delete a finance charge, you must first delete the finance charge payment and then delete the finance charge bill.

100

C H A P T E R 6

PURCHASES

7 Paying your employees
Payroll is only available in AccountRight Plus You can use the Payroll feature to process pays for wages and salary. You can also calculate overtime rates, allowances, union fees and other deductions, employer expenses, superannuation and entitlements such as annual leave and personal leave, along with tax deductions. The components of an employee’s pay, such as wages, entitlements and taxes, are called payroll categories. These are assigned to an employee’s card to calculate their standard pay. Some payroll categories (deductions, expenses and taxes) determine what are known as payroll liabilities. These are amounts withheld for later payment to the appropriate authority or agency. When you process pays, you can vary an employee’s pay by overriding the standard pay values, such as the actual number of hours worked and the number of hours of annual leave taken. At year‐end, you can print payment summaries for your employees to use at tax time. For more information, see ‘Closing a payroll year’ on page 252. Before you can pay your employees, you need set up your payroll. See ‘Set up payroll’, on page 35.
Securing employee information If you are concerned about employee privacy, you can use the security features to restrict access to this and other areas of AccountRight. See ‘Managing user accounts’ on page 259.

101

Creating payroll categories
An employee’s pay is made up of separate components, such as normal time, overtime, superannuation guarantee, salary sacrifice, PAYG withholding, and so on. In AccountRight, these components are called payroll categories, and they are grouped into six types: wages, superannuation, entitlements, deductions, expenses and taxes.
Payroll category
Wages Superannuation

A default list of payroll categories is generated when you create your company file. You may want to review these categories and tailor them to suit your business needs. If you want to create a new payroll category, see the relevant procedure below. If you want to edit an existing category, see ‘Editing payroll categories’ on page 109.

Description
All monies paid to an employee for labour or services rendered on an hourly, salary or other basis. Superannuation benefits such as superannuation guarantee and salary sacrifice. Note that any reportable superannuation contributions need be set up as separate superannuation payroll categories. For more information, see ‘Reportable Employer Super Contributions (RESC)’, on page 127. Items such as annual and personal leave, which employees accrue under the terms of their work agreement. Amounts withheld by the employer and paid to other organisations on behalf of the employee, for example, union fees. Employer‐paid benefits other than superannuation, for example, WorkCover. Amounts withheld by the employer from the employee’s paycheque and paid to a statutory authority, for example, PAYG Withholding paid to the ATO.

To create a wage category
1

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Payroll Categories. The Payroll Category List window appears.

Entitlements

Deductions

Expenses Taxes

2

Click the Wages tab.

102

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

3 4

Click New. The Wages Information window appears. Type a name for the wage category and make the required selections in the window.

5 6

Click Employee. The Linked Employees window appears. Select the employees whose pay will include this category, then click OK. Click Exempt. The Exemptions window appears for the payroll category you are creating. Select the taxes and deductions that do not apply to the new category. Click OK. Click OK to return to the Payroll Category List window.

7

8 A B 9 10 C

To create a superannuation category
1

D

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Payroll Categories. The Payroll Category List window appears.

A Choose either Salary or Hourly to specify whether the calculation will be based upon the hours worked or a set amount per pay period. Linked wage categories for entitlements (such as Annual Leave) must be hourly for all employees (even those paid a salary) for the entitlements to be processed correctly. B If you select Hourly as the type of wages, the Pay Rate fields appear. Select Regular Rate Multiplied by and enter, for example, 2 for double time or 1.5 for time and a half. This will multiply the employee’s Hourly Base Pay (entered in the Payroll Details tab of their card) by this amount. Alternatively, you can enter a fixed hourly rate. This dollar amount per hour will be the same for each employee regardless of their hourly base pay. C If you want to override the employees’ wage expense account (entered in the Payroll Details tab of their card) for this particular wage, select the Optional Account option and enter the override account in the field that appears. D [Hourly wages only] If you want to use this wage category to pay leave entitlements (such as Personal Leave or Annual Leave), select the Automatically Adjust Base Hourly or Base Salary Details option. When you

2 3

Click the Superannuation tab. Click New. The Superannuation Information window appears.

record leave, base pay amounts will be adjusted for the amount of leave paid.

CREATING PAYROLL CATEGORIES

1 0 3

4

Type a name for the superannuation category and make the required selections in the window.

C

A B C

D E F G H

The Contribution Type may be Employee Additional, Employer Additional, Productivity, Redundancy, Salary Sacrifice, Spouse or Superannuation Guarantee. Select the appropriate type from the list. • The Salary Sacrifice (deduction) contribution type is deducted from an employee’s gross pay, that is, before PAYG withholding tax is calculated. It reduces the employee’s gross taxable income. • The Employee Additional (deduction) and Spouse (deduction) contribution types are deducted from the employee’s net pay, that is, after PAYG withholding tax is calculated. • The Employer Additional (expense), Productivity (expense), Redundancy (expense) and Superannuation Guarantee (expense) contribution types are paid in addition to the employee’s gross pay.

D If you want the superannuation amount accrued to appear on employees’ pay advice, select the Print on Pay Advice option. E Calculation Basis can be: • User‐Entered Amount per Pay Period allows you to enter an amount at the time the pay is processed each pay period. Choose this option if the amount varies regularly or if you want to use the amount you have entered in an employee’s standard pay details. • Equals x Percent of allows you to enter a percentage of a payroll category (such as wage, deduction or superannuation) or a percentage of all wage categories (by choosing Gross Wages or Federal Wages). The superannuation will be calculated until the limit is reached. • Equals x Dollars per allows you to enter a specified amount per pay period, per hour, per month or per year until the specified limit is reached. In the Exclusions field type the amount by which the eligible wage is reduced before the superannuation is calculated. For example, an employee with a gross wage of $1000 per month and an exclusion of $100 will have the superannuation calculated only on $900.

A

Linked Expense Account is the account to which you charge employer expense superannuation payroll categories (Employer Additional, Productivity Superannuation, Redundancy Superannuation or Superannuation Guarantee). The Default Employer Expense Account you specified when setting up payroll appears as the default. We recommend you create an expense account called Superannuation Expense and select it as the linked expense account. Linked Payable Account is the liability account to which the superannuation amounts accrue. The Default Tax/Deductions Payable Account you specified when setting up payroll appears as the default. We recommend you create a liability account called Superannuation Liability and select it as the linked payable account. F

B

104

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

G Superannuation limits can be used to place a ceiling on the superannuation calculation. For example, for an Employee Additional superannuation deduction of $30 per pay period and a limit of 2% of gross wages, a pay with gross wages of $1000 yields superannuation of only $20 (i.e. 2%). Limit can be one of the following three choices: • No Limit signifies no limit to the superannuation calculated for this category. • Equals x Percent of results in the maximum superannuation calculated being a percentage of wage, deduction or superannuation payroll categories. For example, an Employer Additional superannuation contribution might be $20 per pay period, but this should not exceed a maximum of 20% of the employee’s base salary. • Equals x Dollars per results in the maximum superannuation calculated being a fixed amount per pay period, per hour, per month or per year. For example, a Salary Sacrifice superannuation might be 5% of the employee’s gross wages up to $1000 per year. H If this superannuation calculation is only payable if wages exceed a specified amount per month (such as for superannuation guarantee contributions), enter this amount in the Threshold field. For example, if the superannuation guarantee contribution is 9% of the employee’s gross wages and the threshold is $450 per month, then superannuation is not payable until the employee’s gross wage exceeds $450 per month. When determining whether the gross wages on a pay exceeds the threshold per month, other pays issued that month are included. (See ‘Troubleshooting superannuation calculations’ on page 127.)
5 6

To create an entitlement category
1

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Payroll Categories. The Payroll Category List window appears.

2 3 4

Click the Entitlements tab. Click New. The Entitlements Information window appears. Type a name for the entitlement and make the required selections in the window.

Click Employee. The Linked Employees window appears. Select the employees whose pay will include this category, then click OK. Click Exempt. The Exemptions window appears for the payroll category you are creating. Select the taxes and deductions that do not apply to the new category. Click OK. Click OK to return to the Payroll Category List window.
A B C D

7

8

9 10

CREATING PAYROLL CATEGORIES

1 0 5

A Calculation Basis can be: • User‐Entered Amount per Pay Period should be selected if you want to manually enter a specific amount for each employee, each pay period. Choose this option if the amount varies regularly or if you want to use the amount you have entered in an employee’s standard pay details. • Equals x Percent of allows you to set the entitlement as a percentage of the number of hours of any wage category. It can only be used with employees who have an Hourly Base Pay (entered in the Payroll Details tab view of their card). For information about the way in which you should determine the percentage rate for calculating annual leave and personal leave accruals, see ‘Calculating annual and personal leave accruals’ on page 106. Type the required percentage for the entitlement in the first field and then select the wage category from the selection list, which shows all your hourly wage categories, in addition to Gross Hours and Federal Hours, which totals all the hourly wage categories you pay an employee. For example, an annual leave entitlement may be for 20 days per year, being 152 hours per year based on a 38‐hour week. Every hour worked accumulates 0.076923 hours of leave, or 7.6923%. If a worker is paid an hourly pay of 38 hours plus 2 hours overtime, and both are included in gross hours, the Gross Hours options will calculate an entitlement on a weekly pay of 7.6923% of 40 hours, or 3.076 hours. • Equals x Hours per allows you to enter a fixed number of hours to be accrued each Pay Period, Month or Year, regardless of the hours worked by the employee. If you have set your employees to be paid on a salary basis rather than on an hourly basis, this is the only option that will automatically accrue entitlements. Using this method, an annual leave entitlement may be for 20 days per year, being 152 hours per year based on a 38‐hour week. If the employee is being paid fortnightly, there are 26 pay periods per year. The amount you enter here would be 152 ÷ 26 = 5.846 hours per pay period. If you pay more than a standard pay period in one cheque, you will need to manually adjust this figure. For example, for 2 weeks pay on one pay (1 week in advance), you would double it to 11.692 hours. B If you want the entitlement amount to appear on the pay advice, select the Print on Pay Advice option. C If you want to carry over any entitlement leave balance from the previous year, select the Carry Remaining Entitlement Over to Next Year option.

D Each entitlement category must have a Linked Wages Category. For example, the Annual Leave Accrual entitlement could be linked to the Annual Leave Pay wage category and the Personal Leave Accrual entitlement could be linked to the Personal Leave wage category. If you create a new entitlement, you must link it to a wage category. When employees use their entitlement, for example, by taking a holiday, you allocate the hours taken against the linked wage category (in this example, the Annual Leave Pay wage category). The employee’s accrued leave balance is reduced by the hours taken. Note that you can link multiple wage categories to an entitlement. This enables you to provide and track different types of the same entitlement. For example, you can link a Personal Leave wage category and Personal Leave Without Certificate wage category to the Personal Leave Accrual entitlement. When an employee takes either type of leave, Personal Leave Accrual entitlement is reduced by the hours taken.
5 6

Click Employee. The Linked Employees window appears. Select the employees whose pay will include this category, then click OK. Click Exempt. The Exemptions window appears for the payroll category you are creating. Select the taxes and deductions that do not apply to the new category. Click OK. Click OK to return to the Payroll Category List window.

7

8

9 10

Calculating annual and personal leave accruals The following examples may help you calculate the percentage rate for your hourly employees. Annual leave entitlements An employee has 20 days annual leave per year and works a 7.6‐hour day (38‐hour week). 7.6 hours × 20 days= 152 hours of annual leave 152 hours ÷ (38 hours × 52 weeks) = 7.6923% Personal leave entitlements An employee has 10 days personal leave per year and works a 7.6‐hour day (38‐hour week).

106

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

7.6 hours × 10 days = 76 hours of personal leave 76 hours ÷ (38 hours x 52 weeks) = 3.846%

A

To create a deduction category
1

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Payroll Categories. The Payroll Category List window appears.
B

Linked Payable Account is the account (usually a liability account) in which all the deducted money will be accrued. The Default Tax/Deductions Payable Account you specified when setting up payroll appears as the default. You can change this default if you want to track the deduction separately. For example, if you are deducting union fees, create a Union Fees Payable liability account. This way, the balance sheet will display the deductions separately from your PAYG Withholding and other deductions. Calculation Basis can be one of the following choices: • User‐Entered Amount per Pay Period should be selected if you want to manually enter a specific amount for each employee, each pay period or if you want to use the amount you have entered in an employee’s standard pay details. Note that manually entered deductions should be entered as negative values. • Equals x Percent of allows you to enter a percentage of any of the wage categories. This amount will be deducted until the deduction limit (see below) is reached. Type or select a wage category upon which the calculation is to be based. Alternatively, you can select Gross Wages or Federal Wages, which totals all wage categories (hourly and salary) you pay an employee. • Equals x Dollars per allows you to deduct the specified amount per pay period, per month, per year or per hour. This amount will be deducted until the limit (see below) is reached. Limit may be one of the following choices: • No Limit signifies no limit on the amount of money that can be deducted from the employee’s pay for this category. • Equals x Percent of results in the maximum deduction amount being a percentage of a wage category. For example, a deduction might be $50 per pay period up to a maximum of 50% of the employee’s base salary. The special categories of Gross Wages and Federal Wages is also available here (refer to discussion in ‘Equals x Percent of’, above). • Equals x Dollars per results in the maximum deduction being a fixed dollar amount per pay period, per month or per year. For example, a deduction might be 10% of the employee’s gross wages up to $1,500 per year.

C
2 3 4

Click the Deductions tab. Click New. The Deduction Information window appears. Type a name for the deduction and make the required selections in the window.

A B C 5 6

Click Employee. The Linked Employees window appears. Select the employees whose pay will include this category, then click OK. Click Exempt. The Exemptions window appears for the payroll category you are creating.

7

CREATING PAYROLL CATEGORIES

1 0 7

8

Select the taxes and deductions that do not apply to the new category. Click OK. Click OK to return to the Payroll Category List window.

5

Make the required selections for the payroll category.

9 10

A B

To create an employer expense category
1

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Payroll Categories. The Payroll Category List window appears.

D E F

C

A

Linked Expense Account is the account to which you are charging this expense. The Default Employer Expense Account you specified when setting up payroll appears as the default. Linked Payable Account is the liability account to which your expense will accrue. The Default Tax/Deductions Payable Account you specified when setting up payroll appears as the default. If you want employer expense amounts to appear on employees’ pay advice, select the Print on Pay Advice option. Calculation Basis can be one of the following choices: • Equals x Percent of allows you to enter a percentage of any of the wage or deduction categories, or a percentage of all the wage categories (by choosing Gross Wages). This expense will be charged until the expense limit is reached. • Equals x Dollars per allows you to enter the specified amount per pay period, per month or per year until the limit is reached.

B

C
2 3 4

Click the Expenses tab. Click New. The Employer Expense Information window appears. Type a name for the deduction.
D

108

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

E

Limits can be used to place a ceiling on the expense. For example, for an expense of $30 per pay period and a limit of 2% of gross wages, a pay with gross wages of $1,000 yields an expense of only $20 (i.e. 2%). Limit may be one of the following choices: • No Limit signifies no limit to the expense for this category. • Equals x Percent of results in the maximum expense being a percentage of a wage or deduction category or of all wage categories. For example, an expense may be $20 per pay period up to a maximum of 20% of the employee’s salary. • Equals x Dollars per results in the maximum expense being a fixed dollar amount per pay period, per month or per year. For example, an expense might be 5% of the employee’s gross wages up to $1,000 per year. Employer expenses, such as WorkCover, are only payable if wages exceed a specified amount per month. Enter this amount in the Threshold field. When determining if the gross wages on a pay exceed the minimum wage threshold per month, other pays processed in that month are included.

Editing payroll categories
To edit a payroll category
Payroll category changes affect all linked employees If you edit a payroll category, any changes you make will apply to all employee cards linked to that category.
NOTE :

1

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Payroll Categories. The Payroll Category List window appears. Click the tab corresponding to the type of payroll category you want to edit—Wages, Superannuation, Entitlements, Deductions or Expenses.
NOTE : You cannot create or edit tax categories You cannot edit the PAYG Withholding tax category, you can only view it. To view the tax table information, click the Taxes tab and then click the zoom arrow ( ) next to PAYG Withholding. Tax table information is set by the ATO. Therefore, any queries should be referred to the ATO.

F

2

6 7

Click Employee. The Linked Employees window appears. Select the employees whose pay will include this category, then click OK. Click Exempt. The Exemptions window appears for the payroll category you are creating. Select the taxes and deductions that do not apply to the new category. Click OK. Click OK to return to the Payroll Category List window.
5 3

8

Click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the payroll category you want to edit. The information window for that category appears. Make the required changes to the payroll category. For more information about each payroll category type, see the relevant procedure in ‘Creating payroll categories’ on page 102. Click OK.

9

4

10 11

You cannot create tax categories
You cannot create tax categories, you can only view the existing PAYG Withholding category. To view the tax table information, click the Taxes tab and then click the zoom arrow ( ) next to PAYG Withholding. Tax table information is set by the ATO. Therefore, any queries should be referred to the ATO.

CREATING PAYROLL CATEGORIES

1 0 9

Creating employee cards
To create an employee card
1 4 5

Enter the employee’s name and their contact details. If you want to assign a code to identify the employee, enter one in the Card ID field. If you want to enter payroll information, continue with ‘Entering employee payroll information’ below. Click OK.

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click New. The Card Information window appears. Select Employee in the Card Type field.

2 3

6

7

Entering employee payroll information
Once you have created payroll categories (see ‘Creating payroll categories’ on page 102) and an employee card (see ‘Creating employee cards’ above), you can enter the employee’s payroll information. Restrict user access to employee information You can set up user accounts to restrict access to employee payroll information. For more information, see ‘Managing user accounts’ on page 259.
4

Click a tab on the left of the window to enter payroll details.

To enter payroll information
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click the Employee tab and then click the zoom arrow next to the employee card you want to enter details for. The Card Information window appears. Click the Payroll Details tab. This window is divided into a number of subsections.

2

3

110

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

To enter personal information

To enter wage information

A

A B C D E

B

F

A B

Enter personal details, such as start date, employment category, employment status and employment classification. Select how you will deliver the employee’s pay slip. If you select email, enter the employee’s email address in the Pay Slip Email field.

A

Select the employee’s pay basis. When you select a pay basis, the corresponding payroll category for paying wage amounts is automatically selected in the Wage list. If you select Hourly, the Base Hourly wage category (or the name you assigned to this category) is selected. If you select Salary, the Base Salary wage category (or the name you assigned to this category) is selected. Enter the employee’s annual salary or hourly wage rate. Select the employee’s pay frequency. In the Hours in [...] Pay Period field, type the number of hours in the employee’s pay period. If the employee’s wage expense account is different from the default account, in the Wages Expense Account field, type or select the required account. Click in the select column ( the employee. ) next to each wage category that applies to

B

Adding employment classifications If the employment classification you require does not appear in the list of classifications, you need to add it to the list. You can do this in the Employment Classification List window (go to the Lists menu and choose Employment Classifications).
NOTE :

C D E

F

ENTERING EMPLOYEE PAYROLL INFORMATION

1 1 1

To enter superannuation information

To enter entitlement, deduction and expense information
1 A B C

Click Entitlements and click in the select column ( entitlement that applies to the employee. Click Deductions and click in the select column ( deduction that applies to the employee.

) next to each ) next to each ) next to

2

3

Click Employer Expenses and click in the select column ( each expense that applies to the employee.

D

To enter tax information

A B

A

In the Superannuation Fund field, enter your employee’s nominated fund. If your employee’s superannuation fund does not appear on the list, you need to create it. For more information, see ‘Superannuation reporting’ on page 126. Type the employee’s fund membership number in the Employee Membership No. field. If you need to provide a Standard Choice Form to this employee:
1 2 3 4

C D

B C

Click Create Superannuation Choice Form. The Review Employees Before Exporting window appears. Click Mail Merge. A Standard Choice Form appears for the employee as a Word document. Save or print the form. Click Cancel. The Card Information window reappears. A B Type the employee’s tax file number in the Tax File Number field. Select the employee’s tax table from the Tax Table list. If you select Withholding Variation from the Tax Table list, type the variation rate in the Withholding Variation Rate field. If the employee is claiming a tax rebate, type the total amount in the Total Rebates field. Amounts entered in this field reduce the tax payable over the year in instalments based on the employee’s pay frequency. For example, if the employee is paid monthly, 1/12th of the rebate is applied to each pay. If the employee requests additional tax to be withheld from their pay, type the amount to be withheld each pay period in the Extra Tax field.

D

Click in the select column ( ) next to each superannuation category that applies to the employee.

C

D

112

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

To enter standard pay information
The default values in this window are determined by the payroll categories selected and wage information entered.

To enter pay history and time billing information
1

If you started processing payroll part‐way through the payroll year, click Pay History and type the amounts paid prior to the first recorded pay in the Activity column. You can enter pay history for specific months, quarters or for the year to date. Amounts entered in the Pay History window appear on payment summaries and reports not derived from payroll activity (such as register reports). They are not recorded as transactions in your accounts.

A B C 2

If you use the Time Billing function to track time the employee spends to complete work for clients and customers, click Time Billing and enter the employee’s time billing rate and cost per hour. For more information, see Chapter 8, ’Billing for time,’ starting on page 137.

To enter payment details information
1

A B C

[Optional] If you track financial information using categories, select a category from the list. [Optional] If you want to assign a job number to a payroll category for this employee, click in the Job column and enter or select a job number. If necessary, change the employee’s default pay details by overriding the values that appear in the Hours or Amount column next to a payroll category. If you use timesheets to record all hours worked by an employee, enter zero as the default hours for the Base Hourly payroll category.
NOTE : Payroll categories with a calculated value The value of a payroll category with Calculated displayed in the Hours or Amount column is calculated when you process a pay. For example, tax amounts and entitlement hours where hours are calculated as a percentage of the gross hours paid.

Click the Payment Details tab and select the method you use to pay the employee in the Payment Method field. If you selected Electronic: a Select the number of bank accounts (up to three) the employee wants their pay to be distributed to. b Enter the employee’s bank details for each account. c Enter the statement text (Account 1 only) you want to appear on the employee’s bank statements. d If you are distributing to more than one account, in the Value field, type the amount or percentage of the pay to be deposited into the account and select the distribution method (Percent or Dollars) from the list. Note that the final account will receive the remaining amount of your employee’s net pay. Click OK. The Cards List window reappears. Click Close to return to the Card File command centre.

2

3 4

ENTERING EMPLOYEE PAYROLL INFORMATION

1 1 3

Timesheets
Timesheets are used to record all the hours worked by hourly employees or to record extra hours worked by employees that are paid based on a standard pay. If you pay employees for time‐billing activities, you can also enter activity details on timesheets and use these details to create activity slips. The timesheet feature is optional. If your hourly employees work a fixed number of hours per pay and you don’t pay employees for time‐billing activities, there’s no need for you to use this feature. However, if you pay employees for additional hours worked, such as overtime, you can record these hours using timesheets. When you record timesheet information for a pay period, you can then include the timesheet details when you process employee pays.
NOTE : Creating a timesheet entry when recording an activity slip You can create a timesheet entry from the Enter Activity Slip window by selecting the Include Hours on Timesheet option. This allows you to enter greater detail about the activity. See ‘Creating activity slips’ on page 142.

4

Select the first day of your timesheet period from the My Week Starts on [...] list, enter the first day of your timesheet period. Note that if you just use timesheets for payroll and your pay period starts on a different day each period, for example, you pay monthly, you can select any day. Click OK.

5

To enter a timesheet
1

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Enter Timesheet. The Enter Timesheet window appears.

Before using timesheets, you need to set a preference.

To set up timesheets
1

Go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. The Preferences window appears. In the System tab, select the I Use Timesheets for [...] and My Week Starts on [...] preference. If you use timesheets to record: time billing and payroll information, select Time Billing and Payroll from the I Use Timesheets for [...] list. payroll information only, select Payroll from the I Use Timesheets for [...] list.
2

2

3

In the Employee field, type or select the employee’s name. The employee’s timesheet, with any previously entered details for the period shown, appears.
Grey values in the hours column column indicates hours paid.
NOTE :

A grey value in an hours

114

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

3

If you are recording details for a week other than the current week, select the required week: click the back arrow ( ) to select a previous week click the forward arrow ( ) to select a future week click the calendar icon ( ) to select a week from the calendar that appears. Enter timesheet details in one of the following ways:
If you want to...
Enter the daily hours for each payroll category worked

5

If you want to record the start and stop times for a payroll category: a Select the Display Start/Stop Time Column option. The Start/Stop column appears. b Enter the start and stop time for the required categories. If you want to enter a timesheet for another week, repeat from step 3 above. Click OK. If you recorded time‐billing activity details on this timesheet, an activity slip is created. You can review or modify the activity slip information in the Enter Activity Slip window or the Enter Timesheet window.

6

4

7

Do this…
For each payroll category, enter an hourly payroll category in the Payroll Category field and enter the daily hours worked in the date fields. You can also: • record time‐billing details (depending on your selection in the Preferences window) • type a description in the Notes field • assign a job number. Click Copy From Previous. The employee’s timesheet details for the previous week appear.

Delete timesheet entries
You can delete unpaid timesheet entries at any time by clearing all timesheet details for a week or by deleting a timesheet line entry. When you delete timesheet entries with activity details, the linked activity slip is also deleted.

Use the same details as the previous week

To clear a timesheet for a week
1

In the Enter Timesheet window, select the employee and the required week. Click Clear Timesheet. All unpaid details for the selected week are cleared.

2

To delete a timesheet line entry
1

In the Enter Timesheet window, select the employee and the required week. Click in the line entry you want to delete. Choose Delete Line from the Edit menu.

2 3

TIMESHEETS

1 1 5

View timesheet reports
1

3

Go to the Reports menu and select Index to Reports. The Index to Reports window appears. Click the Payroll tab. A list of report headings appears.

Click Employees. A list of reports appears. Timesheets—to view all timesheets entered for a specific week. Unprocessed Timesheets—to view all unprocessed timesheets.

For information about reports, see ‘Producing reports’ on page 185.

2

Processing your payroll
The Process Payroll Assistant guides you through the process of recording your employees’ pays. In some windows of the Process Payroll Assistant you can click Back to return to a previous window to review and change the entries you have made. You can quit the assistant by clicking the Close button. If you quit before recording employee pays, you can choose to save the pay run. You can then return to the Process Payroll Assistant later to finish recording pays for that period. Pay frequency You can process pays for all employees assigned a pay frequency, such as, weekly or monthly, or process pay for an individual employee. If you want to record pays for more than one pay frequency on the same day—for example, when your weekly and monthly pay dates coincide—you need to process a separate pay run for each frequency. Excluding employees from pay processing You can filter the list of employees using the Advanced Filters function. This enables you to include or exclude employees from the pay run based on employment basis, status, classification, custom lists or identifiers. For example, if you employ seasonal workers and full‐time employees, select only full‐time employees in the Advanced Employee Filter window. To make an employee card inactive, open the employee’s card and select the Inactive Card option in the Profile tab. Before you begin information: Before you process pays, you need the following

hours worked by hourly employees annual leave and personal leave hours taken details of any other wage amounts, such as sales commissions and bonuses.
Task
1 2 3 4 5 6 Select the pay period [Optional] Include employee timesheets Select and edit employee pays Record employee pays Process payments Print or email pay slips

See page 117 page 118 page 118 page 121 page 122 page 123

116

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

Task 1: Select the pay period
1

3

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Process Payroll. The Process Payroll window appears.

If you are paying leave in advance: a Select the Pay leave in advance option. The Leave In Advance window appears. b If you are paying leave in addition to your employee’s standard pay, type 1 in the [...] of standard pay field. If you are paying leave in advance only, type 0. c In the [...] of leave in advance field, type the number of pay periods you are processing in advance. d Click OK. The Pay Period window reappears. When you include multiple pay periods in the one pay run, employee pay details are adjusted accordingly. This includes the calculation of entitlements, superannuation and PAYG withholding amounts.
NOTE : Paying leave in advance for more than one employee You can process a separate pay run for each employee being paid leave in advance, or process a pay run for all employees and, in the Employee Pays window, exclude from the pay run those employees not being paid in advance.

2

Select the employees to be included in the pay run. If you are processing pays for all employees, click Process all employees paid and select the pay frequency in the adjacent field. If you want to filter the list of employees paid at this frequency, click Advanced Filters. In the window that appears, select additional filters based on employment basis, status, classification, custom lists or identifiers, then click OK.
Paying bonuses and commissions If you are processing pays for bonuses or commissions outside your normal pay period, select the Bonus/Commission pay frequency. When you select this frequency, standard pay details will not be included in processing. Also note that you need to manually calculate and enter tax for these amounts.
NOTE :

4

In the Payment date field, enter the date on which you are processing the pays. In the Pay period start field, enter the start date of the pay period. In the Pay period end field, enter the last date of the pay period. If you use timesheets, continue with ‘Task 2: [Optional] Include employee timesheets’ on page 118. If you do not use timesheets, click Next and continue with ‘Task 3: Select and edit employee pays’ on page 118.

5 6 7

8

If you are processing a pay for an individual employee, click Process individual employee and select the employee in the adjacent field. The pay frequency assigned to the employee’s card is used in the pay run.

PROCESSING YOUR PAYROLL

1 1 7

Task 2: [Optional] Include employee timesheets
If you record employee hours on timesheets, the Pay Period window lists employee timesheets for the specified pay period. Initially, all timesheets are selected to be included in the pay period. Note that this option is only available if you have selected the timesheets preference. See ‘Timesheets’ on page 114.

Task 3: Select and edit employee pays
The Employee Pays window displays the standard pay details and timesheet amounts (if applicable) for employees who are paid according to the selected pay frequency.

1

To change, view or exclude a timesheet:
If you want to...
Exclude a timesheet Change the timesheet details of an employee View the details of unprocessed timesheets

You need to....
1

click in the select column ( in the list.

) to deselect it
2

If you want to exclude an employee from the pay run, click in the select column ( ) to deselect them in the list. If you want to view the pay details for all employees before you record their pays, click Preview Pay Details. The Payroll Verification report appears. If you need to change the pay details for an employee, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the employee’s name. In the Pay Employee window that appears, you can: change the hours worked (see page 119) record annual leave and personal leave pay (see page 119) record any other types of pay (see page 120) assign job numbers to payroll category amounts (see page 120) change the employee’s bank account details (see page 121).

click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the employee’s name and make the required changes in the Enter Timesheets window. click Display Unprocessed Timesheets.

3

2

When you have finished, click Next to continue. The Employee Pays window appears.

118

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

To change hours worked for an hourly employee
You may need to change the standard hours worked by an employee if they are not being paid for a full standard pay period, for instance, if they have only worked a portion of their usual hours.
NOTE : Editing hours If you edit an employee’s hours in the Pay Employee window, any adjustments you make will not update hours entered on timesheets, timesheet reports or, if you record time‐billing activities, activity slips.

To record annual leave and personal leave pay
NOTE : Annual leave and personal leave pay hours recorded on a timesheet If you’ve entered annual leave and personal leave hours on a timesheet, you don’t need to follow this procedure.

1

In the Employee Pays window, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the employee’s name. The Pay Employee window appears.

1

In the Employee Pays window, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the employee’s name. The Pay Employee window appears.

2

2

Change the hours worked for the applicable wage categories and press TAB. The payroll category amounts are calculated automatically and displayed in the Amount column. Click OK. The Employee Pays window reappears. Repeat from step 1 above for each employee whose hours you want to change.

Type the number of personal leave or annual leave hours in the Hours column for the appropriate wage category and press TAB. If you have set up this wage category to automatically adjust the employee’s base pay details, the amount for this wage category is calculated and the Base Hourly (or Base Salary) wage category amounts are adjusted.
NOTE : Automatically adjusting Base Hourly or Base Salary amounts Before base pay details can be automatically adjusted, you need to select the Automatically Adjust Base Hourly or Base Salary Details option in the Wages Information window for the annual leave or personal leave payroll category you are entering. For more information, see ‘To create a wage category’ on page 102.

3 4

PROCESSING YOUR PAYROLL

1 1 9

If you have not set up this wage category to automatically adjust the employee’s base pay details, reduce the number of hours allocated to the Base Hourly wage category or the amount allocated to the Base Salary wage category by the amount entered for the annual leave or personal leave payroll category.
3

To assign jobs to payroll category amounts
Job numbers can be assigned to payroll category amounts to track the wage expense of work performed. You can assign one or more jobs to each payroll category.
1

If you want to record the details of the leave taken, click the zoom arrow next to the leave category and enter the details in the Leave Tracking Information window that appears. Click OK. The Employee Pays window reappears.
NOTE : Automatic adjustment to entitlement‐hours balance When you record the transaction, the hours you entered will be subtracted from the number of entitlement hours the employee has accrued.

In the Employee Pays window, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the employee’s name. The Pay Employee window appears.

4

To record other types of pay
NOTE : Other types of pay recorded on a timesheet If you’ve entered other types of pay—such as sales commission and bonuses—on a timesheet, you don’t need to use this procedure.

Before you enter these details, the wage categories you intend to use should already be assigned to the employee. For information on assigning a wage category to an employee, see ‘Entering employee payroll information’ on page 110.
1

2

Type or select the job number in the Job column corresponding to the payroll category. If you want to assign multiple jobs to a payroll category: a Click in the Job column corresponding to the appropriate payroll category and then click the search icon ( ). The Allocate Jobs window appears.

3

In the Employee Pays window, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the employee’s name. The Pay Employee window appears. In the Hours or Amount fields next to each appropriate wage category, type the hours or amounts you want to record.

2

3

Click OK. The Employee Pays window reappears.

120

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

b Click in the select column (

) next to each applicable job and type the amount in the Amount column.

Task 4: Record employee pays
1

In the Employee Pays window, click Record to record the pays.
NOTE : Changing the details of a recorded pay If you need to change a recorded pay, continue processing your payroll. When you have finished processing, reverse or delete the incorrect transaction and then process a new pay for the individual employee. For more information on reversing or deleting a transaction, see ‘Changing or deleting a transaction’ on page 177.

2 3

In the confirmation window that appears, click OK. When the pays are recorded, the Process Payments window appears.

c Click OK. The Pay Employee window reappears.
4

Click OK. The Employee Pays window reappears.

You can also assign a default job to an employee in the Standard Pay section of the employee’s card. For more information, see ‘Entering employee payroll information’ on page 110.

To change an employee’s bank account details
If you pay your employees electronically, you can change an employee’s bank account details for this pay run.
1

In the Employee Pays window, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the employee’s name. The Pay Employee window appears. Click Banking Details and enter the required bank details in the Banking Details window that appears. Click OK. A confirmation message appears: a If you want to update the employee’s bank details for all subsequent pay runs, click Yes. b If the change to bank details is for this pay only, click No. Click OK. The Employee Pays window reappears.

2

3

4

PROCESSING YOUR PAYROLL

1 2 1

Task 5: Process payments
In the Process Payments window, you can: print employee paycheques (see below) process electronic payments (see below) record a bank withdrawal for the cash pays (see page 123). If you want, you can perform these tasks later using the relevant command centre function. For example, if you want to include weekly and monthly payments in one electronic payment file, process both pay frequencies and then click Prepare Electronic Payments in the Payroll command centre to prepare the combined payment file.
7 6 5

information, see ‘Customising how you send form batches’ on page 198. Click in the select column ( printed. ) next to the paycheques to be ) to view more information

If you want, click the zoom arrow ( about a particular pay. Click Print.

To process an electronic payment
1

Click Prepare Electronic Payments. The Prepare Electronic Payments window appears.

To print paycheques
1

Click Print Paycheques. The Review Cheques Before Printing window appears.

2

In the Pay From Account field, select the bank account from which you make electronic payments. Select Pay Employees from the Select Payment By list, if it is not already selected. In the Bank Processing Date field, type the date you want the bank to process the pays. Unprocessed pays up to and including this date appear. [Optional] Record the purpose of the transaction in the Journal Memo field. Click in the select column ( ) next to the payments you want to include in the electronic payment.

3 2

If you use customised forms that have pre‐printed cheque numbers, type the first cheque in the Number of First Cheque in Printer field. Type how many copies you want to print in the Print [...] Copies of Each Selected Cheque field. If you want to filter the employee list or change the customised form it will be printed on, click Advanced Filters. For more

4

3

5

4

6

122

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

7

Click Bank File. A message appears stating that the transaction will be recorded before the bank file is created. Click OK. The Save As window appears.
NOTE : Preparing multiple electronic payment files When you save the electronic payment file, it is given a default name and is formatted as an .ABA file. If you prepare multiple electronic payment files, you should rename each file (keeping the .ABA file extension), so that you do not overwrite an unprocessed file.

Task 6: Print or email pay slips
You can provide employees with details of their pay by printing or emailing pay slips. You can print or email pay slips from the Pay Slips window. To access this window, click Next in the Process Payments window.
NOTE : If you pay employees by cheque If you pay employees by cheque, and you printed a paycheque in ‘Task 5: Process payments’ on page 122, the pay details for these employees are already included on their paycheque. You do not need to do this step.

8

9

Choose where you want to save the electronic payment file and click Save. The Prepare Electronic Payments window reappears. Click Cancel. The Process Payments window reappears.

10

To print pay slips
1

To create a Spend Money transaction to record cash wages
1

Click Print or Email Pay Slips. The Review Pay Slips Before Delivery window appears.

Click Spend Money. The Spend Money window appears with the details of total cash wages paid and the default clearing account you use for cash wages.

2 3

Click the To Be Printed tab. Type the number of pay slips you want to print per employee in the Print field. If you want to filter the list of employees or change the type of form it will be printed on, click Advanced Filters. For more information, see ‘Customising how you send form batches’ on page 198.

4 2

In the Pay from Account field, select the bank account from which you withdrew the cash wage amount. Click Record. The Process Payments window reappears.

3

PROCESSING YOUR PAYROLL

1 2 3

5

Click in the select column ( printing pay slips for. Click Print.

) next to the employees you are

4

Click in the select column ( ) next to the employees you to whom you want to email pay slips. If you want to change an employee’s email address, select the employee’s name and type a different address in the Email Address field. Type the subject title and message of the email or accept the default subject and message. If you want to change the default message, click Email Defaults and make the changes as appropriate. Click Send Email. If you have finished processing the pays, click Finish to close the Process Payroll Assistant.

6 7

5

If you have finished processing the pays, click Finish to close the Process Payroll Assistant.
6

To email pay slips
1

Click Print or Email Pay Slips. The Review Pay Slips Before Delivery window appears. Click the To Be Emailed tab. If you want to filter the list of employees or change the type of form that will be sent, click Advanced Filters. For more information, see ‘Customising how you send form batches’ on page 198.

7 8

2 3

Payroll liabilities
A payroll liability is an amount withheld from an employee’s pay that must be paid to an appropriate authority or agency, for example, deductions, expenses, superannuation payments and taxes. Your payroll liabilities are recorded when you process your payroll. When you need to pay these amounts, you can use the Pay Liabilities window. BASlink and PAYG withholding If you use BASlink to record PAYG withholding payments, you may not need to use the Pay Liabilities window. Press F1 in the Pay Liabilities window for more information about whether you should use this method to pay PAYG withholding amounts. For more information about setting up BASlink, see ‘Lodge your activity statement (BAS or IAS)’ on page 247.

124

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

To pay your payroll liabilities
1

4

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Pay Liabilities. The Pay Liabilities window appears.

Select the type of liability you are paying from the Liability Type list.

By default, all payroll categories for the selected liability type are included in the payment.
5

If you do not want to include all payroll categories: a Click the search icon ( ) in the Payroll Categories field. The Select from list window appears. b Deselect categories by clicking in the select column next to each payroll category you want to exclude. c Click OK. The Pay Liabilities window reappears. In the Dated From and the Dated To fields, enter the period in which the payroll liabilities were withheld. The payroll liabilities withheld during the specified period appear in the Payroll Category section.

6

2

In the Pay from Account field, type or select the account you are making the payment from. In the Supplier field, select the card for the authority or agency to whom the withheld amount is being paid.

7

Click in the select column next to the payroll liability amounts you want to include with this payment. The total of the selected payroll liabilities appears in the Total Payment fields.

3

8

Click Record.

PAYROLL LIABILITIES

1 2 5

Superannuation reporting
Before you can calculate, report and pay superannuation amounts for employees, you need to: create the superannuation payroll categories you need (see ‘Creating payroll categories’ on page 102) create superannuation funds for your employees (see below) record employee superannuation information (see ‘Entering employee payroll information’ on page 110).
NOTE : Choice of superannuation fund To meet your choice of superannuation fund obligations, you need to provide eligible employees with a Standard Choice Form and then make contributions to their nominated complying fund. You can print the Standard Choice Form from an employee’s card (see ‘Entering employee payroll information’ on page 110). For more information about your obligations, contact the ATO.

2

Click New. The Edit Superannuation Fund window appears. Type the name of the superannuation fund in the Superannuation Fund Name field and press TAB.

When you have processed pays for your employees, you can manage your superannuation obligations by viewing superannuation reports and by recording superannuation payments in the Pay Liabilities window. For information on recording superannuation payments, see ‘Reviewing payroll liabilities’ on page 135.

3

To create a superannuation fund
1

Go to the Lists menu and choose Superannuation Funds. The Superannuation Fund List window appears.

4

If you have the superannuation fund’s membership number, type this number in the Employer Membership No. field. This is a unique employer identification number provided by some superannuation funds when you register an employee or group of employees.

126

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

5

Type the contact details for the fund in the Contact Phone Number and Fund Website fields. Click OK. The superannuation fund now appears in the Superannuation Fund List window. Repeat from step 2 for each additional superannuation fund you need to create. Click Close.

Troubleshooting superannuation calculations
The calculation of superannuation can be affected by the following: exclusions and threshold amounts entered in the superannuation payroll category setup. See ‘To check the superannuation exclusions and threshold amounts’ below manual changes to the employee’s superannuation or gross wages amounts in the Pay History section of the employee’s card. For more information on the Pay History section, see ‘Viewing pay history for the current year’ on page 133.

6

7

8

Reportable Employer Super Contributions (RESC)
The ATO requires that some superannuation contributions that exceed the superannuation guarantee amount of 9% (for example, salary sacrifice and some salary packaged amounts), be reported on payment summaries. These reportable contributions need be set up as separate superannuation payroll categories, so that they are easily reported when preparing payment summaries and the electronic EMPDUPE file you send to the ATO. For more information about how to create and edit payroll categories, see: ‘Creating payroll categories’ on page 102 ‘Editing payroll categories’ on page 109. When you prepare payment summaries, you need to select the superannuation payroll categories that are reportable. For more information about preparing payment summaries, see ‘Prepare payment summaries’ on page 252. For detailed information about Reportable Employer Super Contributions, contact the ATO or your accountant.

To check the superannuation exclusions and threshold amounts
1

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Payroll Categories. The Payroll Category List window appears. Click the Superannuation tab. Select the superannuation payroll category that has been assigned the Superannuation Guarantee (expense) contribution type. Click Edit. The Superannuation Information window appears. Check the amount entered in the Exclusions field.

2 3

4 5

The exclusions amount is the amount by which the eligible wage is reduced before the superannuation is calculated. For example, an employee with a gross wage of $1000 per month and an exclusion of $100 will have the superannuation calculated only on the amount of $900. Change the exclusions amount if the incorrect amount has been entered.

SUPERANNUATION REPORTING

1 2 7

6

Check the amount entered in the Threshold field at the bottom of the window.

superannuation will be calculated because the employee has earned less than the minimum threshold for the month. For the second pay of the month superannuation is calculated because the employee is paid $400, which brings the total gross amount paid for that month to $800 (that is, $350 more than the threshold). Superannuation is calculated on $800. Change the threshold amount if the incorrect amount has been entered.
7

The threshold amount determines whether superannuation should be calculated for a particular pay. For example, if the threshold is $450.00 and the employee is paid $400.00 gross per week. For the first pay of the month no

Click OK, then click Close to return to the Payroll command centre.

Payroll tax reporting
If you are liable to pay state or territory payroll tax, you can calculate your payroll tax amounts using the payroll information in your company file. If you are unsure about whether you are liable to pay state or territory payroll tax, contact your state or territory revenue office. Before you can report payroll tax, you need to set up your payroll tax details. After you process pays for your employees, you can run a report to display the payroll tax due for a period. Note that you can only set up payroll tax for one state or territory. For more information about calculating your payroll tax liability, see ‘Report and pay payroll tax’ on page 244.
2

Click Set Up Payroll Tax. The Payroll Tax Information window appears.

To set up state or territory payroll tax details
1

Go to the Setup menu and choose General Payroll Information. The General Payroll Information window appears.
3 4

Select your state or territory. Enter your Payroll Tax Registration Number and Payroll Tax Group Number.

128

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

5

Enter the threshold details and Payroll Tax rate for your selected state or territory. In the list at the bottom of the window, select the Payroll Categories to be included as taxable wages. Amounts recorded against these categories will be included in payroll tax calculations.

6

NOTE : If you are unsure about taxable wage calculations If you are unsure which payroll categories should be included as taxable wages, contact your state or territory revenue office.

7

After you have entered your payroll details, click OK.

Processing termination payments
Before you process a termination payment (ETP) for an employee, you need to calculate any termination amounts you owe the employee—for example, accrued annual leave amounts—in addition to processing their final standard pay.
NOTE : Before you begin Check the relevant award or employment contract for exact details of what needs to be paid to the employee on termination.

Task 1: Process the final standard pay
Process the employee’s standard pay for the current pay period. Note, this may not be for a complete pay period, so you may need to adjust their hours or salary and the tax withheld. For more information on processing pays, see ‘Processing your payroll’ on page 116.

Do the following tasks to process a termination payment.
Task
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Process the final standard pay Determine any outstanding entitlements Create payroll categories for termination payments Exclude termination payroll categories from superannuation calculation Record the final termination pay Enter termination details Prepare ETP summary

Task 2: Determine any outstanding entitlements
See
below below page 130 page 131
4 2 1

Go to the Reports menu and select Index to Reports. The Index to Reports window appears. Click the Payroll tab, click the Entitlements category and select the Balance Detail report. In the Date fields, enter a date range that includes the final pay date for the employee. Click Display. The report appears. In the Filters tab, type or select the employee’s name in the Employees field. The report display changes to show only the selected employee entitlements. The Available Hours column shows the total entitlement hours outstanding for each entitlement category. The total recorded in the card is displayed, as well as the pay run balance. These amounts should match, and the Difference field should show 0.00.

3

page 132 page 132 page 132

5

PROCESSING TERMINATION PAYMENTS

1 2 9

Creating payroll categories for Lump Sum Payment A payments
If the difference field does not show 0.00 If an amount appears in the Difference field, this means an amount has been entered in the pay history of the employee card for the entitlement. You will need to work out if the amount was entered in error, or if the amount should have been included in a previous pay run. You will then need to correct the error before processing the termination pay.
NOTE :

6

Print or save the report for your records.

When reporting Lump Sum Payment A amounts on payment summaries, you also need to report the reason for the employee's termination as part of reporting this amount. Terminations can be one of two types, redundancy or termination. A redundancy type includes bona fide redundancy, approved early retirement or invalidity payments. A termination type includes all other termination reasons (such as resignation). To report the termination payment type, you need to create a termination payroll category for each amount that will be included as part of a Lump Sum Payment A amount. When creating a category, give it a name that identifies the payment type. For example, if you need to create a wage category for unused annual leave pay for a bona fide redundancy payment, use a name such as ‘Unused Annual Leave Pay (R)’, where (R) indicates a redundancy type. Later, when you prepare the payment summary, you need to link each Lump Sum Payment A payroll category to a relevant Lump Sum Payment A field (redundancy or termination) in the Payment Summary Fields step of the Payment Summary Assistant.

Task 3: Create payroll categories for termination payments
Termination payments are normally taxed at different rates and may not accrue superannuation. Also, different types of payments are reported separately on ETP payment summaries. You may need to create several new payroll categories as part of your ETP preparations in order to report payments correctly.
NOTE : Calculations required to make employment termination payments Consult your accountant or visit the ATO at ato.gov.au/businesses for advice on how to calculate ETP and bona fide redundancy payments.

To create a termination payroll category
1

If the employee whose services you are terminating is entitled to a redundancy payment, you may need to pay an employment termination payment (ETP) and a bona fide redundancy payment. You will need to set up payroll categories for these payments, such as ETP and ETP tax. If the employee whose services you are terminating has unused annual leave, you will need to create a wage category for unused annual leave pay if one does not already exist.

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Payroll Categories. The Payroll Category List window appears. Click the Wages tab. Click New. The Wages Information window appears. Type the name of the wage category in the Wages Name field.
TIP : Lump Sum Payment amounts If you are creating a payroll category to record a Lump Sum Payment amount, give the payroll category a name that clearly identifies the payment type, such as ‘Lump Sum Payment A’. For more information, see ‘Creating payroll categories for Lump Sum Payment A payments’ above.

2 3 4

130

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

5

Choose the type of wages—Salary or Hourly—according to the type of payment: Hourly for unused annual leave amounts, Salary for ETP amounts, etc.

e Click OK and then OK again. The Payroll Category List window
6 7

Click Employee. The Linked Employees window appears. In the select column ( leaving. ), click next to the employee who is
10

reappears. Repeat from step 2 above for each required termination payroll category.

8

Click OK and then OK again. The Payroll Category List window reappears with the new payroll category in the list. If you are creating a payroll category to pay an entitlement balance (such as unused annual leave), and the payroll category used to accrue the entitlement is set up to calculate leave based on a percentage of gross hours, you need to exclude the new payroll category from the entitlement accrual calculation. a Click the Entitlements tab. The list of entitlement payroll categories appears. b Select the payroll category used to calculate the accrual, for example, Annual Leave Entitlement, and click Edit. The Entitlements Information window appears. c Click Exempt. The Entitlements Exemptions window appears. d In the select column ( ), deselect the payroll category to exclude this payroll category from being included in the entitlement accrual calculation.

9

Task 4: Exclude termination payroll categories from superannuation calculation
1

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Payroll Categories. The Payroll Category List window appears. Click the Superannuation tab and select a superannuation payroll category that is linked to the employee’s pay. Click Edit. The Superannuation Information window appears. Click Exempt. The Superannuation Exemptions window appears. Click in the select column ( ) next to the termination payroll categories you want to exclude from the superannuation calculation. Repeat from step 2 above for each required termination payroll category. Click OK to return to the Superannuation Information window.

2

3 4 5

6

7

PROCESSING TERMINATION PAYMENTS

1 3 1

Task 5: Record the final termination pay
1

2 3

Click the Payroll Details tab. Type the date of termination in the Termination Date field and press TAB. A message appears warning you that all entitlement balances will be cleared for the employee. Click OK. A zoom arrow appears next to the Termination Date field. Click the zoom arrow. The Termination Details window appears.

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Process Payroll. The Process Payroll Assistant opens. In the Pay Period section, click Process individual employee and type or select the employee you want to process in the adjacent field. Click Next. The Employee Pays window appears. Click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the employee’s name. The Pay Employee window appears. If you are including unused entitlements (as calculated in ‘Determine any outstanding entitlements’ on page 129), type the total outstanding entitlement hours in the Hours column for each required wage category. If you are including a redundancy payment, include the ETP, ETP tax or bona fide redundancy payments in the Amount column for each required payroll category. Consult your accountant for advice on how to calculate these payments. Your accountant will also tell you how much extra tax should be withheld. You will need to manually include this extra tax.
CAUTION : Tax on gross wages Gross wages are taxed as if they were all earned in that pay period. If the pay includes termination items, the tax calculated may be incorrect and may need adjusting.

4

2

5

3 4

5

6

6 7

Complete the termination details and click OK. Click OK to close the employee card.

Task 7: Prepare ETP summary
At the end of the payroll year, you will need to process payment summaries for any ETPs that occurred that payroll year. For more information, see ‘Prepare payment summaries’ on page 252. After you have prepared the ETP Payment Summary, you might also want to make the employee card inactive, so that it no longer appears in selection lists. To do this, select the Inactive Card option in the Profile tab of the card.

7 8 9

Click OK. The Employee Pays window reappears. Click Record to record the termination pay. Complete the remaining tasks in the Process Payroll Assistant.

Task 6: Enter termination details
Once you have finalised the employee’s termination pay, including leave entitlements and redundancy payments, you need to enter details of their termination in their employee card.
1

Open the card for the employee who is being terminated and click Edit. The Card Information window appears.

132

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

Reviewing payroll information
The following tools can help you manage your payroll.
Tool
Pay history Payroll reports for previous financial years Entitlement balance Review payroll liabilities Find Transactions window View an employee’s pay history in their employee card. Run reports containing prior year payroll details. View an employee’s entitlement balance in their employee card. Use payroll liability reports to view payroll details. Use the Find Transactions window to search for an account, card or payroll category.

To view an employee’s pay history
See
below page 134
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click the Employee tab and select the employee whose pay history you want to view. Click Edit. The Card Information window appears. Click the Payroll Details tab. Click Pay History. The Pay History section displays the totals of each payroll category for the specified month, quarter, or year to date.

2

3 4

page 134 page 135 page 174

5

Viewing pay history for the current year
Every time you process an employee’s pay, the amounts from that payment are recorded in the employee’s pay history. The Pay History section of an employee’s card is used to enter the employee’s pay history when you are setting up payroll and, later, to review their pay history. If you’ve paid an employee the wrong amount, don’t attempt to correct it by adjusting their pay history. Altering an employee’s pay history does not affect the original pay record or the amounts posted to the accounts. Instead, make adjusting entries on the employee’s next pay. Changing an employee’s pay history on their employee card can also affect the calculation of payroll liabilities, such as superannuation.
6

Select a pay history period from the Show Pay History for list.

REVIEWING PAYROLL INFORMATION

1 3 3

Viewing pay history for previous years
The following reports can be used to view prior year payroll details. You can find these reports in the Payroll tab of the Index to Reports window. Employees—Register Summary Employees—Register Detail Superannuation—Accrual by Category Superannuation—Accrual by Fund Summary Superannuation—Accrual by Fund Detail Superannuation—Employee Advice Summary Superannuation—EmployeeAdvice Detail Payroll Categories—Payroll Summary Entitlements—Balance Summary Entitlements—Balance Detail Note that you can only view historical details in these reports for the financial years you have selected to keep paycheques from.

To view an employee’s entitlement balances
NOTE : Only carry‐over balances can be edited You can only edit the employee’s carry‐over entitlement balances in this window. If you need to edit the employee’s entitlement balance for the current payroll year, adjust the entitlement accrual when processing the employee’s pay in the Process Payroll Assistant.

1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click the Employee tab and select the employee. Click Edit. The Card Information window appears. Click the Payroll Details tab. Click Entitlements. The Entitlements section displays the total number of hours an employee is entitled to take as personal leave and annual leave.

2

3 4

Viewing an employee’s entitlement balances
The Entitlement section in the Payroll Details tab of an employee’s card displays the entitlement amounts that have been carried over from the previous payroll year, the entitlement amounts for the year to date, and the total entitlement amounts owing to the employee. For example, an employee may have 40 hours of accrued annual leave carried over from the last payroll year. In the current financial year, the employee has accrued another 10 hours, but has taken 8 hours of annual leave. Therefore, 2 hours will be displayed in the Year‐to‐Date column and the Total column will display 42 hours.

5

If you want to, type the entitlement hours carried over from a previous period in the Carry Over column next to the entitlement category. Click OK, then click Close to return to the Card File command centre.

6

134

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

Reviewing payroll liabilities
Payroll liability reports show which payroll liability amounts have been withheld from employee payments, and which amounts have been paid, for any given period. You can view these payroll report categories: Payroll Liabilities reports—lists amounts that have been withheld for all or selected liability types. Superannuation reports—details superannuation contributions that have been withheld for all or selected payroll categories. Superannuation Payments reports—displays contribution amounts that have been paid to super funds.

To view these reports
1

Go to the Reports menu and choose Index to Reports. The Index to Reports window appears. Click the Payroll tab and select any of the above report categories.

2

For information about displaying, customising and printing reports, see ‘Customising reports’ on page 187.

REVIEWING PAYROLL INFORMATION

1 3 5

136

C H AP T E R 7

P A Y I N G Y O U R E M P L O Y E E S

8 Billing for time
Time billing is only available in AccountRight Plus The time billing feature allows you to track the time spent by employees and suppliers in completing work for clients and customers. You can also track incidentals (such as items used) to complete the work.

Overview
Time billing is suitable for businesses that predominantly sell time (such as accountants and lawyers) and businesses that sell both time and items (such as interior designers and mechanics). You can specify billing rates based on the activity, such as consulting at $40 per hour and photocopying at 10 cents per copy. You can also specify billing rates based on an hourly charge‐out rate for a particular employee or customer. For example, the employee John Smith’s hourly consulting rate may be $60 per hour and subcontractor Acme Industries’ charge‐out rate may be $80 per hour. Similarly, the customer My Town Realty may be charged at a rate of $50 per hour because they are regular customers. An activity can be chargeable or non‐chargeable. The ability to track non‐chargeable activities can be useful if you want to record costs such as entertainment, which generally cannot be charged to the customer. Activities can be entered individually, or grouped together on activity slips. You can then generate time billing invoices, ready to send to your customers. Any items that you have sold to your customers can also be included with the activities in a single time billing invoice. You can also record the hours an employee works on an activity when you create an activity slip, and then include these hours in the employee’s pay. Time billing reports can be filtered to give you just the information you want. These reports monitor how you and your staff spend your time and whether it is spent profitably.

137

Setting time billing preferences
There are four preferences that should be set before you start.
Preference
Time billing units

Preference
Include items on time billing invoices

Description
If you selected the I Include Items on Time Billing Invoices preference, you can include both activities and items on your time billing invoice. Note that you can only include items for which you have selected the I Sell This Item option in the Item Information window. See ‘Creating items’ on page 149. This preference allows you to include time billing and activity slip information in an employee’s pay, and to create activity slips when you record employee hours using a timesheet.

Description
Set this preference if you want to bill units of time of less than an hour. Special time billing units allow you to track time in units of 1, 6, 10, 12, 15 or 30 minutes. The unit of time you specify here will be the default billing unit when you create hourly activity slips. For example, you can specify six‐minute time billing units, where an hour would be 10 billing units of time. This preference determines how you want elapsed time to be rounded. If you want to use the activity slip timer to calculate billable hours, set how units of time will be rounded. You can round the up to next, down to previous or to nearest. For example, if you have chosen up to next and are using 30‐minute billing units, 10 minutes would be rounded up to 30 minutes on an activity slip. As another example, if you have chosen to nearest and are using 30 minute billing units, 15 minutes would be rounded up to 30 minutes on an activity slip. If you are not using a special billing unit of time—that is, you are billing in hours—you can specify the rounding increment. For example, if you want to round the actual time you clock using the timer up to the next minute, choose up to next and type 1 in the Minute Increment field. That way, if you clock 21 minutes and 32 seconds of an activity, 22 minutes will be entered automatically in the Units field. Note that if you specify both a special time billing unit and a rounding rule, the Minute Increment field here is redundant and, as such, is not displayed.

Timesheets

Round timer‐calculated time

To set time billing preferences
1

Go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. The Preferences window appears. Click the System tab. The preferences that apply to time billing are the last four shown in the window.

2

3

Set the four preferences according to how you want to conduct time billing.

138

C H A P T E R 8

B I L L I N G F O R T I M E

Setting billing rates
You can set billing rates that will automatically appear when you create an activity slip. The billing rate can also be set for a customer, employee, supplier or for the activity itself. You can still override these rates when you create the activity slip. For example, for an activity such as the time spent photocopying, you might use a flat rate for all customers, in which case you would use the activity’s billing rate. For other activities, you might charge the customer according to the employee who performed the activity, the billing rate depending on factors such as the expertise and experience of the employee.

To set a billing rate for an activity
You can set up a billing rate for each activity. This will apply regardless of the customer you are billing, or the employee or supplier who performed the activity. The billing rate for an activity is set in the Activity Information window. See ‘Creating activities’ on page 140.

3

Click OK.

To set a billing rate for a supplier or employee
You can set a billing rate for a supplier or an employee. This option allows you to bill an activity at different rates, according to the employee or supplier performing the activity. You can also track the costs associated with having the activity performed. This is particularly useful if you are subcontracting work to a supplier.
1

To set a billing rate for a customer
You can set up billing rates for customers on their cards. This option is useful if you perform the same activities for multiple customers and want to charge each customer a different rate.
1

Display the Card Information window for the relevant customer and click the Selling Details tab. In the Customer Billing Rate field, type the hourly billing rate, excluding tax, for the customer.

2

Display the Card Information window of the supplier or employee. Then do the following: Supplier cards—click the Buying Details tab. Employee cards—click the Payroll Details tab and then click Time Billing.

SETTING BILLING RATES

1 3 9

2

In the Supplier Billing Rate field or the Employee Billing Rate field, type the hourly billing rate, excluding tax, for the supplier or employee.

3

In the Cost per Hour field, type the hourly cost to you of having the supplier or employee perform the activity. Click OK.

4

Creating activities
The term activity is used to describe a task or service provided by your business for which you can track costs and bill customers using time billing invoices. Activities are primarily defined by their type—hourly or non‐hourly—and whether they are chargeable or non‐chargeable.

To create an activity
1

Go to the Time Billing command centre and click Activities List. The Activities List window appears. Click New. The Activity Information window appears.

2

140

C H A P T E R 8

B I L L I N G F O R T I M E

3

In the Profile view, enter an ID for the activity in the Activity ID field and press TAB. In the Activity Name field, type a name for the activity. In the Description field, type a description of the activity. If you want the description of the activity (rather than the activity name) to appear on time billing invoices, select the Use Description on Sales option. Select the type of activity (Hourly or Non‐hourly), the status (Chargeable or Non‐Chargeable), and the billing rate (employee, customer or activity).
For this type
Hourly

8

In the Income Account field, enter the account you want to use to track the income you receive for this activity. In the Tax Code When Sold field, enter the tax code that you want to appear as the default when you create a sales invoice for this activity. The default unit of measurement for hourly activities is Hour. If you specified a special billing unit of time in the System view of the Preferences window, this field will still be displayed as Hour, but time will be billed according to the special billing unit.

4 5 6

9

7

10

Click OK. The new activity will now be listed in the Activities List window.

And this status
Chargeable

Do this...
Choose the billing rate you want to use. The rate is the price you charge for one unit of the activity. You can: • use the rate you set up on the employee or supplier card • use the rate you set up on the customer card • type a rate to apply to this activity only by entering a rate in the Activity Rate field. Go to step 10. Enter a unit of measurement in the Unit of Measurement field and an activity rate in the Activity Rate field. Type the unit of measurement in the Unit of Measurement field and then go to step 10.

To change, inactivate or delete an activity
To change details of an activity, see ‘Changing a record’ on page 168. To inactivate an activity, see ‘Inactivating or reactivating a record’ on page 168. To remove an activity from your records, see ‘Deleting a record’ on page 169.

Hourly Non‐hourly

Non‐Chargeable Chargeable

Non‐hourly

Non‐Chargeable

CREATING ACTIVITIES

1 4 1

Creating activity slips
Activity slips are used to record time‐based activities performed for a customer and form the basis for the invoices that you send that customer. You can invoice the full amount for the activity or invoice just part of the amount, leaving the balance for a later date. You can create an activity slip in three ways. Create a single activity slip. This allows you to enter the most detail about the activity slip. Create multiple activity slips. You can enter multiple activity slips at once, while not entering as much detail for each. Create a timesheet. You can enter the hours per day an employee spends to complete work for clients and customers, while automatically creating an activity slip. For more information, see ‘Timesheets’ on page 114. You can also create a timesheet entry by assigning an hourly payroll category to an activity slip.

3

In the Adjustment fields, you can enter any adjustments to the billable hours or the amount of the activity you want to bill, or both. You need to enter adjustment units or amounts as negative numbers if you want to reduce hours or an amount. In the Already Billed field, type any hours or amounts already billed. For example, if you have partially billed the customer on an invoice for this activity, either type the number of hours already billed (and the amount field will automatically update), or type the amount they have already been billed for. Your entry is subtracted from the hours and amounts in the Billable field. The units and amounts that you haven’t billed appear in the Left to Bill fields.
NOTE : Billing an activity slip ‘Billing’ an activity slip means recording a time billing invoice for the activity slip. If you enter units or an amount in the Already Billed fields of the Enter Activity Slip window, the amount won’t appear in the sales journal or in the activity’s history. It will only be recorded for the activity slip.

4

To create an activity slip
1

Go to the Time Billing command centre and click Enter Activity Slip. The Enter Activity Slip window appears. Enter details about the activity, such as employee name, customer name, activity slip ID number and the number of units to be charged.
NOTE : Units refers to time billing units The Units field shows time billing units as you have set them up in the System tab of the Preferences window. Therefore, one billable unit of 15 minutes will need to be entered as four billable units to make one hour.

2

142

C H A P T E R 8

B I L L I N G F O R T I M E

5

[Hourly activities only] If you pay the employee based on the activity performed: a Select the Include Hours on Timesheet option. b Then, enter an hourly wage payroll category in the Payroll Category field. The activity hours (units) recorded for this activity are assigned to this wage category on the employee’s timesheet.
NOTE : Activity hours are assigned to timesheets on the activity slip date When you record the activity slip, the activity hours are assigned to the employee’s timesheet on the date entered on the activity slip. If you want to record activity hours over a number of days or pay periods, you need to record the hours in the Enter Timesheets window (see ‘Timesheets’ on page 114).

NOTE : Entering a start time that is before the current system time If you enter a start time that is before the current system time, the difference will be added to the elapsed time measured by the timer. For example, if you entered 8:00 a.m. in the Start Time field and then clicked Start at 9:00 a.m., 1:00:00 will appear in the Elapsed Time field and the time calculated by the timer will be added to that amount.

Leave the Enter Activity Slip window open as you perform the activity.
5

6

Click Record. The activity slip is now recorded. If you entered a chargeable activity on the activity slip, the activity becomes available for billing in the Prepare Time Billing Invoice window.

When you have completed the activity or if you want to pause the timer, click Stop. The current system time appears in the Stop Time field. The number of billing units corresponding to the elapsed time appears automatically in the Units field. You can edit the start and stop times if you want. The entries in the Actual Units and Elapsed Time fields will be updated automatically. You can round your timer entries in the Units field automatically. See ‘Setting time billing preferences’ on page 138.

To create an activity slip using the timer
The Enter Activity Slip window has a timer that allows you to record the time you spend performing an activity. The timer appears only on activity slips for hourly activities. To use the timer, you must keep the Enter Activity Slip window open until the activity is complete. You can still use other software or access other windows during this time.
1

6

If you want to resume timing an activity, click Start again. The entry in the Stop Time field will be cleared. The timer will continue incrementing, starting from your current elapsed time. [Hourly activities only] If you pay the employee based on the activity performed: a Select the Include Hours on Timesheet option. b Enter an hourly wage payroll category in the Payroll Category field. The activity hours (units) recorded for this activity are assigned to this wage category on the employee’s timesheet.
NOTE : Activity hours are assigned to timesheets on the activity slip date When you record the activity slip, the activity hours are assigned to the employee’s timesheet on the date entered on the activity slip. If you want to record activity hours over a number of days

7

Go to the Time Billing command centre and click Enter Activity Slip. The Enter Activity Slip window appears. Enter the employee or supplier name, date and customer name. In the Activity field, type or select an hourly activity ID number. The timer fields appear at the bottom of the window. Click Start to start the timer. If you don’t enter a start time in the Start Time field, your computer’s current system time appears, and the timer starts incrementing the time in the Elapsed Time field.

2 3

4

CREATING ACTIVITY SLIPS

1 4 3

or pay periods, you need to record the hours in the Enter Timesheets window (see ‘Timesheets’ on page 114).
8

When you have completed the activity, click Record. If you entered a chargeable activity on the activity slip, the activity becomes available for billing in the Prepare Time Billing Invoice window.

NOTE : Adding activity hours to a timesheet In the Enter Multiple Activity Slips window, you can’t choose to include an activity’s hours on a timesheet.

To create multiple activity slips
1

To reset the timer
Click Clear at any time to clear the Elapsed Time, Start Time, Stop Time and Units fields.

Go to the Time Billing command centre and click Enter Activity Slip. The Enter Activity Slip window appears. Click Enter Multiple Slips. The Enter Multiple Activity Slips window appears. In the Employee or Supplier field, type or select the name of the employee (or supplier) performing the activity. Any activity slips you have already created for the employee or supplier are listed, with each line representing a single activity slip. On the first blank line, enter details of an activity. Press TAB or click in the next line to move the insertion point to the next line where you can enter another activity slip. Repeat from step 4 to step 5 for each activity slip you want to create. When you have entered the details of all the required activity slips, click Record to record the activity slips.

2

3

Creating multiple activity slips
In addition to being able to create single activity slips, you can also create multiple activity slips at once. In the Enter Multiple Activity Slips window, each line in the list represents one activity slip. Although this view limits the amount of detail you can enter on the activity slip, you can view any activity slip in the Activity Slip window and enter more detail at a later stage.
4 5

6

Changing and reviewing activity slips
If you want to review, edit or delete an activity slip, follow the relevant procedures below.
2

Enter the name of the employee or supplier who performed the activity and, if you know it, the date range within which the activity was recorded. All activities that match the criteria are listed. Click the Diary View tab and the Detail View tab to view different information about the activity slip. Select the activity slip you want to view and click Edit. The Enter Activity Slip window appears with details of the activity slip. Make any required changes and then click OK.

To review or edit an activity slip
1

3

Go to the Time Billing command centre and click Activity Log. The View Activity Log window appears.

4

5

144

C H A P T E R 8

B I L L I N G F O R T I M E

To delete an activity slip
Billed activity slips been billed.
NOTE :

2

You cannot delete an activity slip that has
3 4

Enter the name of the employee or supplier who performed the activity and, if you know it, the date range within which the activity was recorded. All activities that match the criteria are listed. Select the activity slip you want to delete. Go to the Edit menu and choose Delete Activity Slip.
NOTE : Deleting activity slip details in timesheets When you remove timesheet entries with activity slip details, the linked activity slip is also removed.

1

Go to the Time Billing command centre and click Activity Log. The View Activity Log window appears.

Creating time billing invoices
There are two ways you can create a time billing invoice: In the Prepare Time Billing Invoice window. This is the recommended method because the full details of activities and activity slips are recorded. See below. In the Sales window. Use this method if you don’t need to record details of activities and activity slips or track work in progress. See page 147.

To create a time billing invoice using the Prepare Time Billing Invoice window
The Prepare Time Billing Invoice window allows you to enter and adjust the billing information for activity slips. As you make changes in the Prepare Time Billing Invoice window, your activity slip records are updated automatically.
NOTE : Including items on time billing invoices If you charge your customers for both activities and items on a single invoice, you need to select the I Include Items on Time Billing Invoices option in the Preferences window. See ‘Setting time billing preferences’ on page 138.

1

Go to the Time Billing command centre and click Prepare Time Billing Invoice. The Time Billing Customers window appears. Find and select the customer for whom you want to create a time billing invoice and then click OK. The Prepare Time Billing Invoice window appears, listing all the open activity slips for the selected customer.

2

CREATING TIME BILLING INVOICES

1 4 5

[optional] the job number in the Job field the appropriate tax code in the Tax field.
A

You can edit any information you require.
B C
NOTE : Entering items on this invoice If you have selected the I Include Items on Time Billing Invoices option in the Preferences window, you can also enter items on this invoice. See ‘Setting time billing preferences’ on page 138.

D

A Filters B Bill

Use these filters to find the required activity slips. If necessary, override the amount or number of hours you want to bill for each activity slip here. Any activity slip with 0.00 units or $0.00 in the Left to Bill column is considered billed in full. Enter any adjustments you want to make in this column. Select the relevant option if you want to: • sort activity slips according to job number. • consolidate all activity slips with the same activity and job number on the invoice. • print the activity slip notes on the invoice.
5

C Adjustment D Print & sort options

If you want to group and subtotal the items and activities separately on the invoice, you can do so by inserting headers, blank lines and subtotals. For more information, see ‘Adding and deleting lines, headers and subtotals’ on page 66.

3

Click Prepare Invoice. The Sales ‐ New Time Billing window appears displaying the details of the time billing invoice. If you invoice for items, information is already entered for the following fields: the date in the Date field the quantity being sold in the Hrs/Units field the item number in the Activity field the price of the item in the Rate field

4

146

C H A P T E R 8

B I L L I N G F O R T I M E

6

Enter additional information about the sale, such as the salesperson, referral source and invoice delivery status. Complete the invoice in any of the following ways. Record the invoice. Click Record to record the invoice without printing. Print and record the invoice. Click Print and then choose the form you want to use for this invoice. For more information about printing invoices, see ‘Sending forms’ on page 196. Save the invoice as a recurring sale. Click Save as Recurring. The Recurring Schedule Information window appears. Enter the necessary information about the sale and click OK. For more information about recurring transactions, see ‘Recurring transactions’ on page 179. Note that no activity slips are created when you use the recurring sale in the future. Also, recording the recurring sale will not update the activity slips you used to create the invoice in the Prepare Time Billing Invoice window.

5

7

For each billable activity, enter: the date the activity was performed in the Date field the number of units or hours being billed in the Hrs/Units field the activity name (press TAB to select it from the Activity list) the rate charged for a single unit or hour of the activity in the Rate field [Optional] the job number in the Job field the appropriate tax code in the Tax field. If you also invoice items, enter the following details for each item: the date in the Date field the quantity being sold in the Hrs/Units field the item number in the Activity field the price of the item in the Rate field [optional] the job number in the Job field the appropriate tax code in the Tax field. If you want to group and subtotal the items and activities separately on the invoice, you can do so by inserting headers, blank lines and subtotals. For more information, see ‘Adding and deleting lines, headers and subtotals’ on page 66.

6

7

To create a time billing invoice using the Sales window
Activities billed using this procedure will not appear in most time billing reports No activity slip records will be created if you use this method to create a time billing invoice. Most time billing reports are based on activity slip records, therefore, if you want to print time billing reports, you should create activity slips (see page 142) and then use the Prepare Time Billing Invoice window to create the invoice (see ‘To create a time billing invoice using the Prepare Time Billing Invoice window’ on page 145).
NOTE :

8

Enter additional information about the sale, such as the salesperson, referral source and invoice delivery status. Complete the invoice in any of the following ways:
TIP : Save the invoice as a recurring sale. Click Save as Recurring. The Recurring Schedule Information window appears. Enter the necessary information about the sale and click OK. For more information about recurring transactions, see ‘Recurring transactions’ on page 179. Note that no activity slips will be created when you use the recurring sale in the future.

9

1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Enter Sales. The Sales window appears. In the Customer field, type or select the customer you want to invoice. Click Layout. The Select Layout window appears. Click Time Billing to select the Time Billing layout and then click OK.

2

3 4

Record the invoice. Click Record to record the invoice without printing. Print and record the invoice. Click Print and select the form layout you want to use for this invoice. For more information about printing invoices, see ‘Sending forms’ on page 196.

CREATING TIME BILLING INVOICES

1 4 7

Work in progress
Work in progress is work that you have done for your clients but haven’t billed yet. Work in progress is indicated on activity slips by a value other than zero in the Left to Bill field. Your accounting records will only reflect a sales transaction when you bill the activities. However, some accountants consider that, from an accounting perspective, your clients owe you for your work in progress even if you haven’t yet billed your clients for it. If your work in progress routinely represents a significant amount of money, you should consider adjusting your accounting records to reflect this. Consult your accountant for advice on how to do this.

148

C H A P T E R 8

B I L L I N G F O R T I M E

9 Inventory
The inventory feature enables you to track the quantity and value of the items you buy, sell and build. You can also: compensate for inventory variations. For example, you may find that, from time to time, your recorded inventory levels differ from what is on the shelves. These variations can be caused by data‐entry errors, spoilage and theft, etc. revalue your inventory. Sometimes the quantity of items recorded may be correct, but their values are incorrect. For example, a range of items may become outdated. track the assembly of individual items into finished items. Many retailing and manufacturing businesses combine a number of inventory items to create finished items. For example, a retailer may combine a bottle of perfume, lotion and bath salts to make up a gift pack.

Creating items
Before you begin to track your inventory, you need to create a record for each item of inventory. An item can be: a physical unit that your company may buy, sell or inventory a service that your company wants to include on item invoices, for example, ‘On‐site service fee’, ’Handling’, ‘1‐hour consultation’ and so on.
4

will appear. This is useful for service‐type items (such as labour) for which you don’t want to print an item number on the invoice.

In the Name field, type the name of the new item.
TIP : Copy From To copy another item’s information to this item record, click Copy From and choose the item whose information you want to copy. All information for that item will be copied to the current item except the item number, name, supplier number, auto‐build information and history information.

To create an item
1

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Items List. The Items List window appears. Click New. The Item Information window appears. In the Item Number field, type a unique identifier and press TAB.
TIP : Use the backslash character for service items The backslash character (\) serves a special purpose: any item number that begins with a backslash won’t appear on printed forms—only the item name

5

2 3

Specify whether you buy, sell or inventory this item by selecting the relevant options.

149

As you select the options, account fields appear next to them. These fields change according to the combination of selections you make.
Select...
I Buy This Item

7

Click the Item Details tab and enter additional information about the item. If you buy this item, click the Buying Details tab and enter your buying details.
E

8

For...
Items or services you want to include on an item purchase order. This includes items that are not for resale, such as items for office use only. It can also include raw materials you use as components to build other inventory items. Items or services you want to include on an item invoice. Items you buy or sell and whose quantity and values you want to track. It can also include intermediate goods used in the productions process, such as parts used to manufacture finished goods. Maintaining an accurate record of on‐hand levels of these items requires you to do regular maintenance tasks. For example, you need to record inventory adjustments to write‐off damaged items or to record a stocktake.

I Sell This Item I Inventory This Item

A B C D

A

6

Enter the appropriate accounts in the fields that appeared during the previous step.
Account
Cost of Sales Account Income Account for Tracking Sales Asset Account for Item Inventory Expense Account for Tracking Costs

Description
Enter the account to use for tracking the costs of producing or purchasing this item. Enter the account to use for recording income from the sale of this item. Enter the account to use for recording the on‐hand value of this item. Enter the account to use for tracking the costs of purchasing this item. B

[Optional] Type the standard cost of the item. You can set this cost as the default price for purchases, instead of the last purchase price. You can change this cost on each purchase. To use the standard cost, go to the Preferences window, click the Inventory tab, and select the Use Standard Cost as the Default Price on Purchase Orders and Bills option. Type the unit of measure (such as ‘each’ or ‘unit’) in which you purchase the item. The buying unit is printed on the purchase order. For example, if you buy eggs by the carton unit, when you order five units in a purchase, you are ordering five cartons. If you track on‐hand quantities and values for this item, type the number of items that comprise a single buying unit. This is the number that is added to your on‐hand inventory for every buying unit. For example, if you buy eggs by the carton and track their purchase individually, enter 12 as the number of items per buying unit. When you buy one carton, your item inventory is updated by twelve items. If you leave this field blank, the value defaults to one.

C

150

C H A P T E R 9

INVENTORY

D

[Optional] Enter the restocking information: • Type the minimum level of this item you want to keep in your inventory. When the quantity drops below this level, a re‐order reminder appears in the To Do List. • Enter the supplier from whom you usually re‐order this item. • Type the supplier’s number for the item. • Enter a re‐order quantity for the item. Choose the tax code you want to use when you purchase this item. You can override the tax code when you record the purchase.
10

D E F

You can set pricing levels for different kinds of customers. See ‘Custom price levels’ on page 159. Select the tax code you want to use when you sell this item. You can override the tax code on invoices. If the prices on the Selling Details tab are tax inclusive, select the Prices are Tax Inclusive option. If the prices are exclusive of tax, deselect this option.

E

9

If you sell this item, click the Selling Details tab and enter your selling details.
11

If this is an item that you build using other components in your inventory, click the Auto‐Build tab and enter the required details. For more information, see ‘Auto‐building items’ on page 154. Click OK.

A B C

E F

Inventory opening balances If you have existing on‐hand quantities of inventory items, you need to record the opening inventory level for each item. For more information, see ‘Enter your inventory opening balances’ on page 43.

D

A B

Type the retail price of one selling unit. Type the selling unit of the item (such as ‘each’ or ‘unit’). You can type up to five characters. The selling unit can be printed on the item invoice. If, for example, you sell by the six‐pack, when you sell five units, you will be selling five six‐packs. If you track on‐hand quantities and values for this item, type the number of items that comprise a single unit in this field. This is the number that is subtracted from your on‐hand inventory for every selling unit. For example, if you sell by the six‐pack, enter 6 as the number of items per selling unit. When you sell one six‐pack, your item inventory is reduced by six items.

C

CREATING ITEMS

1 5 1

Making inventory adjustments
From time to time you may need to adjust item quantities and values. For example, if your inventory gets damaged, you may have to write off some of your inventory or revalue it. This section explains how to make an adjustment to a single item or a few items. If you need to update the quantities of several items, see ‘Recording stocktakes’ on page 155. For examples of common inventory adjustments, see ‘Examples of inventory adjustments’ below.
NOTE : Print the Items List Summary report When making inventory adjustments, you may find it useful to print the Items List Summary report. This report displays on‐hand quantities and values of your items.

B

Type the quantity by which you want to increase or decrease the quantity held. Only enter the quantity variation. Type the quantity in inventory units, not buying or selling units. If you enter a positive number, that number is added to your on‐hand inventory. If you enter a negative number, that number is subtracted from your on‐hand inventory. The unit cost of the item appears by default. The unit cost is calculated as the total cost of the item divided by the number of units on hand. If these are new items, enter their purchase cost. The Amount field displays the quantity multiplied by the unit cost. If you change it, the unit cost is recalculated automatically. Enter the account you want to assign the adjustment amount to. If you’re reducing the inventory value, this account is usually a cost of sales or expense account. Select whether you want this adjustment to be allocated as an end‐of‐year adjustment. End‐of‐year adjustments can be excluded from your financial reports.

C

D E

To make an inventory adjustment
1

F

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Adjust Inventory. The Adjust Inventory window appears. Enter details of the adjustment.
3 F

2

Click Record to save the inventory adjustment.

Examples of inventory adjustments
The following are some examples of inventory adjustments. Example 1a This inventory adjustment increases the number of items on hand by two and the total value of the items on hand by $700.

A

B

C

D

E

A

Select the item you want to adjust.

152

C H A P T E R 9

INVENTORY

Example 1b This inventory adjustment increases the number of items on hand by two but does not change the total value of the items. The average cost of the items will decrease as result of this adjustment.

Example 2 This inventory adjustment increases the total value of the items on hand by $120 but does not change the number of items on hand. The average cost of the items will increase as a result of this adjustment.

Building items
Building items is the process of making a finished item by transferring quantities and values from the component items (such as raw materials) to the finished item. For example, you could build an item of furniture (the finished item) by transferring the required quantities and value of timber and fabric (component items) to that furniture item. You can build items in two ways: manually, for a one‐off build. See below. automatically, for an item you build repeatedly. See ‘Auto‐building items’ on page 154. Before you can build a finished item, you need to have created an item record for each component and the finished item. See ‘Creating items’, on page 149.
3

Type the number of finished items you want to make in the Quantity field. In the Item Number field of the next row, select a component you are using to make the finished item. Type the number of units used as a negative number in the Quantity column.

4

5

To build items manually
1

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Build Items. The Build Items window appears. In the Item Number field of the first row, select the finished item you want to make.

2

6

Repeat step 4 and step 5 above for all other components used.

BUILDING ITEMS

1 5 3

7

If required, edit the unit cost of the finished item and of each component included in the build. The value in the Out of Balance field must be zero before you can record the transaction. That is, the value of the finished items in the Amount column must be equal to the sum of the component values.

c Repeat from step a for each component required to build the

new finished item.

8

Click Record to save the inventory transfer. The built item is added to your on‐hand inventory and the component items are subtracted from your on‐hand inventory.

Auto-building items
For items that you build often, you can use the Auto‐Build function to automatically build the finished items. Before you can build a finished item using the Auto‐Build function, you need to define what items are needed to build the item.
7

When you have entered all the components, click OK.

To define an Auto-Build item
1

To auto-build an item
TIP : Auto‐build from the To Do List You can also auto‐build items using the To Do List. In the Stock Alert view of the To Do List, select the items you want to build and click Order/Build.

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Items List. The Items List window appears. Click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the item you want to build. The Item Information window appears. Click the Auto‐Build tab. In the Minimum Level for Restocking Alert field, enter the minimum level of the item you want to have in inventory. In the List what it takes to build field, type the number of finished item units you can make with the component quantities you will specify in the list. Enter the details of each of the components required to build the item. a In the Item Number column, select a component that’s required to build the new finished item. b In the Quantity column, type the number of component items required to build the specified quantity of the finished item.

2

3 4

1

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Auto‐Build Items. The Auto‐Build Items window displays all items that you have designated as finished items. In the Quantity to Build column, type the quantity of finished items you want to build. (Click None if you want to change all numbers in this column to zero.)

2

5

6

154

C H A P T E R 9

INVENTORY

3

Click Build Items. The Build Items window displays the details of the transfer that will occur when the finished item is built.

4

Review the entries in this window to make sure that the quantities, unit costs and total inventory values are correct. Note that the quantities of the components in the list appear as negative numbers, while the quantities of the finished items in the list are shown as positive numbers. Click Record to save the build item transaction and update your inventory quantities and values.

5

Recording stocktakes
You can use the Count Inventory window to adjust item quantities and to record the results of your regular inventory counts. The value of any inventory adjustment must be allocated to an account so that your records accurately reflect the reasons for the adjustment. For example, you can use an expense account called ‘Shrinkage and Spoilage’ to track loss or theft of items.
2

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Count Inventory. The Count Inventory window appears. In the Counted column, type the actual quantities of the items. Any discrepancy between the counted quantity and the on‐hand quantity appears in the Difference column. Click Adjust Inventory. If there are differences between on‐hand and counted values, the Adjustment Information window appears. In this window you can select an expense account, (for example, ‘Shrinkage and Spoilage’) to which all necessary inventory adjustments will be allocated. It should not be your inventory asset account. Selecting a default account saves you having to enter an account on every line of the inventory adjustment. If you need to use different accounts, don’t enter a default account.

3

4

To record a stocktake
1

Count the actual items in your inventory.
NOTE : Inventory Count Sheet report You can use the Inventory Count Sheet report, which lists all your inventory items, to manually record your actual quantities. To print the report, click Print in the Count Inventory window or, if you want to set filters, access it from the Index to Reports window.

RECORDING STOCKTAKES

1 5 5

5

Click Continue. The Adjust Inventory window appears, displaying a line item for each required adjustment. If you entered a default adjustment account in step 4, that account appears in the Account column for each line item. If you didn’t enter a default adjustment account, enter the accounts you want to use to track the adjustment in the Account column for each line item.

6

[Optional] Enter a reason for the adjustment in the Memo column (for example, ‘End of year stocktake’). If the count is an end of financial year stocktake, select the Year‐End Adjustment option. Click Record to update your inventory.

7

8

Reviewing your inventory information
The following tools help you review your inventory information.
Tool
To Do List Inventory reports View history Find Transactions Items Register Transaction Journal

Description
Displays an alert for items that need to be purchased or built. Inventory reports help you keep track of your item quantities and value. You can view the sales and purchase transaction histories of an item or supplier for seven years. Find Transactions helps you find inventory transactions. Gives you a list of your inventory transfers, adjustments, sales and purchases for all items. Lists journal entries of your inventory transactions.

See below page 157 page 157 page 174 page 175 page 175
3

item actually on hand. The On Order column shows the quantity of each item already on order. The Committed column shows the quantity of an item on backorder for customers. If you want to change the details of an order or auto‐build transaction before recording it, click the Order or Build zoom arrow ( ) next to the item. Complete the transaction in the window that appears. If you want to automatically order or build items: a Click in the select column ( ) next to each item you want to build or order and then click Order/Build. A window appears, displaying the current date. b If you want to, enter a different date. c Choose whether you want to Order or Build and click OK. An order will automatically be created for the items that need to be purchased. The restocking information entered in the Buying Details tab view of the Item Information window is used to determine the supplier and quantity to order or the items to build.

4

To view a list of all items that need to be built or purchased
1

Click To Do List from any command centre. The To Do List window appears. Click the Stock Alert tab. A list of all items that need to be ordered or built appears. The On Hand column shows the quantity of each

2

156

C H A P T E R 9

INVENTORY

To view inventory reports
The following are some reports to help you track your inventory. Analyse Inventory Summary report. The summary and detailed versions of this report can serve as your order book. You can view a list of all your sales orders and purchase orders for all or selected items. Item List Summary report. This report shows information about your items, including their on‐hand quantities and total value. The Item List Summary report also shows an item’s current average cost price, which is important to know when making inventory adjustments. You can use this report to compare your total inventory value to the total of your inventory asset accounts.

Price List Summary report. This report lists your item prices, and is useful for sending to your customers. For information on reports, see Chapter 12, ’Reports’, starting on page 185

To view sales and purchases history for an item
1

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Items List. The Items List window appears. Click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the item you want to view. The Item Information window appears. Click the History tab. The History view displays the purchase and sales history for the item for seven years: five past years, the current year and the next year.

2

3

Setting item prices
You can set the default selling prices of the items you sell using the Set Item Prices window. Then, if required, you can change the price at the point of sale, which overrides the default price for that sale only.

To change the price of an item
1

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Set Item Prices. The Set Item Prices window appears.

If an item is not listed, it means that you haven’t selected the I Sell This Item option on the Profile tab of the Item Information window.

SETTING ITEM PRICES

1 5 7

2

From the Basis for Calculation list, select whether you want to show the average cost or last cost of each item. This will help you compare the selling prices of your items to their cost.
Select...
Average Cost Last Cost

4

Indicate how you want to calculate the new prices and apply rounding. For example, if you want a markup of 30% over the average cost of your items, select the Percent Markup option, type 30 in the adjacent field and select Average Cost as the basis of calculation.

If you want to view... the total on‐hand cost of each item divided by the number of units you have on hand. the most recent purchase price for the item.
5

If you want to: update only the items you selected in step 2, click Update Selected Items. update the price of all items, click Update All Items.

3

Click in the Current Price column of an item and enter a new price. Do this for each item price you want to change. You can enter unit prices with up to four decimal places. On your invoices, the unit price is multiplied by the quantity sold and the result is rounded to two decimal places.

4

Click OK.

To update the prices of multiple items at once
1

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Set Item Prices. The Set Item Prices window appears. Click in the select column ( update. ) next to the items that require a price

2

3

Click Shortcuts. The Pricing Shortcuts window appears.

158

C H A P T E R 9

INVENTORY

Customising inventory
You can customise inventory using the following options: Custom price levels You can set up to six price levels for an item and then assign one of these levels to a particular customer. You could, for example, have one price level for casual customers, another for irregular customers, another for regular small‐spend customers, another for regular high‐spend customers and so on. You can also specify up to five price breaks for each price level. You can then charge, say, all your regular customers increasingly lower prices if they purchase larger and larger quantities of the item. Custom fields Use custom fields to record additional item information, such as Warranty, Serial Number and Voltage. Use these fields for information that you don’t need to use as report filters. Custom lists Create custom lists of attributes that you can apply to your items and then filter and group your inventory items by. For example, if you are running a trailer‐rental business, you might have custom lists of Colour and Type. By assigning the custom list entries to your items, you could then run a report to include only trailers of a certain colour or type. To set custom pricing levels, you can give each level a name and then specify a price for each level for each quantity break.

To name your price levels
[Optional] If you don’t give names to price levels, default names will be used (Level A, Level B and so on).
1

Go to the Lists menu, choose Custom Lists & Field Names and then Price Levels. The Custom List and Field Names window appears. Enter names for the price levels. These names will appear in the Selling Details tab of the Item Information window. Note that long names will appear shortened to the first 11 characters. Click OK.

2

3

To specify price levels and quantity breaks for an item
1 2

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Items List. Select the item and click Edit. The Item Information window for the item appears. Click the Selling Details tab. The base selling price you entered for this item in the upper section of the Selling Details view appears at Level A (or whatever name you have chosen for this field).

3

Custom price levels
You can customise your pricing according to customer status and sales quantities. For example, a level A customer might pay $140 for a single quantity of the item, but if they purchase five units of the item, they will only have to pay $100 for each of them.
Volume discount The volume in the Volume Discount % field in the Selling Details view of a customer’s card will apply in addition to the quantity‐break price levels you set up.
NOTE :

4

In the remaining fields (Levels B to F, or whatever you have chosen to name them), type the selling price of this item. Make an entry for each price level you want to use. If you want to specify quantity breaks for a price level: a Enter the first quantity break in the first Over field and enter a price for orders that are over the quantity break. b In the next Over field, type a new quantity break. Assign the price for this quantity break for each price level.

5

CUSTOMISING INVENTORY

1 5 9

c Continue to enter up to five quantity breaks and assign up to six

price levels. Note that each quantity break must be greater than the previous quantity break and less than the next.

Custom item lists
You can create three custom lists that you can use to filter and group your inventory items. An example of a custom list is Colour, in which you can create list entries of yellow, red, green and blue. When you create or edit an item, you can assign one of these colours to it. When you run an inventory report, such as the Analyse Inventory Summary report, you can choose to include only red items in the report.

To name a custom item list
1

Go to the Lists menu, choose Custom Lists & Field Names, and then click Items. The Custom List and Field Names window appears. Enter names for each of the three custom lists in the appropriate fields and click OK.

2 6

Click OK.

To assign a price level to a customer
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Locate the customer card you want to assign a price level to and click the zoom arrow ( ) next to it. Click the Selling Details tab. In the Item Price Level field, select the price level you want to assign to the customer. You can assign the item’s base selling price or one of the six price levels. If you don’t assign one of the six price levels, the item’s base price is used instead. The selected price level, and any associated quantity breaks, will now determine the price this customer is charged for the item. These list names will now appear on the Items Details view of the Item Information window.

2

3 4

To create a custom list entry
1

Go to the Lists menu, choose Custom Lists and then Items. The Custom Lists window appears. Select the custom list to which you want to add entries in the Custom List field.

2

5

Click OK.

160

C H A P T E R 9

INVENTORY

3

Click New and type the name of the list entry. For example, if you have a colour list, you would enter a colour, such as Purple.

Custom item fields
Custom fields can be used to record additional information about your items. Examples of custom fields are Warranty, ID No. and Manufacturer. However, unlike custom lists, custom fields cannot be used to filter inventory reports. You can create up to three custom fields.

To name a custom item field
1

Go to the Lists menu and choose Custom Lists & Field Names and then Items. The Custom List and Field Names window appears. In the Name of Custom Field fields, type the field names and click OK.

2 4 5 6

Click OK. Repeat from step 3 until you have created all your list entries. Click Close to close the Custom Lists window. These field names will appear on the Item Details view of the Item Information window for all items, and you can enter the relevant details in these fields.

To assign a custom list entry to an item
1 2

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Items List. Click the zoom arrow ( ) to the left of the item. The Item Information window appears. Click the Item Details tab. Select the list entry you require from the appropriate custom list. Click OK.

3 4 5

CUSTOMISING INVENTORY

1 6 1

162

C H A P T E R 9

INVENTORY

10 Lists
Your company file has lists for different types of records—customers, accounts, tax codes, recurring transactions and so on. This chapter explains how to add records to lists, and how to inactivate or delete them.

Adding a record
Lists are made up of individual records. For example, each item in your Items List is a record, as is each job in your Jobs List. You can add as many records as you want to a list.
To add this type of record...
Account Card • • • • Customer Supplier Employee Personal page 61 page 83 page 110 page 209 page 140 Job page 227

To add this type of record...
Item Tax code Recurring transaction

See page 149 page 164 page 179 page 226

See page 23

Category

Time billing activity [AccountRight Plus only]

Adding records when entering transactions
You can create new records easily from any transaction window. For example, you can add accounts, cards, categories, employment classifications (not in AccountRight Standard), comments, custom list items, jobs, referral sources, shipping methods and more to your lists when entering transactions.

163

To create a record in a transaction window
Let’s assume you want to add a customer card while entering a sale.
1

3

In the Sales command centre, click Enter Sales. The Sales window appears. In the Customer field, type the customer’s name and press TAB. If there is no card for this customer, a drop‐down list appears.

2

Do one of the following: To create a detailed new record, click New. The Card Information window appears, where you can enter the details of the new customer. To create a quick record to complete later, click Easy‐Add. A new card is added to your cards list, using just the customer name you entered in the Customer field. You can go back and add details to the card later.
NOTE : Easy‐Add is not available from some transaction windows In windows such as Spend Money, the type of card you want to create is not immediately obvious, so the Easy‐Add button is not available.

Setting up tax codes
Tax codes are used to track tax paid to and by your business. Each tax code represents a particular type of tax. AccountRight has an extensive list of tax codes that can be used in a variety of situations—for example, when doing business with overseas customers, when tracking capital acquisitions, and so on.

Summary of tax types
When you create a tax code, you need to select which type of tax it is. The table below describes what each tax type is for.
Tax Type
Consolidated

Description
This tax type is used for taxes that are made up of two or more tax codes or sub‐taxes. For more information, see ‘Consolidated tax codes’ on page 166.

164

C H A P T E R 1 0

LISTS

Tax Type
Import Duty

Description
Importers, who are bringing goods into Australia from other countries, should use this tax type. Tax codes with this tax type are used to record the import duty payable on a purchase order without changing the total amount of the purchase order. (The import duty is treated as a separate transaction since the duty is payable to the ATO, not to the company supplying the goods.) This tax type is associated with the Wine Equalisation Tax. This tax type is associated with the Goods & Services Tax assigned to sales and purchases. This tax type also is used for GST‐free goods and GST on Wine Equalisation Tax. This tax type should be used by organisations, such as suppliers of financial services, that must pay GST on the purchases they make but don't collect GST from their clients or customers. The Input Taxed tax type also should be used by businesses that haven't registered for GST. This tax type is used by the Automotive industry to handle the luxury car tax. This tax type should be used for the PAYG voluntary withholdings scheme. This tax type should be used for suppliers that have not quoted ABNs on their invoices, or for amounts that are withheld from investment income because no tax file number was quoted. This type indicates that the tax code is a PAYG Withholding tax type and will always be rounded down to the nearest dollar. You should use a No ABN/TFN tax code of 48.5% for suppliers who do not quote an ABN on invoices for more than $75 tax exclusive, or where amounts are withheld from investment income because no tax file number was quoted. If both of these situations apply to your company, you will need to create two tax codes to handle them separately.

To create a tax code
1

Go to the Lists menu and choose Tax Codes. The Tax Code List window appears. Click New. The Tax Code Information window appears. In the Tax Code field, type a code (up to three characters) for the new tax and press TAB. Complete the other fields in this window.

2 3

4

Sales Tax Goods & Services Tax Input Taxed

A

B

Luxury Car Tax Voluntary withholdings No ABN/TFN

A B

Enter a description, type and rate. If you selected Consolidated as the Tax Type, see ‘Consolidated tax codes’ on page 166. Select the linked account for tax collected and for tax paid. These fields are only available for some tax types.

SETTING UP TAX CODES

1 6 5

Consolidated tax codes
You can create consolidated tax codes by combining two or more tax codes. For example, you could create a GW tax code (with a 41.9% tax rate) that is composed of WET (Wine Equalisation Tax) at 29% and WEG (GST on Wine Equalisation Tax) at 12.9%.

To assign tax codes to items
When you set up your items, you must assign a tax code to each of them. You need to assign a tax code to be used when you sell an item and a tax code to be used when you buy an item. That tax code will appear as the default in sales and purchases of that item unless you have specified that the customer’s or supplier’s tax code is to be used instead (see below). Tax codes are assigned to items in the Buying and Selling tabs of the Item Information window. For more information, see ‘Creating items’ on page 149.

To assign tax codes to cards
You can define a default tax code for a customer or supplier. You would only need to select a default tax code if the customer’s or supplier’s tax status takes precedence over that of the item or service being sold or purchased.
NOTE : You can only consolidate tax codes that are in your tax code list Make sure you first create the tax codes you want to consolidate. The rest of the fields are filled in for you and the consolidated tax rate is calculated automatically.

For example, if a customer is one to whom you only ever make export sales, you should assign the EXP (Export Sales) tax code to that customer’s card. When you create a quote, order or invoice, the tax code assigned to the customer will be used as the default. This tax code will override the item’s tax code in an item sale, and the allocation account’s tax code in a non‐item sale. Tax codes are assigned to customers in the Selling Details tab of their Card Information window. Make sure you select the Use Customer’s Tax Code option. (If this is not selected, the customer’s tax code will not be used, even if one has been assigned.)

To assign tax codes to accounts
You can assign a tax code to any detail account in your accounts list. The tax code you assign will appear as the default tax code in a transaction where you allocate a deposit, cheque, non‐item sale or purchase to this account. For example, you have assigned the GST tax code to your electricity expense account. When you settle your electricity bill in the Spend Money window and allocate it to this account, the GST tax code will appear in this window by default. You can allocate a tax code to an account in the Account Information window. To open this window, go to the Accounts command centre, click Accounts List, double‐click the required account, and click the Details tab.

166

C H A P T E R 1 0

LISTS

Similarly, when you create a quote, order or bill, the tax code assigned to the supplier will be used as the default. This tax code will override the item’s tax code in an item purchase and the allocation account’s tax code in a non‐item purchase. Tax codes are assigned to suppliers in the Buying Details tab of their Card Information window.

Make sure you select the Use Supplier’s Tax Code option. (If this option is not selected, the supplier’s tax code will not be used, even if one has been assigned.)

Finding a record
Records are stored and displayed in lists. For example, the Jobs List window lists the jobs you have created, the Accounts List window lists your accounts, and so on. As lists get long, it can take time to locate a record. Use the following tools to find a record quickly. Tabs Some lists are divided into separate views using tabs. For instance, the accounts list is divided by account type into nine tabs, making it easier for you to find an account. For example, if you are looking for an asset account, click the Asset tab. Within the tab you can use the scroll bar to find the record. Advanced search filters In some list windows, you can use advanced search filters to narrow down your record search. To do this, click Advanced. Enter the relevant filters and click OK. The window will display only those records that meet your search criteria. Search fields You can filter lists using the search field. To do this, click the column heading by which you want to search (for example, by code or name), then type your search terms in the Search field ( ). The list is updated as you type to display all records that contain your search terms for the selected column. To reset the list, delete the text you entered in the search field or click the X ( ) icon.

FINDING A RECORD

1 6 7

Changing a record
You can make changes to: accounts cards categories items jobs payroll categories (AccountRight Plus only) tax codes time billing activities (AccountRight Plus only). Changing a record that has been used in a transaction If you change the details of a record that does not affect a transaction’s balance (for example, changing a customer name), then all the transactions you’ve entered using that record are updated.
2

If you make changes to a record that do affect a transaction’s balance (such as an item’s selling price or the rate of a tax code) transactions you’ve entered previously using that record are not updated. For example, if you change an item’s selling price from $6 to $8, transactions you’ve recorded with the old price will retain that price. The new price applies to any new transactions you enter.

To change a record
1

Display the list to which the record belongs. For example, if you are making changes to an account, display the Accounts List window; if you are changing an item, display the Items List window, and so on. Locate the record you want to change in the list. Use a search method described in ‘Finding a record’ on page 167, if necessary. Once you locate the record, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to it. Details of the record are displayed. Make the required changes and click OK.

3

4

Inactivating or reactivating a record
If you have accounts, cards, items, activities (AccountRight Plus only), or jobs that you rarely use—for example, a card you created for a one‐off sale or purchase—inactivating them after use will remove them from selection lists. Your list of records will be shorter and, consequently, selecting the record you need will be easier. You can still use an inactive record in transactions by manually entering the record name.

To inactivate (or reactivate) a record
1

Display the list to which the record belongs. For example, if you are making changes to an account, display the Accounts List window; if you are changing an item, display the Items List window, and so on. Locate the record you want to inactivate (or reactivate) and click the zoom arrow ( ) next to it. The record’s details appear. If you are inactivating or reactivating a card, account, activity or item, click the Profile tab. Select (or deselect) the Inactive [...] option.

2

3

4

168

C H A P T E R 1 0

LISTS

Deleting a record
You can delete a record that you no longer need. However, a record cannot be deleted if it is used in a transaction, has been selected in another record, or if it has a balance.
NOTE : Deleting accounts and jobs You can only delete an account or a job if it has never been used in a transaction. If the account or job has been used, you will not be able to delete it, even after deleting the transaction. As an alternative, you can choose to make the account or job inactive. See ‘Inactivating or reactivating a record’ on page 168 for more information. For accounts, you can choose to combine the account you no longer require with another account to remove it from the Accounts List. See ‘Combining records’ below for more information.

To delete a record
1

Go to the Lists menu and choose the list to which the record belongs. For example, if you are deleting an item, choose Items; if you are deleting a card, choose Cards, and so on. Locate the record you want to delete and click the zoom arrow ( ) next to it. The record details appear in the Information window. Go to the Edit menu and choose Delete [...]. For example, if you want to delete a customer card, choose Delete Card.

2

3

Combining records
In some situations you may want to combine two records. For example, you may have records in your cards list for two suppliers who have merged their operations. Or you may have separate accounts for two departments whose sales figures you now want to combine. When you combine two records, you identify one as the primary record and the other as the secondary record. The primary record becomes the owner of all the transaction details (transactions, jobs, history, and so on) currently linked to the secondary record and the secondary record is deleted.
Historical reports When you view historical reports from the previous financial year (for instance, the previous financial year’s balance sheet), the primary account is listed showing the combined account balance.
NOTE :

Combining cards
You can combine: customer cards supplier cards personal cards. You cannot combine: employee cards cards with a different type cards where the primary card is inactive. When cards are combined, the non‐transaction card information for the primary card—such as card name, address and buying and selling details—is retained as the default information for the combined card.

DELETING A RECORD

1 6 9

The transaction details for the secondary card are added to the primary card. Non‐transaction information for the secondary card is deleted.

Combining accounts
You can only combine accounts that are: accounts of the same account type (for example, asset and expense accounts cannot be combined) and detail accounts. You cannot combine: header accounts accounts that are linked to other accounts. When accounts are combined, the non‐transaction account information for the primary account—such as account name, description and bank details (for banking accounts)—is retained as the default information for the combined account. The transaction details and opening balance of the secondary account are added to the primary account. Non‐transaction information for the secondary account is deleted.
NOTE : Budgets and job budgets not combined Budgets and job budgets for the secondary account are not added to the budgets and job budgets of the primary account. You will have to revise the budgets and job budgets of the primary account after combining them.

To combine two cards
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Select the primary card. Click Combine Cards. The Combine Cards window appears.

2 3

The primary card appears under the Primary ‐ Move all transactions to list. If necessary, you can choose another primary card from the list.
4

To combine two accounts
1

Select the secondary card from the Secondary ‐ Remove all transactions from list.
The next action cannot be undone Before continuing, check that you’ve selected the correct cards to be combined. If you combine the wrong cards, you will have to restore them from a backup and re‐enter transactions posted to those cards since the backup.
CAUTION :

Go to the Accounts command centre and click Accounts List. The Accounts List window appears. Select the primary account. This is the account that the secondary account’s transaction history and opening balance will be transferred to.

2

5 6

Click Combine Cards. A confirmation window appears. Click OK to confirm you want to combine the two cards.

170

C H A P T E R 1 0

LISTS

3

Click Combine Accounts. The Combine Accounts window appears.

The primary account appears under the Primary ‐ Move all transactions to list. If necessary, you can choose another primary account from the list.
4

Select the secondary account from the Secondary ‐ Remove all transactions from list.
The next action cannot be undone Before continuing, check that you’ve selected the correct accounts to be combined. If you combine the wrong accounts, you will have to restore from a backup and re‐enter transactions posted to the accounts since the backup.
CAUTION :

5 6

Click Combine Accounts. A confirmation window appears. Click OK to confirm you want to combine the two accounts.

COMBINING RECORDS

1 7 1

172

C H A P T E R 1 0

LISTS

11 Transactions
You create a transaction when you record entries such as sales invoices, purchase orders and inventory adjustments. You can change, delete or reverse transactions—depending on how your preferences are set up. If you have transactions that need to be entered periodically, you can set up recurring transactions. You can use these recurring transactions to store details of transactions you record regularly and to set up reminders to record them. You can also choose to record recurring transactions automatically on their due date.

Finding a transaction
There are several ways to find a transaction. The method you use depends on the information you have at hand.
Use the...
Find Transactions window Sales Register

Use the...
Bank Register

To find...
Spend Money, Pay Bills, Receive Payments and Receive Money transactions and employee pays. inventory item transactions for a particular date range. This includes adjustments, auto‐build and other inventory transactions. any transaction by source journal. recurring transactions. You can sort transactions by name, type, or frequency, or search for a transaction by name, amount, or next due.

See page 175

To find... journal entries, sales, purchases, cheques, deposits, supplier and customer payments. transactions relating to sales (such as open and closed invoices), quotes, orders, credits and returns. This method is most useful if you know the transaction date or the customer’s name. transactions relating to purchases (such as open and closed bills) quotes, orders, debits and returns. This method is most useful if you know the transaction date or the supplier’s name.

See page 174 Items Register

page 175

page 174 Transaction Journal window Recurring Transactions List window

page 175 page 176

Purchases Register

page 174

173

To find a transaction using the Find Transactions window
1 2

2

Click the tab of the sales category you would like to view—for example, Orders.

From any command centre, click Find Transactions. In the Find Transactions window, click the appropriate tab—for example, the Card tab to search by card. Filter your search using the Search By and date range fields.

3

3

[Optional] Filter your search using the Search By and date range fields. The transactions that match your search criteria appear in the Sales Register window. You can view a transaction in detail by clicking the zoom arrow ( ) next to it.

4

If you want to narrow your search further: a Click Advanced. The Advanced Filters window appears. b Type or select additional search filters, and click OK. The transactions that match your search criteria appear in the Find Transactions window. You can view a transaction in detail by clicking the zoom arrow ( ) next to it.
Quotes and orders without applied payments don’t appear in the Find Transactions window To find these types of transactions, go to the Quotes and Orders views of the Sales Register or Purchases Register.
NOTE :

To find a transaction using the Purchases Register window
The Purchases Register window lists all open and closed purchases, returns and debits, quotes and orders. You can also view a list of all purchases.
1

Go to the Purchases command centre and click Purchases Register. The Purchases Register window appears. Click the tab of the type of purchase you would like to view—for example, All Purchases.

2

To find a transaction using the Sales Register window
The Sales Register window lists all open and closed invoices, quotes, orders, returns and credits. You can also view a list of all sales, if you choose.
1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Sales Register. The Sales Register window appears.
3

[Optional] Filter your search using the Search By and date range fields.

174

C H A P T E R 1 1

TRANSACTIONS

The transactions that match your search criteria appear in the Purchases Register window. You can view a transaction in detail by clicking the zoom arrow ( ) next to it.

1

Go to the Inventory command centre and click Items Register. The Items Register window appears.

To find a transaction using the Bank Register window
You can use the Bank Register window to find Spend Money, Pay Bills, Receive Payments and Receive Money transactions and employee pays (AccountRight Plus only).
1

Go to the Banking command centre and click Bank Register. The Bank Register window appears. Type or select the bank, credit card or petty cash account you used for the transaction in the Account field.

2

2

In the Search By field, select whether you want to view transactions for all items or a single item. If you selected Item at step 2, type or select the item number in the field that appears to the right of the Search By field. In the Dated From and To fields, enter the date range during which the transaction was recorded. The transactions that match your search criteria appear in the Items Register window. If you want to view a transaction in detail, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the transaction.

3

4

5

3

In the Dated From and To fields, enter the date range during which the transaction was recorded. The transactions that match your search criteria appear in the Bank Register window. If you want to view a transaction in detail, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to the transaction.

To find a transaction using the Transaction Journal window
The Transaction Journal window groups all your accounting entries into journals: general, disbursements, payroll (AccountRight Plus only), receipts, sales, purchases and inventory. It also enables you to display all transactions.
1

4

To find a transaction using the Items Register window
The Items Register window gives you quick access to transactions relating to items. When the register is filtered to show a single item, a running balance of the item’s quantities and values appears.

Click Transaction Journal from any command centre (except Card File). The Transaction Journal window appears.

FINDING A TRANSACTION

1 7 5

2

Click the appropriate tab—for example, the Sales tab to find a sales invoice.

To find a recurring transaction
1

Go to the Lists menu and choose Recurring Transactions. The Recurring Transactions List window appears.

3

In the Dated From and To fields, enter the date range within which the transaction was recorded. All transactions between (and occurring on) these dates will be listed. If you want to search for a range of journal ID numbers, enter the range in the ID From and To fields. All transactions with IDs between (and matching) these numbers will be listed. To open the transaction in its original window, click the zoom arrow ( ) to the left of the journal entry.

2

4

Locate the recurring transaction. You can: sort the transactions by name, type or frequency search for a transaction by name, amount or due date. For more information on changing the details of a recurring transaction, see ‘Recurring transactions’ on page 179.

5

176

C H A P T E R 1 1

TRANSACTIONS

Changing or deleting a transaction
If you are part way through entering a transaction, you can erase it and start again by choosing Erase from the Edit menu. Sometimes, however, you may need to make changes to or delete a transaction you have already recorded. A transaction can only be changed or deleted: if it is changeable. A changeable transaction is identified by a blue zoom arrow ( ) next to it. To check if your transaction is changeable, make sure the Transactions CAN’T be Changed; They Must be Reversed option is deselected in the Security view of the Preferences window. Note that when you create your company file, this preference is not selected. If you want to maintain a strict audit trail, you should consider making your transactions unchangeable by setting this preference. An unchangeable transaction is identified by a grey zoom arrow ( ) next to it. if it is not dated within a locked period. Lock periods prevent you from inadvertently making an entry in a period in which you don’t want new entries. For example, after you have completed end‐of‐month reports for January, you might lock the period so that the balances for that month cannot be changed. If you want to change a transaction in a locked period, you need to unlock the period first. If you make your transactions unchangeable, you need to reverse a transaction to cancel its effect on your accounts (see ‘Reversing a transaction’ on page 178).

Changing a transaction
Before changing a transaction, note the following: Some transactions cannot be changed You cannot change a refund cheque or a bank deposit once it has been recorded. You can only delete or reverse these transactions. For more information, see ‘Reversing a transaction’ on page 178. Some fields cannot be edited If you are changing a Pay Bills or Receive Payments transaction, or an employee pay, only the Account, Date, Memo and transaction ID fields can be edited. You cannot change the transaction amount.

To change a transaction
1

Find and display the transaction in its original transaction window. For more information, see ‘Finding a transaction’ on page 173. Make the necessary changes to the transaction and then click OK.

2

Deleting a transaction
When you delete a transaction, it is permanently removed from your records. Note the following when deleting a transaction: Sales and purchases You can only delete a sale or purchase that does not have a payment applied to it. If you have recorded a payment for a sale or purchase, you must first delete the payment and then delete the transaction. Any discounts that have been given must also be deleted before the transaction can be deleted. If you applied a supplier debit towards a purchase, you must delete the debit before you can delete the purchase. A credit note applied to a sale must also be deleted before the sale can be deleted.

CHANGING OR DELETING A TRANSACTION

1 7 7

Grouped receipts that have been deposited If you want to delete an individual receipt that was recorded as part of a bank deposit of receipts grouped in the undeposited funds account, you must first delete the bank deposit. When you delete a bank deposit, all of the cash receipts included in that bank deposit are returned to the Prepare Bank Deposit window. You can then delete the required receipt from this window. Reconciled transactions If you delete a reconciled transaction, your bank reconciliation will be out of balance. If you want to reverse a reconciled transaction, you need to undo the bank reconciliation first, then reverse the entry and re‐reconcile the account. See ‘Undoing an account reconciliation’ on page 57. GST and activity statement reporting If you delete a transaction that must be reported on an activity statement, the transaction details

will not be included in your GST reports or in an activity statement prepared using BASlink. Also, if you delete a transaction from a prior GST reporting period, your GST reported for that period may be affected. Insufficient on‐hand item quantities You cannot delete a purchase that will result in negative inventory on‐hand.

To delete a transaction
1

Find and display the transaction in its original transaction window. For more information, see ‘Finding a transaction’ on page 173. Go to the Edit menu and choose Delete [...]. For example, if you want to delete a sale, choose Delete Sale. The transaction will be removed permanently from your records.

2

Reversing a transaction
If your accountant wants you to maintain a strict record of all your accounting entries, you should reverse a transaction rather than change or delete it. A reversal transaction is a new transaction that replicates the original transaction, but with debit amounts shown as credit amounts and vice versa. After posting a reversal transaction, you have two transactions (the original and the reversal), but the account balances appear as if the original transaction was never posted. A reversal transaction is automatically posted to the same account for the same amount as the original transaction. You cannot change the amount or account of a reversal transaction. Before you can reverse a transaction You can only reverse a transaction if it is unchangeable. An unchangeable transaction is identified by a grey zoom arrow ( ) next to it. To make your transactions unchangeable, select the Transactions CAN'T be Changed; They Must be Reversed option on the Security tab view of the Preferences window. You can change this option at any time. Reversing a transaction can affect closed periods When you reverse a transaction, be aware of the transaction date you enter: If you use the current date when you reverse a transaction from a prior month, the month‐end financials for the prior month will not reflect the reversal transaction. If you use the original date for the reversal transaction, your prior month’s financials should be reprinted because they will have changed. If the original transaction date falls in a prior GST period, recording the transaction on the original date may affect the GST reportable in that period.

178

C H A P T E R 1 1

TRANSACTIONS

Negative inventory You cannot reverse a purchase if it will result in a negative on‐hand inventory count. Customer and supplier payments If an early payment discount was applied to a sale or purchase, you also need to reverse the discount. For information about how to find a transaction, see ‘Finding a transaction’ on page 173.
3

containing corresponding negative amounts to that of the original transaction appears. If you want, alter the date and memo. Note that you can’t change the accounts and amounts.
Recap transaction Before you record this transaction, you can use the recap transaction feature to view the journal entries that will be created when the transaction is recorded. To recap, choose Recap Transaction from the Edit menu.
TIP :

To reverse a transaction
1

Find the transaction you want to reverse. See ‘Finding a transaction’ on page 173 for instructions. Go to the Edit menu and choose Reverse [...]. For example, if you want to reverse a sale, choose Reverse Sale. A new transaction

4

2

Click Record Reversal to record the reversal transaction. The transaction is reversed and all account balances are returned to their previous levels.

Recurring transactions
If you have transactions that you record regularly—for example, a rent cheque or purchases—you can set them up as recurring transactions and save them for future use. When you save a recurring transaction, you can specify how often you want the transaction to be recorded, and for how long you want to schedule it. For example, you can schedule your car payments monthly, for the next 22 months. If the transaction details are the same each time—such as a rent payment, you can set up a recurring transaction to record automatically. Or you can open the transaction as required, alter the details (for example, if you make regular sales to a customer and vary the items), and then record the transaction. You can make the following transactions recurring: sales, purchases, Spend Money, Receive Money and general journal entries.

Setting up recurring transactions
You can create a recurring transaction in a transaction window, or copy an existing recurring transaction to create a new one. Later on, you can change details of a recurring transaction, or delete one if it is no longer used.
If you want to...
Create a recurring transaction Create a recurring transaction from an existing entry Edit a recurring transaction Delete a recurring transaction Record a recurring transaction from a transaction window Record multiple recurring transactions

See page 180 page 181 page 182 page 182 page 183 page 183

RECURRING TRANSACTIONS

1 7 9

To create a recurring transaction
When you create a recurring transaction, you can select how often you want the transaction to be recorded, and for how long you want to schedule it. For example, you can schedule your car payments monthly, for the next 22 months.
1

5

In the Starting on field type the date on which the transaction is first due.
NOTE : Pre‐dated recurring transactions You can save a recurring transaction with a start date prior to the system date, provided the date entered is within the current financial year and is not in a locked period.

Enter the transaction details in a transaction window—such as the Sales window—if you make regular sales to a customer. Click Save as Recurring (instead of clicking Record). The Recurring Schedule Information window appears.
6

2

Indicate how long you want the recurring transaction to continue.
If you want to... schedule the transaction for an unlimited period schedule the transaction until a set date schedule the transaction for a set number of times

then...
Select Continue indefinitely. Select Continue until this date and type the date in the adjacent field. Select Perform this # of times and type the number of times in the adjacent field.

Specify an alert option In the Alerts section of the window, you can set a reminder to record the transaction, or set for an automatic recording of the transaction and receiving a notification when the transaction is recorded.
3

In the Recurring Transaction Name field, type a name to identify the transaction. Schedule the transaction

4

From the Frequency list select the transaction frequency.
TIP : Recurring transaction reports If you specify the frequency and a reminder date for the transaction, you can use the Recurring Transactions reports to keep track of the transactions you need to enter.

NOTE : Pre‐dated recurring transactions cannot be recorded automatically If you entered a pre‐dated recurring transaction and you set a reminder date, the transaction will display as overdue on the To Do List. Pre‐dated recurring transactions cannot be set to be recorded automatically.

180

C H A P T E R 1 1

TRANSACTIONS

If you want to... set a reminder

then...
1 2 3 4 5

To create a recurring transaction from an existing entry
You can create a recurring transaction by copying an existing recurring transaction entry, then customising the details for the new one.
1

Click Remind. Select a reminder option from the to record this transaction list. If you selected No. days in advance, type the number of days in the adjacent field. Select the user who needs to be reminded from the list adjacent to the option. Continue with step 7 below. Click Automatically record this transaction when due and notify. Select the user who needs to be notified from the list adjacent to the option.

Go to the Lists menu and choose Recurring Transactions. The Recurring Transactions List window appears. Select the recurring transaction you want to copy and click Create Copy. The Create Copy window appears.

2

automatically record the transaction

1 2

Select the transaction ID
7

3

In the Card field, click the search button ( ). The Select from List window appears listing only card types relevant to the type of recurring transaction you are copying. For example, a sales transaction can only be applied to your customer cards.

In the Transaction section, select how you want the transaction ID number to be created: if you want the transaction ID number to be one greater than the previous transaction ID, click Use the next sequential number as the [...] No.. if you want to use a specific transaction ID, click Use the following as the [...] No., then type the transaction ID in the adjacent field. If you want to save your changes to the recurring transaction each time it is recorded, select the Save my changes when I record this recurring transaction option. Click OK. The transaction window appears. Click Record to record the transaction showing or click Cancel to close the transaction window. The new recurring transaction now appears in the Recurring Transactions List window. See ‘To find a recurring transaction’ on page 176.

4

8

Select the cards you want create a copy for: if you want to select all the cards, click the icon above the select column ( ) if you only want to select some cards, click in the select column next to each required card. Click OK when you’ve finished selecting from the list. The Create Copy window appears.

5

9 10

RECURRING TRANSACTIONS

1 8 1

6

Click Save.
If you selected...
One card

3

Then...
The transaction window for the new recurring transaction appears. You can edit the transaction details if required. Click Save. The Recurring Transactions List window appears. The Recurring Transactions List window lists all your recurring transactions. Each new transaction has a unique name—the original name suffixed by the name of the relevant card.

If you want to change the schedule of the recurring transaction: a Select the recurring transaction and click Edit Schedule. The Recurring Schedule Information window appears. b Change the scheduling details of the transaction as required. c Click OK. Click Close.

4

More than one card

To delete a recurring transaction
Deleting a recurring transaction only removes it from your list of recurring transactions. Transactions recorded previously, using this recurring transaction as a template, are not affected.
1

7

If you need to change the schedule details or the name of a new recurring transaction: a Select the recurring transaction. b Click Edit Schedule. The Recurring Schedule Information window appears. c Make your changes and click OK. Click Close.

Go to the Lists menu and choose Recurring Transactions. The Recurring Transactions List window appears. Select the recurring transaction you want to delete and click Delete. An information message appears explaining that this action will not delete any recorded transactions based on this transaction template. Click OK to delete the recurring transaction.

2

8

3

To edit a recurring transaction
After you’ve created a recurring transaction, you can edit the details (such as the cheque details of a Spend Money transaction) or edit the schedule.
1

Recording recurring transactions
For recurring transactions that are not set up to record automatically, you need to decide when to record them. You can: record a single recurring transaction from a transaction window—see page 183 record several transactions at the same time—see page 183. You can also record a recurring transaction: in the Reminders window (if you use the reminders option)—see ‘Reminders’ on page 184 in the Recurring Transactions List window by going to the Lists menu and choosing Recurring Transactions.

Go to the Lists menu and choose Recurring Transactions. The Recurring Transactions List window appears. If you want to change the recurring transaction details: a Select the recurring transaction and click Edit. The transaction window appears for the selected type of recurring transaction. b Make the necessary changes. c Click Save.

2

182

C H A P T E R 1 1

TRANSACTIONS

To record a recurring transaction from a transaction window
1

To record multiple recurring transactions
1

Open the transaction window for the recurring transaction you want to use. For example, open the Sales window if you are recording a recurring sales transaction. Click Use Recurring. The Select a Recurring Transaction window appears listing only recurring transactions for this type of transaction.

From any command centre, click To Do List. The To Do List window appears. Click the appropriate tab— Recurring Purchases, Recurring Sales or Recurring Transactions (for all other recurring transactions).

2

2

In the list of recurring transactions that appears, you can click the zoom arrow ( ) to the left of a transaction to view it in detail.
3

Click in the select column ( ) next to the recurring transactions you want to record. Click Record. A window appears requiring you to enter a date for the selected transactions. This is the date that the transactions will be recorded in your journals. Enter a date and click OK.

4 3

Choose the recurring transaction from the list and then click Select. The transaction appears. If necessary, change the date, amount, account and other details. Click Record.
5

4 5

RECURRING TRANSACTIONS

1 8 3

Reminders
You can choose to be reminded on, or before, the scheduled date of a recurring transaction—see ‘Specify an alert option’ on page 180. If you use this option, the Reminders List window appears when you open your company file, when a recurring transaction is due (or overdue).

The options available in this window depend on the status of the selected recurring transaction (if more than one is showing). For example, if the selected transaction has a due date of today or is overdue, the Remind Tomorrow and Remind When Due buttons are not available. The reminder options are outlined below.
Click...
Skip This Period

If...
You don’t want to record the transaction this period. The reminder is removed from the list. You don’t want to record the transaction today, but want to be reminded tomorrow. You don’t want to record the transaction today, but want to be reminded when the transaction is next due. You want to record the transaction now.

Remind Tomorrow Remind When Due Record

184

C H A P T E R 1 1

TRANSACTIONS

12 Reports
There are many reports that can help you monitor your business. If the default set of reports do not meet your needs, you can design custom reports with the information and appearance you want, then save these custom reports to re‐use when required.

Producing reports
When you prepare reports, you can easily modify the format, content and appearance of a report, and export it to a different format. You can also create customised reports that suit the specific needs of your business and save them for future use.
If you want to... view a report print, send or save a report save a report in another file format
5

Click Display. The Report window appears.
TIP : Click Advanced to select more filters If you want to select more report filters before generating the report, click Advanced in the Index to Reports window.

See
6

below page 186 page 186

If you want to filter or modify the report, click the appropriate tab of the window. Each tab shows customisation options.
A

Displaying a report
1

B

Go to the Reports menu and choose Index to Reports. The Index to Reports window appears. Click the tab corresponding to the type of report you want to display. A list of report headings appears. Click the required report group and then click the report you want to display. Enter or select the date range or period for which you want to view the report. Note that this option is not available for some reports.
A Click the Filters tab to sort and filter the information that appears on the report. After selecting your filters, click Run Report to apply the changes. See ‘Filtering and sorting data in a report’ on page 187. Click the Insert/Modify tab to add or remove report fields, insert a picture or include additional text. See ‘Customising reports’ on page 187.

2

3

B

4

185

For detailed information about modifying reports, see ‘Customising reports’ on page 187.
7

B C

Click Save As to save the report as a custom report. For more information, see ‘Saving custom reports’ on page 193. Click Print to print the report.

Go to below.

Printing, saving and sending a report
1

With the report displayed, click the Print Preview tab and select options for how the report will appear when printed.

Printing and sending shortcuts In the toolbar at the top of the main Report window, click the Print icon ( ) to print the report, or click the save icon ( ) to save the report as a custom report.

Saving reports in other formats
You can save reports in various file formats so that they can be viewed and edited in other programs.
1 A B C

Display the report you want to save. For more information, see ‘Displaying a report’ on page 185. Go to the File menu and click Export and Send. A list of file format options appears in the right side of the window. Click a file format option:
File format
PDF (Portable Document Format) Microsoft Excel document

2

A B C
2

Select the margins, page orientation and page size.
3

To scale the size of the report, enter a percentage value in the Scale field. To fit the report to the page width, click Shrink One Page. Select how the report appears on screen while you are previewing it.

Description
If you save a report as a PDF file, the person who receives the report must have a PDF viewer, such as Adobe Reader, to view the report. If you save the report as an Excel document, the person who receives the document must have a program that can open Microsoft Excel spreadsheets, to view the document. Also, Microsoft Excel must aslo be installed on your computer to save files in this format. When you save a report using tab‐separated values, fields in the report are separated by tab characters. The file is then saved as a .txt file, which can be opened by most word processor and spreadsheet programs.

Go to the File menu and choose a printing, saving or sending option.

A B C

TSV (tab‐separated values) .txt file

A

Click Export and Send to export the report to a different format (such as Excel), or send the report via email. For detailed information about these options, see ‘Saving reports in other formats’ below.

186

C H A P T E R 1 2

REPORTS

File format
CSV (comma‐separated values) .txt file

Description
When you save a report using comma‐separated values, fields in the report are separated by commas. The file is then saved as a .txt file, which can be opened by most word processors and spreadsheet programs. You can view XPS files in Windows 7 or using Internet Explorer 7 or 8.

Depending on the report format you chose: the Export Report As window appears. Specify the file name and location, and then click Save. the report is displayed in the selected program (such as Excel). Save the report in the program as you normally would.

XPS (XML Paper Specification)

Customising reports
You can easily change the look and content of reports. For example, you can filter the type of information that appears, add additional columns and change the appearance. You can customise a report for once‐off use and print it immediately, or if you want to retain a report’s modifications, you can save it as a custom report. When you save a custom report, it appears in the My Custom Reports tab of the Index to Reports window. See ‘Saving custom reports’ on page 193. There are a number of customisation tasks you can perform.
Task
Filtering and sorting data in a report Adding text and graphics to a report Changing the report background Saving custom reports

Filtering and sorting data in a report
You can customise the information that appears in your reports by specifying the range of data that you want to include, and by applying report filters. For example, if you want to print a Customer Payments (Closed Invoices) report for a single customer for the months May to July, you can use filters to select just that customer and just those months. Once you filter the data, you can then select and sort the content of the report. For example, if you want the report to show the original purchase order number used by the customer, you can choose to show this data as well.

See below page 190 page 191 page 193

To set report filters
1

Open the report you want to view. See ‘Displaying a report’ on page 185. Click the Filters tab. The options that appear depend on the report being customised.

2

CUSTOMISING REPORTS

1 8 7

3

If you want to change the date range, enter or select a new date range or period in the Dates section.

Note that the options available in this window depend on the report you are viewing.

Note that date filters are unavailable for some reports.
4

In the Refinements section, select values for the various filters. The example below shows the options available for the Item List [Summary] report.

6

A

B

C

D

E

A B C

Click Run Report to apply filter changes. Click Sort to sort the order of information in the report. For more information, see ‘To sort report data’ on page 189. Select values for filters to limit the data that will be included in the report. Depending on the report you are producing, you may be able to filter by card type, custom lists, tax codes, amounts, etc. Click Additional Filters to set filtering options that are not visible in the tab. See step 5 below. Click to return all filters to their default values.
7

For each filter you want to apply to the report: a Click the tab for the type of record you want to filter the report by. b Select the values for any filters you want to apply. c Click OK. The Reports window reappears. d Click Refresh Report to apply the new filter settings. If you want to include the list of report filters used on the report: a Click Fields in the Insert/Modify tab. The Insert/Remove Fields window appears. b Select the Filters/Refinements option and click OK. The report filters appear in the report footer.

D E
5

If you want to apply more filtering options, click Additional Filters. The Additional Filters window appears.

188

C H A P T E R 1 2

REPORTS

To add report data
1 2

To sort report data
1

Click the Insert/Modify tab. Click Show/Hide. The Show/Hide Columns window appears.

Click the Filters tab, then click Sort. The Sort window appears.

a In the Sort by field, select the column you want to sort the

3

If you want to: add a column to your report, select it in the Available columns list and click Show. remove a column from your report, select it in the Columns in your report list and click Hide. Click OK. Your selections are displayed on the report.

4

To change the column order
If you want to change the column order, do one of the following: Click on a column heading, hold the mouse button down and drag the column to a new position. Click Order in the Insert/Modify tab and in the window that appears, select the column heading you want to reorder and then click the up and down arrows to change the column order.
2

report by, then select which order you want to sort that information in. For example, to sort a report alphabetically, by customer name, select Customer, then select Ascending in the adjacent field. b If you want to add additional sorting levels, click Add Sort Level, then select the type of information you want to sort by and the order you want to sort it in. For example, if the report was sorted alphabetically by customer, and you wanted to sort each customer by amount due, you would select Customer in the Sort by field, then Amount Due in the Then by field. Click OK. The report is sorted in the specified order.

CUSTOMISING REPORTS

1 8 9

Adding text and graphics to a report
You can refine the appearance of your reports by adding elements such as text boxes, graphics and data fields.

To format text in text boxes and data fields
1 2 3

In the Report window, click the Insert/Modify tab. Click to select the field containing the text you want to format. Use the options in the Field Properties section to select the required font, size, alignment, style and colour for the text in the field.

To add a data field
Data fields contain pre‐specified data, such as your company name or your ABN.
1 2

In the Report window, click the Insert/Modify tab. Click Fields. The Insert/Remove Fields window appears.

To add a shape or line
1 2

In the Report window, click the Insert/Modify tab. Click the Shapes/Lines button and select the type of shape or line you want to add to your report.

3

Select the fields you want to appear in your report, then click OK.

To add a text box
Text boxes are fields that contain text you enter yourself.
1 2 3

In the Report window, click the Insert/Modify tab. Click Text Box. Click and drag the mouse cursor in the area of the report you want the text box to appear. Double‐click in the text box and type the text you want to appear on your report. If you need to reposition or resize the element, see ‘To move, resize or rotate an element’ on page 192.
3

Click and drag the mouse cursor over the area of the report where you want the selected shape to appear. If you need to reposition or resize the element, see ‘To move, resize or rotate an element’ on page 192.

4

4

5

190

C H A P T E R 1 2

REPORTS

To add a picture or logo
1 2

5

In the Report window, click the Insert/Modify tab. Click Picture.

If you are adding a custom watermark, choose a picture or enter the watermark text and select the required formatting options.

3

Locate and select the picture file (bmp, jpg, gif, png or tif) and click Open. The picture appears in the report. If you need to reposition or resize the element, see ‘To move, resize or rotate an element’ on page 192.

4

Changing the report background
You can change the colour of a report background and insert watermarks.
1 2 3

6

Click OK.

Display the report. In the Reports window, click the Insert/Modify tab. If you want to change the page colour, click Page Colour and select the required background colour.

Common commands for editing report elements
You can modify elements you have added to a report, such as shapes, text boxes and images, using the options in the Insert/Modify tab. The following procedures describe some of the options.

To format an element
1 2

Select the element you want to format. Use the options in the Field Properties section to select the required background colour and border colour for the element.

4

If you want to add a watermark, click Watermark and choose one of the predefined watermarks, or select Custom Watermark. Depending on the element you select, different options may be available.

CUSTOMISING REPORTS

1 9 1

To move, resize or rotate an element
1 2

To arrange elements
1 2

Click to select the element you want to edit. Move the element by clicking and dragging it to a new position on your report.

Click the element once to select it. Click Arrange and then choose an option.

You can also set the element’s position manually by entering coordinates in the Placement fields in the Insert/Modify tab.
3

To align elements
1

Change the element’s size by clicking and dragging the anchor points on the corners of the element.

Select the elements you want to align. To do this, hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and click each element. Click Align and then choose an alignment option.

2

4

Rotate the shape by clicking the top anchor point and dragging the cursor. The element is rotated around one of its corners.

To undo changes
To undo the last change you made to the current report, click the undo button ( ).

192

C H A P T E R 1 2

REPORTS

To cut, copy or paste elements
1

Saving custom reports
If you plan to use a report’s filtering options and format again, you can customise the report once, save the changes and then re‐use the report whenever you want. Once saved, you can access your custom report from the My Custom Reports tab in the Index to Reports window.
1

Select the element and do one of the following to copy or cut: Use the clipboard buttons in the Insert/Modify tab to cut, copy and paste.

With the report displayed, click the save icon ( ) at the top of the window. The Save report as window appears. Enter a name and a brief description of the custom report. Click Save. Note that the report you have just saved is now listed in the My Custom Reports tab of the Index to Reports window. You can run the report again by selecting it from the My Custom Reports tab.

Right mouse‐click and choose Cut or Copy.
2

2 3

Click on the area of the report where you want to paste the element, then either: Use the clipboard buttons in the Insert/Modify tab to paste. Right mouse‐click and choose Paste.

To delete an element
Select the element and do one of the following: press DELETE on your keyboard. right mouse‐click and choose Delete.

Deleting a custom report If you want to remove a custom report, select the report in the My Custom Reports tab of the Index to Reports window and click the delete icon ( ).

CUSTOMISING REPORTS

1 9 3

194

C H A P T E R 1 2

REPORTS

13 Forms
You can print all the standard business forms you send to customers, employees and suppliers: quotations, order confirmations, invoices, packing slips, shipping labels, statements, bills, cheques, remittance advices, receipts, pay slips (AccountRight Plus only) and mailing labels. You can customise all of these forms to suit the needs of your business. Forms can be printed or emailed individually as you complete a transaction (for example, an invoice for a cash sale), or sent later, in batches.

Finding forms
Forms are accessed from the command centre of the associated transaction. For example, sales forms can be accessed from the Sales command centre.
Command Centre Type of Form
Statements

Function
Print/Email Statements Print Receipts Print/Email Purchase Orders Print Cheques Print/Email Remittance Advices Print Paycheques

To find forms
1

Receipts Purchases Purchase forms Cheques (payable) Remittance Advices Payroll [AccountRight Plus only] Payment summaries Pay slips Card File Mailing labels Personalised letters Cheques

Go to the appropriate command centre, for example, Sales for invoice forms. Find the type of form you want and click the relevant command centre function. See the following table.
Command Centre
Banking

2

Type of Form
Cheques Receipts Remittance Advices

Function
Print Cheques Print Receipts Print/Email Remittance Advices Print/Email Invoices Print/Email Invoices Print/Email Invoices

Print Payment Summaries Print/Email Pay Slips Print Mailing Labels Create Personalised Letters

Sales

Invoice forms Packing slips Shipping Labels

195

Sending forms
You can send forms when you record a transaction, or later, in a batch.

To email or save a form
1

Sending forms when you record a transaction
You can print, email, or save forms as you enter a transaction.

In the transaction window (for example, the Sales window), click Send To. A list of sending options appears.

To print a form
1

In the transaction window (for example, the Sales window), click Print. A list of print options appears.

2

Choose a sending option: Email—Send the form as a PDF attachment by email. Disk—Save the form to your computer or removable media as a PDF. Note that the transaction will be recorded before the form is sent.

2

Choose a print option: Default form—If you have specified a default form in the customer or supplier card, this form appears as an option. Otherwise, the Pre‐Printed […] option appears. Select Another Form—Click to choose a different form or a customised form from a list. Preview—Preview the form in a new window. Note that the transaction will be recorded before the form is printed.

TIP : Automatically print, email, or save You can set up your preferences so that you can automatically print, email, or save sales and purchases when you record them. To do this, select the required option in the Sales or the Purchases tab of the Preferences window.

Sending forms in a batch
Instead of printing each form in the transaction window when you record it, you can select to print or email the forms later, in a batch. To do this, select To be Emailed, To be Printed or To be Printed and Emailed in the […] Delivery Status field in a transaction window.

196

C H A P T E R 1 3

FORMS

For example: Sales window

Purchases window

Spend Money window

3

If the field is available for the form you are sending, make a selection in the [...] Type field. For example, if you want to send item invoices, select Item. If you want to view the details of a transaction, click the zoom arrow ( ) next to it. If you want to change the form stationery or filter the list of forms, click Advanced Filters. For more information, see ‘Customising how you send form batches’ on page 198. Click in the select column ( ) next to a transaction you want to send. If you want to send all the transactions, click the icon in the heading of the select column. If you are printing forms: a Type the number of copies you want to print in the Print [...] Copies field. b (Sales and purchases only) If you also want to print packing slips or mailing labels, type the number of copies in the Packing Slips and Labels fields. c Click Print. The forms will be sent to your printer. If you are emailing forms: a If you want to change a recipient’s email address, select their name and click the down arrow next to the Email Address field and select another address from the card. Alternatively, type the address in the Email Address field.

4

5

After you have completed a number of transactions, say, the invoices for the day, you can print or email a transaction batch. You also can choose which forms to print by applying selection criteria. For example, you can choose to print customer statements only if the balance of the customer’s account is not zero.

6

To send forms in a batch
1

7

Click the command centre function for the forms you want to send. For example, if you want to send sales invoices, go to the Sales command centre and click Print/Email Invoices. Depending on the type of form you are sending, you have the option to print or email. Click the relevant tab for how you want to send the forms: To Be Printed To Be Emailed

2

8

SENDING FORMS

1 9 7

b Enter a subject title and message or accept the default title and

3

message.
NOTE : You can update the default email title and message for all emailed forms To do this, click Email Defaults. The Email Defaults window appears. Click the tab corresponding to the form you are preparing. Make the required changes in the window and click OK.

If you want to filter the transactions using other criteria, select from the options in the middle section of the window. For example, enter a date range or reference number range. Select the stationery

4

In the Selected Form for [...] field, select the stationery you want to use when you print or email your forms. Several stationery choices are available, depending on the type of form you are sending.
Stationery
Pre‐printed

c Click Send Email. The forms will be emailed as PDF attachments.

Customising how you send form batches
You can filter the list of transaction forms you are sending and change the stationery you use before you send forms. You can do this in the Advanced Filters window.
1

Select this for...
Select the preprinted stationery to print on paper that already contains lines, columns and headings. The preprinted stationery is designed to match most commonly used forms provided by third‐party forms suppliers. Note that this type of stationery is not suitable for emailing forms. Select plain‐paper stationery if you want to print on blank paper. Lines, columns and headings are automatically printed with the form’s information. Select a customised stationery form if you want to print or email a form you have already customised. See ‘Customising forms’ on page 199.

In the To Be Printed or To Be Emailed tab of the Review [...] Before Delivery window, click Advanced Filters. The Advanced Filters window appears.
Plain paper

Select the transactions
2

Select the criteria by which you want to filter the list of transactions. You can specify a transaction type, and select all cards or a specific card.

Customised

TIP : Test the printing alignment If you are using continuous‐feed paper or pre‐printed stationery and you want to test the alignment of the information that will be printed using sample data, click Print Alignment Form.

5

When you have finished making your selections in the Advanced Filters window, click OK. The Review [...] Before Delivery window reappears, displaying records according to your filter criteria. Click Print or Email to send the forms.

6

198

C H A P T E R 1 3

FORMS

Customising forms
You can customise the look and content of most forms in AccountRight (except payment summaries [AccountRight Plus only] and BAS forms). You can also change the form size, add text labels, draw lines and boxes, insert graphics, move fields, and more. Then you can save your customised stationery so that you can select it when you send a form. The following describes the tasks involved in customising a form:
To do this…
Displaying a form Setting form properties Adding and editing form elements Saving customised forms Exporting and importing customised forms
4

Click the form, then click Customise. The selected Form window appears.
A B C D E

See below page 200 page 201 page 206 page 206 A B C File menu Customise tab Print Preview Customise options Form body View printing and saving options. This is the main tab for customising your form. You can add fields, format text and select table layouts. View your form as it will appear printed. Your form is instantly updated in this tab as you customise. This area of the window is where you make selections for customising your form. Select and modify form elements in this section of the window. Select an element, then view the properties in the Customise tab.

Displaying a form
1

D E

Go to the Setup menu and choose Customise Forms. The Customise Forms window appears. Click the tab corresponding to the type of form you want to customise. Select a form group from the list to display a list of forms associated with that group. For example, select the Item group in the Invoices tab.

2

3

NOTE : Cheques have two parts A cheque form has two parts: the cheque itself and the stub. You customise the cheque and the stub separately. For more information, see ‘Customising cheques’ on page 203.

CUSTOMISING FORMS

1 9 9

Setting form properties
You can set properties that apply to the whole form, such as background colour and page size.

2

If you want to change the page colour, click Page Colour and select the required background colour.

To set page margins, orientation and page size
1 2 3

Open the form you want to customise. Click the Print Preview tab. Set the page margins, orientation and page size.
3

If you want to add a watermark, click Watermark and choose one of the predefined watermarks, or select Custom Watermark. If you are adding a custom watermark, choose a picture or enter the watermark text and select the required formatting options.

4

To edit the page background
Use the Page Background options in the Customise tab to change the background of a form.

1

Open the form you want to customise.
5

Click OK.

200

C H A P T E R 1 3

FORMS

Adding and editing form elements
There are a number of different elements you can add to your forms, including images, data fields, lines and shapes. To make working with form elements easier, you can use the form gridlines to help you align elements on your form.

Adding data and text fields to forms
You can add data fields to a form, and then change their properties (such as font and colour) using the Customisation tab in the Form window.

To use form gridlines
1 2

Open the form you want to add or edit elements in. In the Customise tab, click Grid Options. The Grid Options window appears.

To add a data field to a form
1 2

Open the form you want to add data fields to. In the Customise tab, click Fields. The Insert Fields window appears.

3 4

Select the spacing you want between gridlines. If you want to see the gridlines as you edit the form, click the Display grid on screen option. If you want form elements to always align to the gridlines, select the Snap to grid option. Click OK. ‘Adding data and text fields to forms’ below ‘Adding tables to forms’ on page 202 ‘Adding shapes and images to forms’ on page 203 ‘Common commands for editing form elements’ on page 204.
3 4

5

6

For detailed information about working with elements, see:

Select the fields you require by clicking in the column next to them. Select where you want the field to appear, for example, on every page, or just at the start or end of the form.

ADDING AND EDITING FORM ELEMENTS

2 0 1

5

When you have finished making your selections, click OK. The selected data fields appear on the form. Move the field to the required position by clicking and dragging it, or entering placement coordinates in the Customise tab.

Adding tables to forms
Tables contain transaction information such as line items or tax summary information. Different table options are available for each form type.

6

To edit a data field
1 2

To add a table to a form
1 2

Select the data field in the Form window. Edit the properties of the data field using the options in the Customise tab. Move or resize the field as required. See ‘To move, resize or rotate elements’ on page 204.

Open the form you want to add a table to. In the Customise tab, click Insert Table and choose the type of table you want to use from the list. The table appears on the form.

3

To edit a table
1

To add a text field to a form
1 2 3

Open the form you want to add text to. In the Customise tab, click Text Box. Click and drag the mouse cursor over the area of the form where you want the text field to appear. Double‐click in the text field and type the text you want to appear.
2

If you want to move a table, select it, then click on the highlighted edge and drag it to a new position. Alternatively, you can enter placement coordinates in the Customise tab. If you want to add or remove columns from a table: a Select the table. b In the Customise tab, click Table Layout, then choose Show/Hide Columns. The Show/Hide Columns window appears. c If you want to: add a column to your form, select it in the Available columns list and click Show. remove a column from your form, select it in the Columns in your table list and click Hide. d Click OK. The columns appear in your table. If you want to change the column order, click and hold a column heading and drag it to a new position. If you want to show alternate rows as shaded in the table, click Table Layout, then choose Show Row Shading.

4

To edit a text field
1 2

Select the text field in the Form window. Edit the properties of the field using the options in the Customise tab. Edit the text by typing in the active text field. Move or resize the field as required. See ‘To move, resize or rotate elements’ on page 204.

3 4

3

4

202

C H A P T E R 1 3

FORMS

Adding shapes and images to forms
You can also add graphic elements to a form: rectangles to visually group elements, lines to separate elements, icons, logos, photos, location maps and other graphic elements. You do this in the Customise tab.

3

Edit the properties of the shape using the options in the Customise tab.
To…
change the colour of a line or shape border change the thickness of a line or shape border change the fill colour of a shape

Do this…
Click the shape border icon ( ) and choose from a theme colour or standard colour. Click the shape border icon ( ), choose Border Width, and then choose a width. Click the shape fill icon ( ) and choose from a theme colour or standard colour.

To add an image
1 2 3

Open the form you want to customise. In the Customise tab, click Picture. The Open window appears. Locate and select the picture file (bmp, jpg, gif, png or tif) and click Open. The picture appears in the form. Move, resize or rotate the image as required. For more information, see ‘To move, resize or rotate elements’ on page 204.

Customising cheques
Cheques are made up of two forms—the cheque and the stub. The stub usually displays a summary of the information that appears on the cheque. You can customise both the cheque and each type of cheque stub in one window, by selecting the stub layout. Stub layouts include: Regular—This layout is assigned to cheques recorded in the Spend Money window. Payable—This layout is assigned to cheques recorded in the Pay Bills window. Refund—This layout is assigned to cheques recorded in the Settle Returns & Credits window. [AccountRight Plus only] Paycheque—This layout is assigned to cheques recorded in the Pay Employees window.
TIP : Print two cheque stubs If your business prefers to produce two stubs for each cheque, you should select the Laser Cheque layout in the Selected Form for Cheque field in the Advanced Filters window when you print your cheque.

4

To add a shape or line
1 2

Open the form you want to add a line to. In the Customise tab, click Shapes/Line and choose the required shape or line. Click and hold the mouse cursor at the location on the form where you want the shape or line to appear, then drag the cursor to draw it.

3

To edit a shape or line
1 2

Select the shape or line. Move, resize or rotate the element as required. For more information, see ‘To move, resize or rotate elements’ on page 204.

ADDING AND EDITING FORM ELEMENTS

2 0 3

To customise cheques
1

To move, resize or rotate elements
1 2

Display the cheque form you want to customise. For more information, see ‘Displaying a form’ on page 199. Click the Customise tab. In the Layout field, choose the layout type you want to customise.

Click to select the element you want to edit. Move the element by clicking and dragging it to a new position on your report.

2 3

You can also set the element’s position manually by entering coordinates in the Placement fields in the Customise tab. For example, if you want to customise the payment section of the cheque, choose Cheque. Otherwise, choose another layout (Regular, Payable, Refund) as described above.
4

Make your changes to each layout as required. For more information, see ‘Adding and editing form elements’ on page 201. When you are finished, save the form.
3

5

Change the element’s size by clicking and dragging the anchor points on the corners of the element.

TIP : Test your customised cheques You should print an alignment cheque to make sure your new form prints correctly. Go to the Banking command centre and click Print Cheques. Click Advanced Filters, select your customised cheque in the Selected Form for Cheque field and then click Print Alignment Form.

4

Common commands for editing form elements
You can modify elements you have added to a form, such as shapes, text boxes and images, using the options in the Customise tab. The following procedures describe some of the options.

Rotate the shape by clicking the top anchor point and dragging the cursor. The element is rotated around one of its corners.

Note that you cannot rotate tables.

204

C H A P T E R 1 3

FORMS

To cut, copy or paste elements
1

To arrange elements
1 2

Select the element and do one of the following to copy or cut: Use the clipboard buttons in the Customise tab to cut, copy and paste.

Click the element once to select it. Click Arrange and then choose an option.

Right mouse‐click and choose Cut or Copy.
2

Click on the area of the form where you want to paste the element, then either: Use the clipboard buttons in the Customise tab to paste. Right mouse‐click and choose Paste.

To align elements
1

Select the elements you want to align. To do this, hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and click each element. Click Align and then choose an alignment option.

2

To delete elements
Select the element and do one of the following: press DELETE on your keyboard. right mouse‐click and choose Delete.

To undo changes
To undo the last change you made to the current form, click the undo button ( ).

ADDING AND EDITING FORM ELEMENTS

2 0 5

Saving customised forms b If you modified an existing custom form, do not change the

Preview the form before saving Click the Print Preview tab to view the form as it will appear printed.
TIP :

default information in the window.
2

Click Save. The Form window reappears. The form will appear under the group of forms that the form was based on. For example, if you created a new form based on an existing item sales invoice, your form will appear under the Items group of the Invoices tab.

1

When you have finished customising your form, go to the File menu and click Save As. The Save Form As window appears: a If you created a new customised form, enter a name and a description for the form.

Exporting and importing customised forms
You can incorporate customised forms created in a company file into other company files. The process used to share customised forms in this way is called exporting and importing customised forms. The types of customised forms you can export and import are cheques, paycheques, invoices, statements, purchase orders, receipts, remittance advices, pay slips and mailing labels.
5

Select the type of customised forms you want to export. To do this, click on the first form type you want to export in the Available Items column and then click Add. The form will appear in the Selected Items column. If you want to export all available form types, click Add All. Click Export. The export process begins. When the export process finishes, the Conclusion step of the assistant appears showing the results of the export process, such as the number of forms exported and the number not exported. You can open the folder that you have exported your customised forms to by clicking a link to that folder. You can also view more information about the export results by clicking the link to the export log file.

6 7

To export customised forms
1

Go to the Setup menu and choose Export Customised Forms. The Export Customised Forms assistant appears. Click Browse and select the folder you want to export customised forms to. Select the form types you want to export. Click Next. The Select forms to export step of the Export Customised Forms assistant appears.
8

2

3 4

Click Finish to close the Export Customised Forms assistant.

206

C H A P T E R 1 3

FORMS

To import customised forms
1

Go to the Setup menu and choose Import Customised Forms. The Import Customised Forms assistant appears. Click Browse to locate and select the folder containing the customised forms you want to import. Select an option to handle duplicate customised forms. If you: want to replace any existing customised forms, select replace the existing form with the imported form. don’t want to replace any existing customised forms, select reject the form being imported. Click Next. If you didn’t make a backup of your company file prior to starting the import process, click Back up to make one now. Click Import. The import process starts. When the import process finishes, the Conclusion step of the assistant appears showing the results of the import process, such as the number of forms imported and the number not imported. You can view more information about the import results by clicking the link to the import log file.

2

3

4

5 6

7

Click Finish to close the Import Customised Forms assistant. You can select customised forms that were successfully imported from the relevant tab of the Customise Forms window, from transaction windows and from the relevant Advanced Filters window.

EXPORTING AND IMPORTING CUSTOMISED FORMS

2 0 7

208

C H A P T E R 1 3

FORMS

14 Contact management
The Card File is a repository of contact records, known as cards, that you can create for your customers, suppliers, employees and personal contacts. A card lets you store contact information and enables you to track and analyse the transaction history for each individual and business.

Creating a card
You need to create a card for an individual or business if you want to perform any of the following tasks: record sales and track the amounts owed to you record purchases and track the amounts owing to suppliers print mailing labels print personalised letters record contact details. When you set up your company file, you may have created cards for your customers and suppliers. In addition to these cards, you can create employee cards, and personal cards for your friends and relatives.
If you want to create a card for… a customer a supplier an employee in: • • AccountRight Plus AccountRight Standard page 110 below below
3

To add an employee or a personal card
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click New. The Card Information window appears.

2

See page 61 page 83

a friend or relative

Select the required card type from the Card Type list.

209

4 5 6

Type the name for the card and press TAB. If you want to, complete the other fields in the Profile tab. Click the Card Details tab. In this tab, you can: add a picture—see ‘Card pictures’ on page 223. enter a card ID—these are useful for grouping your cards. See ‘Card identification codes’ on page 223. use custom lists and fields—you can record additional information about the card. See ‘Customising cards’ on page 222.

7

[AccountRight Plus only] If you are creating an employee card and you want to enter details about how you pay this employee: a Click the Payment Details tab. b Select either Cash, Cheque or Electronic from the Payment Method list. c If you selected Electronic as the payment method, complete the details in the fields that appear. When you have finished entering the card details, click OK to save the card and close the Card Information window.

8

Keeping in touch with your contacts
There are a number of features you can use to help you stay in touch with your customers, suppliers, employees and personal contacts. You can create personalised letters from templates, send emails, enter contact log entries and create mailing labels. Printing personalised letters using Microsoft Word and OfficeLink OfficeLink is a feature that automates the process of merging contact information stored in your company file with a Microsoft Word template (a .dot file). The following table summarises the templates provided with your software.
Use this template...
Apology.dot

Personalised letters
You can create personalised letters (also known as mail‐merge letters) for any of your contacts. A personalised letter is a document template that contains standard text as well as fields that can be automatically filled with data stored in your company file. Personalised letters are useful when you need to send the same letter to several contacts. For example, you may want to send several slow‐paying customers a payment reminder letter. Instead of entering each contact’s information on the letters yourself, you can set up a letter template that contains the text you want to appear, and insert data fields that automatically fill in the contact’s name, address and the amount owing.

When you want to... apologise for a problem your company has caused for a customer, and to assure the customer that the problem will be addressed. let your customers know that items they’ve ordered are on backorder and will be shipped as soon as possible. write your own letter. notify customers whose payments have bounced. remind customers whose accounts have become overdue to make a payment.

Backordr.dot

Blank.dot BOUNCED.dot Coll_1st.dot

210

C H A P T E R 1 4

C O N T A C T M A N A G E M E N T

Use this template...
Coll_2nd.dot Coll_3rd.dot Coll_fin.dot

3

When you want to... express greater urgency than Coll_1st.dot and request that your customer contact you immediately. encourage customers who have overdue payments to make a payment before their credit history is damaged. advise customers that you will turn their account over to a collection agency if payment isn’t made within a specified number of days. enable your customers to formally apply for credit. create a fax cover page. This page includes room for a memo. reply to customers who have questioned an amount on their monthly statement. This letter indicates that you are looking into the matter and that you will credit the customer’s account for the amount in question while the matter is investigated. print a superannuation choice form to provide to an employee. notify an employee that you are passing on personal details to their superannuation fund. thank new customers for their business.
4 5

Click in the select column next to each contact to whom you would like to send a personalised letter. Click Mail Merge. The Select from List window appears. Select the template you would like to use and then click Use Template. Your letter appears in Microsoft Word, and depending on the template you have selected, you will be prompted to enter additional information, such as your name and title.

6

Credit Application.dot FaxCover.dot Resolved.dot

Edit the letters as required and then print them using Microsoft Word.
TIP : If you want to send letters to customers with unpaid invoices. Display the Accounts Receivable tab of the To Do List window and click the Select column for each customer to whom you want to send a letter. Click Mail Merge to select a collection letter template, which includes information such as the customer’s outstanding balance.

Super Choice Form.dot Super employee privacy.dot ThankYou.dot

To print a personalised letter using other word processors
To use a mail‐merge letter template created in a word processor other than Microsoft Word, you export the contact data out of your company file and then merge that data with the letter.
1

You can edit these templates and create new ones using the mail‐merge features of Microsoft Word. For information about working with mail‐merge templates, see Microsoft Word Help.

Go to the Card File command centre and click Create Personalised Letters. The Review Cards Before Exporting window appears. If you want to, filter your contact list, for example, to only show contacts located within specific postcodes. To do this, click Advanced Filters and enter your filtering criteria. Click in the select column next to each contact to whom you would like to send a personalised letter. Click Disk. A window with a list of file formats appears. Choose either the Tab‐Delimited Text File or Comma‐Separated Text File option.

2

To print a personalised letter using Microsoft Word
1

3

Go to the Card File command centre and click Create Personalised Letters. The Review Cards Before Exporting window appears. If you want to, filter the contact list, for example, to only show contacts located within specific postcodes. To do this, click Advanced Filters and enter your filtering criteria.

4 5

2

KEEPING IN TOUCH WITH YOUR CONTACTS

2 1 1

3

Check what file formats your word processing software requires Most word processing software allows mail‐merge data to be tab‐delimited (data is separated by tabs) or comma‐separated. If your software requires a specific format, choose that format at this step.
NOTE :

From the Selected Form for Mailing Label list, select the form template that best matches the size and layout of your labels and label sheets. Make any other selections in the Advanced Filters window as required (for example, you may want to filter your contacts list to only those living within a specific postcode) and then click OK. Click in the select column next to each contact for whom you would like to print a mailing label. Click Print.

4

6 7

Click Save. The Save As window appears. If necessary, change the text file’s name and location and then click Save. The text file containing your contacts’ details is saved at the location you specified.

5

6

8

Use your word processing software to merge the data contained within the text file with a letter template that you have created.

The contact log
The contact log enables you to keep a detailed log of all the phone calls you and your contacts make to each other, and any other type of correspondence. For example, let’s say that you call a customer regarding an overdue invoice. You could create a log entry that records the date of the phone call, a summary of the outcome, and the date you will want to recontact them by if their invoice is still outstanding. When a customer or supplier calls, you can use the contact log to retrieve a complete history of your business relationship with that contact.

Mailing labels
If you print and send cheques, quotes, orders, invoices, statements or personalised letters you may also want to print mailing labels that you can stick on the envelopes. The Print Mailing Labels function in the Card File command centre prints your contact’s name and address on sheets of adhesive mailing labels. You customise the way mailing labels are printed, including their size, the number of labels per sheet and the margins. For information about customising mailing label forms, see ‘Customising forms’ on page 199.

To create a contact log entry
1

To print mailing labels
2 1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Contact Log. The View Contact Log window appears. Enter the contact you are creating the log entry for in the Name list. Click New. The Contact Log Entry window appears.

Go to the Card File command centre and click Print Mailing Labels. The Review Labels Before Printing window appears.
TIP : Print invoices and labels simultaneously When you print a batch of invoices using the Print/Email Invoices function in the Sales command centre, you can choose to print a label for each invoice.

3

2

Click Advanced Filters. The Advanced Filters window appears.

212

C H A P T E R 1 4

C O N T A C T M A N A G E M E N T

4

Complete the Contact Log Entry window as described in the following table.

To automatically create contact log entries
You can choose to automatically create log entries each time you record a sale, purchase or banking transaction. The log entry contains basic information about the transaction, such as the invoice number, cheque number and the amount.
1

Go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. The Preferences window appears. Click the Banking tab. If you want to create an automatic contact log entry for each payment you record, select the Make Contact Log Entry for Every Cheque option. If you want to create an automatic contact log entry for each receipt you record, select the Make Contact Log Entry for Every Deposit option. Click the Sales tab. If you want to create an automatic contact log entry for each sale you record (including quotes and orders), select the Make Contact Log Entry for Every Sale option. Click the Purchases tab. If you want to create an automatic contact log entry for each purchase you record (including quotes and orders), select the Make Contact Log Entry for Every Purchase option. Click OK.

2 3

Name Contact

The name of the contact. To view the contact’s card, click the zoom arrow. Type the name of the person that is associated with this entry. For example, you can record the name of the person you spoke to on the phone. If you have specified a contact person in the contact’s card, you can click the down‐arrow to choose that person. Type the date you spoke to or wrote to the contact. If you are simply entering an appointment or reminder, you can enter today’s date. Enter any information you want to save about the conversation or follow‐up. If you want to record the time you spend speaking to the contact, or working on a particular task related to the entry, type the time in hours and minutes. For example, if you spend 15 minutes, enter 15. If you spend 1 hour and 15 minutes, enter 1:15. If you want to be reminded to follow up the contact, type or select the date you want to be reminded to recontact them. The reminder will appear in the Contact Alert tab of the To Do List on this date. For more information, see ‘Reviewing your contact information’ on page 224. View all contact log entries for the selected contact. Open another Contact Log entry window to create a new entry for this or another contact.

4

5 6

Date

7 8

Notes Elapsed Time

9

To edit a contact log entry
1

Recontact Date

Go to the Card File command centre and click Contact Log. The View Contact Log window appears. In the Name field, enter the contact for whom you want to view the contact log. Select the entry and click Edit, or click the zoom arrow next to it. Make your changes and click Record.

2

3 4

Log New

KEEPING IN TOUCH WITH YOUR CONTACTS

2 1 3

Other ways to keep in touch
To send an email message to a contact
1

To access a contact’s website
1 2 3 4

Make sure your computer is connected to the internet. Open the card for the contact whose website you want to view. In the Profile tab, click Website. Your contact’s website will appear in your web browser.

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click the zoom arrow next to the name of the contact you want to email. The Card Information window appears. In the Location field, select the address to which you want to send the email. For example, you may have a different email address stored for this contact under Address 2. Click Email. The Email window appears. The Email Address field displays the name and email address from the card. You can change these if you wish.

2

3

View a contact on a map
To view a contact’s location on a map
1 2 3

4

Make sure your computer is connected to the internet. Open the card contact whose location you want to view. Right mouse‐click and choose Contact Card, then: View in Google Maps TM. Your web browser window will appear, showing the location of your contact on a street map. View Directions. Your web browser window will appear, displaying a street map with directions from your primary business location to the contact’s address.

5

Enter a subject and message, and then click Send. The email is sent via your email program’s outbox. Send the file from your email program as you normally do.

Grouping your contacts
You can group and sort your contacts according to common attributes by assigning identifiers to their cards and the appropriate attributes from custom lists you have defined. Grouping contacts using these features makes it easier for you to: filter reports to show only information specific to a group of contacts identify which of your contacts have a particular attribute filter lists so that it’s easier for you to send a batch of personalised letters, customer statements and other forms to a group of contacts.

Identifiers
Identifiers are one‐letter labels you can assign to cards. When you create reports or view card lists, you can limit the information to a particular group of cards by specifying the identifiers that you’ve assigned to those cards.

214

C H A P T E R 1 4

C O N T A C T M A N A G E M E N T

For example, say you want to be able to identify all clients who are not‐for‐profit organisations. You could assign them identifier N and when printing sales reports you can choose to filter the report to show only customers who have that identifier. You can also assign multiple identifiers to a card. For example, say you assign O to your overseas customers and W to your wholesale customers. If you have overseas wholesale customers you can assign them the OW identifiers. You can then filter a report to only show your overseas wholesale customers by specifying the OW identifiers in the Filters tab of the Report window.

Custom lists
You can set up lists of predefined attributes and assign the appropriate attributes to your cards. By assigning attributes from a custom list to your cards, you are able to group your contacts to a greater degree than is possible with identifiers. For example, you could assign all your wholesale customers the W identifier. If you also set up a custom list containing each of your sales territories, and allocate those customers to the appropriate territory, you can then filter reports to only show information about wholesale customers who are within a particular sales territory.

To define identifiers
1

Go to the Lists menu and choose Identifiers. The Identifiers window appears. It provides a field for each letter of the alphabet. Enter a description for as many identifiers as you want and click OK.

To name a custom list
1

2

To assign identifiers to a card
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click the zoom arrow next to the card you want to edit. The Card Information window appears. Click the Card Details tab. Click Identifiers. The Select Identifiers window appears. Click next to the identifiers you want to assign to the card. Click OK.

Go to the Lists menu, choose Custom Lists & Field Names, and then choose the card type for which you want to create a custom list, for example, Customers. The Custom List and Field Names window appears.

2

3 4 5 6

2

Enter names for the lists you want to create for the card type you selected. For example, enter ‘Sales territory’. Click OK. The names you have entered will now appear in the Card Details tab of the Card Information window.

3

GROUPING YOUR CONTACTS

2 1 5

To create a custom list entry
1

To assign a custom list entry to a card
1

Go to the Lists menu, choose Custom Lists and then choose the card type for which you want to create a custom list entry, for example, Customers. The Custom Lists window appears.

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click the zoom arrow next to the card you want to edit. The Card Information window appears. Click the Card Details tab. Enter the list entry you want to assign to the card next to each custom list field. For example, select Inner east from the Sales territory field.

2

3 4

2

Select the custom list for which you want to create an entry. For example, Sales territory. Click New. The Custom List Information window appears. Type the custom list entry name (for example, enter ‘City centre’, ‘Inner east’, etc.) and then click OK. The entry appears in the Custom Lists window.

3 4

216

C H A P T E R 1 4

C O N T A C T M A N A G E M E N T

Synchronising cards with Microsoft Outlook
You can synchronise your AccountRight cards and your Microsoft Outlook contacts. If your business uses Microsoft Outlook for email and to manage contact information, this will make it easier for you to keep both your AccountRight cards and your Outlook contacts up to date. Your AccountRight cards are your customer, supplier, employee and personal cards stored in your AccountRight card file. Your Outlook contacts are your contacts stored in your Microsoft Outlook address book. When you synchronise your AccountRight cards and your Outlook contacts, you can: make the details in your Outlook contacts match the details in your AccountRight cards (by exporting your AccountRight cards to your Outlook contacts) or make the details in your AccountRight cards match the details in your Outlook contacts (by importing your Outlook contacts to your AccountRight cards). When you synchronise, the following details are imported or exported: company name or contact name, address details, email and web addresses and telephone, fax and mobile numbers. If you are exporting your AccountRight cards to your Outlook contacts, you can also include your Card File custom fields in the export. When you do this, you specify how your custom fields match the Categories, Anniversary, Birthday or Spouse’s name fields in your Outlook contacts. For information on setting up Card File custom fields see ‘Custom card fields’ on page 222. Synchronisation update rules As part of the synchronisation process, you choose whether or not you want to update the details for existing contacts. To do this, you select from one of the following update rules.
Rule
Update existing contacts

Description
New contacts are added and existing contacts are updated. You will not be prompted to confirm updates. New contacts are added but existing contacts are not updated. You are not prompted to confirm any updates. New contacts are added and you are prompted to confirm updates. If you select this rule, you specify how you want to deal with the discrepancies between the details in your AccountRight cards and the details in your Outlook contacts. You can: • review and update the details for each contact • select to update all contacts (if you select this option, you will not be prompted to confirm any further updates) or • skip an update for a contact and leave the details for the contact unchanged.

Do not update existing contacts Ask me to confirm updates

NOTE : Microsoft Vista requires administrator access privileges Before you can synchronise cards and Outlook contacts on Windows Vista, you need to log on as an administrator.

SYNCHRONISING CARDS WITH MICROSOFT OUTLOOK

2 1 7

Exporting your AccountRight cards to your Outlook contacts
When you export your AccountRight cards to your Outlook contacts, your contacts are saved by default to group contact folders. For example, Customer contacts are saved to a folder called MYOB Customers.

2

Click Synchronise Cards. The Synchronise Cards window appears.

3

Click Next. The Import and Export Options window appears.

If you want to synchronise your Outlook contacts and your Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) or mobile device, your contacts must be saved to the Microsoft Outlook default contacts folder. When you export your AccountRight cards to your Outlook contacts, you can select an option to save your contacts to the default contacts folder (see step 7 on page 219).
CAUTION : Back up your Outlook contacts Exporting your AccountRight cards to your Outlook contacts will change the details recorded in your Outlook contacts. Back up your Outlook contacts before synchronising. See your Microsoft Outlook documentation for instructions.

To export your AccountRight cards to your Outlook contacts
1

4

Select the card types that you want to synchronise.
NOTE : You can synchronise cards from any of the Cards List views (Customer, Supplier, Employee and Personal) The default card type selected varies according to the tab you are on when you click Synchronise Cards.

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears.

5

If you want to include inactive cards in your synchronisation, select the Export inactive cards option. For information about inactive cards, see ‘Inactivating or reactivating a record’ on page 168. Select a synchronisation rule from the Update Rules list. For more information, see ‘Synchronisation update rules’ on page 217.

6

218

C H A P T E R 1 4

C O N T A C T M A N A G E M E N T

7

If you want to save your AccountRight cards to your Outlook contacts default folder (you need to do this to synchronise your Outlook contacts and your PDA or mobile device), or if you want to export your AccountRight custom fields to your Outlook contacts, click Settings. The Settings window appears.

9

When the export process is complete, the Synchronisation results window appears.

10

Review the results.
Summary field x contacts added x contacts updated

a If you want to synchronise your Outlook contacts and your PDA

or mobile device, select the Synchronise cards using the default Outlook contacts folder option. b If you want to export your AccountRight custom fields to your Outlook contacts, select a matching Outlook contact field for Custom Field 1, Custom Field 2 and Custom Field 3. c Click OK. The Import and Export Options window reappears.
8

Description
The number of new contacts added to your Outlook contacts. The number of Outlook contacts updated to match the details in your AccountRight cards. Note that if you selected the Do not update existing contacts rule, updated duplicate contacts will always be 0. The number of cards you skipped (if you selected the Ask me to confirm updates rule) or the number of duplicate contacts (if you selected the Do not update existing contacts rule). Duplicate contacts have not been updated to match your AccountRight cards. Note that if you selected the Update existing contacts rule, rejected cards will always be 0.

Click Export. The export process starts. Depending on the version of Microsoft Outlook you use, and the synchronisation update rules you set, the following messages and windows may appear:
If this appears...
Microsoft warning message

x contacts skipped, x contacts rejected

...do this
Select a period for your AccountRight software to access your Outlook contacts:
1 2 3

Select the Allow access for option. Select a period from 1 minute to 10 minutes. Click Yes.
11

If you want to view the log file that details the exported records, click the link in the Synchronisation results window.

Confirm Update Confirm Add

Select how you want to deal with each update. Select whether you want to add the card to your Outlook contacts or skip it.

SYNCHRONISING CARDS WITH MICROSOFT OUTLOOK

2 1 9

Importing your Outlook contacts to AccountRight
You can import your Outlook contacts to your AccountRight cards from either the default contacts folder, or from group contact folders created for each AccountRight card type. However, before you import your Outlook contacts, you need to identify each contact as either a customer, supplier, employee or personal contact.
NOTE : Blank fields in your Outlook contacts are not included in the import If a field in your Outlook contact is blank but the corresponding field in your AccountRight card is complete, this field will be skipped during the import process. This ensures that blank fields don’t overwrite contact details recorded in your AccountRight cards.

Importing from group contacts folders You need to save your contacts to group contact folders labelled MYOB Customer, MYOB Supplier, MYOB Employee and MYOB Personal. For instructions on how to set up group contact folders in your Outlook contacts, refer to your Microsoft Outlook documentation.

Before importing your Outlook contacts Check that the details recorded in your Outlook contacts are up to date and entered in the correct field.

Importing from the default contacts folder If you want to import your contacts to AccountRight cards from the default Outlook contacts folder, enter the card type for each contact in the Categories field of the General tab.

To import your Outlook contacts to AccountRight
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click Synchronise Cards. The Synchronise Cards window appears.

2

CAUTION : Back up your company file Importing your Outlook contacts to your cards will change the details recorded in your company file. To avoid losing contact details stored in your company file, back up your company file before synchronising. For more information on backing up your company file, see ‘Backing up and restoring company files’ on page 260.

220

C H A P T E R 1 4

C O N T A C T M A N A G E M E N T

3

Click Next. The Import and Export Options window appears.

If you are importing your contacts from group contact folders, go to step 7 below. Select the option Synchronise cards using the default Outlook contacts folder and then click OK.
7

Click Import. The import process starts. Depending on the version of Microsoft Outlook you use, and the synchronisation update rules you have chosen, the following messages and windows may appear:
If this message appears...
Microsoft warning message

...do this
Select a period for your AccountRight software to access your Outlook contacts:
1

4

Select the card types that you want to synchronise.
You can synchronise cards from any of the Cards List tabs (Customer, Supplier, Employee and Personal). The default card type selected will vary according to the tab you are on when you click Synchronise Cards.
NOTE :

Select the Allow access for option. Select a period from 1 minute to 10 minutes. Click Yes.

2 3

5

Select a synchronisation rule from the Update Rules list. For more information, see ‘Synchronisation update rules’ on page 217. If you want to import your Outlook contacts from the default Outlook contacts folder, click Settings. The Settings window appears.

Warning: Blank Outlook Contact Fields

This window appears if a field in your Outlook contact is blank and the corresponding field in the card contains data. The message is to notify you that the card fields will not be updated. Click Skip to continue the import process. Select how you want to deal with each update. Select whether you want to add the contact to your cards or skip it.

6

Confirm Update Confirm Add

SYNCHRONISING CARDS WITH MICROSOFT OUTLOOK

2 2 1

8

When the import process has finished, the Synchronisation results window appears.

9

Review the results.
Summary field x cards added x cards updated x cards skipped, x cards rejected

Description
The number of cards added or updated in AccountRight. The number of cards updated but the details in your AccountRight cards may be incomplete. The number of contacts you chose to skip (if you selected update rule Ask me to confirm updates) and the number of contacts that were not imported because they contained blank Outlook contact fields.

10

If you want to view the log detailing the imported records, click the link in the Synchronisation results window.

Customising cards
Custom card fields
If you need to record certain information about your contacts, but can’t find a suitable card field for it, you may want to set up a custom field. For example, you could set up a field to record your customers’ birthdays or a field to record the dates of your employees’ most recent performance review. You can set up three custom fields for each card type and label them according to your needs. You can then enter any information you like in those fields. If you need to, you can customise a report to show Custom Field information.

To set up custom card fields
1

Go to the Lists menu, choose Custom Lists and Field Names and then choose the card type for which you want to set up a custom field, for example, Customers. The Custom List and Field Names window appears. Type the names of the custom fields you want to set up for the card type you have selected in the Name of Custom Field fields. For example, you could enter ‘Birthday’ to record your contacts’ birthdays. Click OK. The custom field names you entered will now appear in the Card Details tab of the Card Information window.

2

3

222

C H A P T E R 1 4

C O N T A C T M A N A G E M E N T

To enter custom field information in a card
1

To select contacts using Card IDs
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click the zoom arrow next to the card you want to edit. The Card Information window appears. Click the Card Details tab and type the information you want to record in the appropriate custom field. For example, type 01/10/1970 in the Birthday field.

Go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. The Preferences window appears. Click the Windows tab. Choose the Select Cards by Card ID, Not Card Name option. You can now select cards by their IDs and your card lists will be sorted by ID instead of by last name or company name.

2

2 3

3

Card identification codes
If you have assigned identification codes (IDs) such as customer numbers or account numbers to your customers, you can enter those IDs in their cards. You can also set a preference that will let you select customers by their ID instead of their last name or company name when entering a transaction. Customer search lists will also be sorted by their ID when this preference is set. For more information, see ‘To select contacts using Card IDs’ below.
The Card ID preference affects all card types If you choose this preference, you will have to select all card types by their IDs.
NOTE :

Card pictures
You can display a picture of your contact by importing a picture file to their card. The picture appears in the Card Details tab of the Card Information window.
Supported picture formats Pictures need to be saved in one of the following formats: bmp, jpg, tif, gif, or png.
NOTE :

To add a card picture
1

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Open the card for which you want to link a picture. Click the Card Details tab and click the picture file area. The Open window appears. Locate the picture file you want to display for this card and then click Open. The picture appears in the Card Details tab.

2

To enter an identification code
1

3

Go to the Card File command centre and click Cards List. The Cards List window appears. Click the zoom arrow next to the card you want to edit. The Card Information window appears. Enter a unique code of up to 15 alphanumeric characters in the Card ID field. Click OK to save your changes.

4

2

To remove or replace a picture
If you want to remove or replace the picture displayed in a card, click the displayed picture. A message appears. Click Yes. If you want to add a new picture to the card, continue with step 3 in ‘To add a card picture’ above.

3

4

CUSTOMISING CARDS

2 2 3

Reviewing your contact information
There are several tools you can use to review your contact information.
Tool
To Do List
2

Click the Card tab and click a report group. The list of card reports appears. Display or print the report that is appropriate to your needs. Following is a list of the default information displayed in each report. If required, you can customise the reports to display more or less detail (for information on how to customise a report, see ‘Customising reports’ on page 187).
Report Description
A list of your contacts with their phone numbers, current balances and identifiers. A list of some of the information contained in your contacts’ cards, including Address 1 and Address 2. The contact name, address and phone number entered for Address 1 in each card. A list of the transactions that have been allocated to your contacts for a selected period. A list of contact log entry details. The total of the elapsed time recorded in the log entries is displayed for each contact. A list of the identifier codes and their descriptions. A list of contact information that you can import into a geographic information system (GIS) to analyse the location of your contacts. A list of contact log entries with recontact dates that are dated on or before the day you specify in the report filter.

Description
The Contact Alert tab in the To Do List displays contact log entries with recontact dates on or before the current date. Card reports give you lists of contact information in several formats. Find Transactions helps you quickly find all transactions for a contact.

See below 3

Card reports Find Transactions

page 224 page 173

Card List Summary Card List Detail Address List Card Transactions Contact Log

To view contact alerts
1

Click To Do List in any command centre. The To Do List window appears. Click the Contact Alert tab. A list of all individuals and businesses you need to contact appears.
Reminders that fall on a closed day If the recontact date falls on a day that you have indicated as being closed in the Business Calendar (accessible from the Setup menu), the reminder will appear on the business day prior to the recontact date.
NOTE :

2

Identifiers GIS Card File

The Overdue column shows how many days have elapsed since the recontact date you specified on the contact log entry. To clear a reminder from the list, click in the select column next to the contact log entry and then click Remove.
To Do List – Overdue Contacts

To print card reports
1

Go to the Reports menu and choose Index to Reports. The Index to Reports window appears.

224

C H A P T E R 1 4

C O N T A C T M A N A G E M E N T

15 Financial control
You can control your finances by setting budgets, auditing your records and by reviewing and analysing your financial activities.

Tracking financial information
You can track financial information at three levels: Accounts level—view the profitability and financial details of your business as a whole. Categories level—view the profitability and financial details of your individual business divisions, departments, properties, offices or locations. Jobs level—view the profitability and financial details of the individual jobs or tasks carried out for customers and clients.
4‐0000 Income 4‐1000 Car Sales 4‐1010 New Car Sales 4‐1020 Pre‐owned Car Sales 4‐2000 Service and Parts Income 4‐2010 Service Income 4‐2020 Parts Income 4‐2030 Accessories Income [Header] [Header] [Detail] [Detail] [Header] [Detail] [Detail] [Detail]

Accounts
The accounts list could be set up to provide a basic overview of your business’s overall performance. For example, a car dealership might set up their accounts to distinguish new and used car sales, from service and parts income. The following income accounts could be used:

When entering a transaction, the transaction amount is allocated to an appropriate account. A standard profit and loss statement can then be printed for the business to show income and expenses generated by the business. However, at this level, it is difficult to see how well particular models are selling. Categories can manage this. Setting up accounts You can set up your accounts using the Easy Setup Assistant or in the Accounts command centre (see ‘Setting up accounts’ on page 24).

225

Categories
Categories enable you to track profitability of departments, offices, properties and other business segments. When entering a transaction, you need to allocate the appropriate category to it. You can then prepare a profit and loss statement for each category. Categories can be assigned to the following transaction types: spend money receive money transfer money general journal entries sales purchases build items inventory transfers inventory adjustments [AccountRight Plus only] payroll processing pre‐conversion sales and purchases.
NOTE : You cannot allocate categories to some transactions You cannot allocate a category to these transactions: Pay Bills, Receive Payments, Prepare Bank Deposit, Settle Returns and Credits/Debits and Pay/Receive Refunds. When entering these transactions, the categories assigned to the original transactions will be used. For example, the categories assigned to purchases appearing in the Pay Bills window will also be assigned to the payment.

To enable category tracking
1 2 3 4

Go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. Click the System tab. Select the Turn on Category Tracking option. If you want to make the selection of a category mandatory for all transactions, choose Required from the list.

To create a category
1

Go to the Lists menu and choose Categories. The Categories List window appears. Click New. The Category Information window appears. In the Category ID field, type a code that will be used to identify the category and press TAB. In the Category Name field, type the name of the category. In the Description field, type a description of the category or notes relating to the category.

2 3

4 5

6

Click OK.

226

C H A P T E R 1 5

F I N A N C I A L C O N T R O L

Jobs
Jobs can be set up to track income and expenses related to service jobs. This is particularly useful when multiple jobs are performed for a single customer. When you enter a transaction, the appropriate job number can be assigned to each individual amount. This enables you to associate several jobs with the various amounts in a single transaction. For example, if a purchase includes parts for three customers, you could specify each of the three jobs to which that purchase relates. A profit and loss statement can then be prepared for each job and actual results can be compared with budgeted values to produce a Jobs Budget Analysis report. Specific job‐tracking tasks include: organising jobs in a hierarchy setting budgets for each job linking jobs to specific customers assigning jobs to individual line items on transactions tracking reimbursable expenses for your jobs preparing invoices to reimburse job expenses analysing profit and loss of a job. Job types There are two types of jobs, header and detail.

Set up sub‐jobs You can set up jobs to track individual jobs that form part of a larger job. Note that sub‐jobs can be either a detail or header type job.

To create a header job
1

Go to the Lists menu and choose Jobs. The Jobs List window appears. Click New. The Job Information window appears. Select Header Job and enter a job number, name and description. If you want to create this job as a sub‐job, type or make a selection from the Sub Job Of field. Click OK. The header job appears in the Jobs List window.

2 3 4

5

To create a detail job
1

Go to the Lists menu and choose Jobs. The Jobs List window appears.

Header jobs total associated detail jobs. You cannot assign transactions to header jobs. Detail jobs are assigned to transactions to track income, costs and expenses.

TRACKING FINANCIAL INFORMATION

2 2 7

2

Click New. The Job Information window appears.

To enter opening balances for jobs
If you started using your AccountRight software while a particular job was in progress, you can create the job and then enter any account activity generated by the job so far in the Job Opening Balances window. You can enter opening balances only for detail jobs. Header jobs take their balances from the detail jobs below them.
1

Go to the Setup menu, choose Balances and then Job Opening Balances. The Job Opening Balances window appears. In the Job Number field, enter the job for which you want to enter an opening balance.

2

3 4 5

Select Detail Job. Type a code for the job in the Job Number field and press TAB. Enter additional information about the job, such as a job name, description and start date. If you are setting up a sub‐job, select the header job in the Sub Job Of field. If you want to link the job to a customer, enter a customer in the Linked Customer field. This is useful if you intend to seek reimbursement for goods and services purchased on the customer’s behalf. You can view details of all jobs linked to a customer in the Jobs view of the customer’s card.
3

6

7

In the Opening Balances column, type the opening balances for each account. Repeat from step 2 above for each job with an opening balance. Click OK when you have finished.

8 9

Click OK. The Jobs List window reappears. Review the hierarchy of jobs you have created. If you need to change the details of a job, select the job and click Edit.

4 5

228

C H A P T E R 1 5

F I N A N C I A L C O N T R O L

To enter budget amounts for jobs
You can enter budgets for detail jobs. The budget information you enter for each job is used to help you assess your progress on a particular job and to determine the job’s effect on the state of your business. The amounts you enter will be recorded against accounts in your accounts list for comparison purposes. Once you begin recording transactions for the job, you will be able to print the Jobs Budget Analysis report to see a comparison between the actual amounts and the amounts you have budgeted for the job.
1

All your company’s income, cost of sales, expense, other income and other expense accounts appear in the scrolling list.

Go to the Lists menu and choose Jobs. The Jobs List window appears. Select the detail job for which you want to enter budgets. Click Budget. The Job Budgets By Account window appears, with the number of the job you selected in the Job Number field. In the Budget column, type the amounts you’ve budgeted for specific accounts for this job and then click OK.

2 3

4

Reimbursable expenses
You can track the expenses you incur while working on a job and then invoice the customer to get reimbursed for those expenses. To get reimbursed for an expense, you need to do the following:
Task
1 2 3 Set up a job and choose to track reimbursable expenses Assign the expenses to the job when recording them Add the reimbursable expenses to the invoice when billing the customer

Example You have created job 01 for Edgar Reuss. During the course of working on job 01, you incur expenses that you want to have reimbursed by the customer when you bill him. When you enter the expenses using the Spend Money window, assign the line items to job 01. The line items are then automatically marked for reimbursement by Edgar Reuss. Then, when you enter a sale for Edgar Reuss, you can view a list of the reimbursable expenses and add them to his invoice.

See page 230 page 230 page 230

REIMBURSABLE EXPENSES

2 2 9

Task 1: Set up a job
1

4 5

Click in the select column for each expense you want to bill. If you want to change the amounts that will be billed, you can edit the amounts in the Reimbursable column.
TIP : Markup shortcuts If you want to mark up all selected expenses by a certain amount or percentage, click Markup and complete the Markup Information window.

Create a detail job (see To create a detail job) or open an existing detail job record. The Job Information window will appear. Select the Track Reimbursables option. In the Linked Customer field, enter the name of the customer who will be billed for this job. Click OK. Continue with Task 2: Assign expenses to the job.
6

2 3

4 5

Task 2: Assign expenses to the job
1

If a selected expense does not match the invoice layout, (for example, you want to be reimbursed for a non‐item expense on an item invoice), select the appropriate item, account or activity that you want to use for these expenses in the Reimbursement [...] field. For example, if you recorded a Spend Money transaction and you want to be reimbursed for the expense using an item invoice, you will need to select an appropriate item in the Reimbursement Item field in order to include the expense on the invoice. If you don’t have an appropriate item for this purpose, you will need to create one.
NOTE : All selected expenses that do not match the invoice layout will be allocated to the default item, account or activity If you want to be reimbursed for several expenses that relate to different income accounts, items or activities, you can change the details on the invoice later.

Enter the expense in a transaction window. For example, enter it in the: Spend Money window. Purchases window. Note that items you track in your stock cannot be reimbursed. Pay Employee window [AccountRight Plus only]. Note that only items linked to expense or cost of sales accounts can be reimbursed. In the Job column, select the job you want to assign the expense to. Complete the transaction as you normally would. Continue with Task 3: Bill the customer.
7

2 3 4

Click Reimburse. The selected expenses are now listed in the line item area of the Sales window.
About reimbursed expenses When you click Reimburse, all selected expenses will be considered as having been reimbursed, even if you don’t record the invoice, or you later delete the invoice. If you want to change the status of the expense to be reimbursable again, see ‘Changing the status of a reimbursable expense’ below.
NOTE :

Task 3: Bill the customer
1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Enter Sales. The Sales window appears. Enter the customer’s name and press TAB. Click Reimburse. The Customer Reimbursable Expenses window appears. The To Be Reimbursed tab lists all expenses that have yet to be billed to this customer.
8

2 3

Make any other changes to the invoice, and then click Record.

230

C H A P T E R 1 5

F I N A N C I A L C O N T R O L

Changing the status of a reimbursable expense
NOTE : Changing a status does not affect the transaction If you change the status of a reimbursable expense, the original transaction on which you recorded the expense is not affected. If you want to remove the expense from the original expense transaction or from the invoice, you will need to edit or delete the transaction.

4

If you want to change the status of a reimbursable expense to Reimbursed/Removed: a In the To Be Reimbursed tab, click in the select column next to each expense you no longer want to reimburse. b Click Remove from List. The expenses you selected are transferred to the Reimbursed/Removed tab. If you want to reset the status of a reimbursed expense to To Be Reimbursed: a Click the Reimbursed/Removed tab. b Click in the select column next to each expense whose status you want to change. c Click Remove from List. The expenses you selected are transferred to the To Be Reimbursed tab. Click Cancel. The Job Information window reappears. Click OK.

5

To change the status of a reimbursable expense
1

Go to the Lists menu and select Jobs. The Jobs List window appears. Select the job for which you want to edit an expense and click Edit. The Job Information window appears. Click Reimburse. The Job Reimbursable Expenses window appears.
6 7

2

3

Budgets
When you prepare a budget, you are predicting the financial state of your business. For example, you could prepare a budget that predicts how much you intend to spend and earn over the next financial year. Having a budget means that, as the year progresses, you can track projected data against actual data and take corrective action if things are not going according to plan. You can also use budgets to plan for future goals. For example, you may want to undertake a new business venture in the coming year. By creating a budget, you can work out the amount of money you will need for the venture, where this money will come from, and the impact that the venture will have on other aspects of your business. What do I need to budget? You can enter budgets for individual detail accounts. The accounts that require a budget will vary according to your business. Most people prepare budgets for Profit and Loss accounts such as Income, Cost of Sales and Expenses accounts, and Balance Sheet accounts for specific assets and liabilities. To decide on the accounts that will require a budget, consider what changes you anticipate in your business and the financial impacts these changes will have. For example, you may be considering taking out a new loan (which will affect your Bank Loans account). What period can I budget for? You can create a budget for the current financial year and the next financial year.

BUDGETS

2 3 1

Reviewing your budget You can review your budgets periodically to track your financial progress and see if it is going to plan. A slight variation from the budget is normal. Large variations, on the other hand, may need investigation. For example, if you have a large increase in accounts receivable, it may indicate that your customers are taking a longer time than expected to pay your account. You can compare your budgeted amount with actual account balances by viewing the Budget Analysis reports for Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss accounts. For information on displaying, customising and printing reports, see Chapter 12, ’Reports,’ starting on page 185.

To enter the budget for an account
1

Go to the Accounts command centre and click Accounts List. The Accounts List window appears. Click Budgets. The Prepare Budgets window appears. The window lists the Profit and Loss accounts by default. From the Financial Year list, choose whether you want to enter a budget for this financial year or the next one. From the Account Type list, choose the type of account you want to enter a budget for—Profit and Loss or Balance Sheet. For each month, click in the appropriate cell and enter the amount. If you want to enter a negative amount, insert a hyphen before the figure (for example, ‐250). As you enter data, the FY Total column will display the total budget for each account.
A B

2

3

4

Entering budget amounts
You can use the Prepare Budgets window to enter budget amounts for each month of the current or next financial year. See ‘To enter the budget for an account’ on page 232. If you want to quickly enter budget amounts for a group of months, you can use the Budget Shortcuts window. See ‘To enter a budget using the Budget Shortcuts window’ on page 233. As the year progresses, you can choose to either adjust budget figures or leave them unchanged. Entering positive and negative amounts By default, the amount you enter will be assumed to be a positive amount. You can enter negative budget amounts—for example, to indicate an end of month balance change in balance sheet type accounts—by inserting a hyphen before the amount (for example, ‐250). When you enter a negative amount, you are indicating that the balance of the account is going to reduce. Using existing data If you have already prepared a budget in a spreadsheet or in other software, you may be able to import that information into your company file. For more information on how to import account budgets, see ‘Importing data’ on page 268. You can also use the previous financial year’s data as a basis for your budget.

5

C

D

E

A B

The Account Name and FY Total columns display the list of accounts and their current budget totals for the financial year. You can enter the budget amount for a specific account and month. You can use the horizontal scroll bar to scroll through the months.

232

C H A P T E R 1 5

F I N A N C I A L C O N T R O L

C

Click Shortcuts to open the Budget Shortcuts window from where you can quickly enter budget amounts for the selected account. For more information, see ‘Budget Shortcuts window’ below. Click Copy Amount to Following Months to copy the selected amount to the months that follow. Click Copy Previous Year’s Actual Data to insert the previous year’s amounts for the selected account and month.

5

From the Budget for list, select a time period:

D E

Select a time period

6

Click OK to save the budget data and exit the Prepare Budgets window. The fields change according to the period you select.
Select…
Each Month

Budget Shortcuts window
If you want to quickly enter budget figures for a group of months, you can use the Budget Shortcuts window. You can use this window to enter quarterly, half‐yearly and yearly budgets. You can also enter a budget that increases or decreases by a specific amount every month.

If you want to…
Enter the same amount for every month of the year or a set increase or decrease every month (starting from a base amount). Enter a total amount for a group of consecutive months. Enter the total amount for each quarter. Enter the total amount for each half of the year. Enter the total amount for the entire financial year, (where yyyy is your financial year).

To enter a budget using the Budget Shortcuts window
1

Period starting from selected Month Each Quarter Each half of the Financial Year Financial Year yyyy

Go to the Accounts command centre and click Accounts List. The Accounts List window appears. Click Budgets. The Prepare Budgets window appears. Select the account you want to enter the budget for. Click Shortcuts. The Budget Shortcuts window appears.
6

2 3 4

Enter the budget amounts in the appropriate fields. Amounts that cover more than one month (such as quarterly, half‐yearly and yearly amounts, and amounts for a group of months) will be divided equally among all the months in the group. If you selected the Each Month option, you can also set a base budget amount for the first month, and the amount or percentage by which this will vary every month onwards.

7

When you have finished entering the information, click OK. The Prepare Budgets window appears with the new amounts.

BUDGETS

2 3 3

If the account already has budget figures, a message appears asking if you want to replace the existing budget. Click Yes to replace the budget, or No if you want to keep the existing amounts (if you click No, click Cancel to return to the Prepare Budgets window).

If you have not entered any amounts for the budget, a message appears asking if you want to enter zero amounts. Click Yes if you want to do this, or No if you want to change the amounts.

Reviewing financial information
There are tools that you can use to review your financial information:
Tool
Business Insights

You can also save a graph or table as an image so you can use it in another document. To do this, right‐click it and choose: Copy to Clipboard. This copies the graph or table to the clipboard, ready to paste into a document. [Graphs only] Save As. Choose where you want to save the image and click Save. This saves the graph as an image file, so you can use it later.

Description
Business Insights enables you to analyse information about your accounts, cashflow and current cash position and your profitability. Financial reports help you review your financial information.

See below Financial reports

page 235

If you want to customise the look of Business Insights, click Customise. The Customise window appears, enabling you to show or hide information in Business Insights.

Business Insights
Business Insights enables you to analyse key financial information using a range of interactive tables and graphs. You can use it to analyse your accounts, available cash, cash flow, profit and loss, the money that you owe suppliers and the money that customers owe you. You can open Business Insights from any command centre. The Business Insights window presents different types of financial information in a series of tabs. From these tabs, you can open other windows, such as the Accounts List, Prepare Budgets, Cards List, Sales Register or Purchase Register windows. You can sort the information in tables by clicking in the relevant table column heading. For example, you can sort the list of your accounts by account name or type.

About the Business Insights tabs
Profitability Details This tab displays graphs comparing income and expenses, the cumulative profit and loss and the budgets and actuals of your top ten expenses. It also displays a table showing your item profit margins. You can use this information to: Compare income against expenses You can compare the profit and loss of your previous financial year against your current one, and project your profit and loss for the next financial year. Identify excessive spending and budget blowouts Compare the actual balances of cost of sales accounts against their budgets. Analyse item margins Compare item profit margins and quantities of items sold.

234

C H A P T E R 1 5

F I N A N C I A L C O N T R O L

Customer and Supplier Analysis For more information about analysing sales and purchases, see ‘Reviewing your sales information’ on page 70 and ‘Reviewing your purchases information’ on page 93. Account Details This tab displays the balances of your bank and credit card accounts and shows your total assets and total liabilities. You can use this information to: Identify excessive debt Compare assets against liabilities.

Report
Balance Sheet Budget Analysis

Description
Lists account balances as at the end of a selected period, along with the budgeted amounts for them. If you’ve determined that changes need to be made to the amounts you’ve budgeted for the coming months, you can adjust your budget. Lists account balances for a selected period, along with the budgeted amounts for them. If you’ve determined that changes need to be made to the amounts you’ve budgeted for the coming months, you can adjust your budget.

Profit & Loss Budget Analysis

Organise your funds Check the liquidity of your assets; prioritise your liability repayments. Check account balances Before making a large payment, ensure that the account it is drawn from has sufficient funds.

To view financial reports
1

Go to the Reports menu at the top of the screen and choose Index to Reports. The Index to Reports window appears. Click the Accounts tab.

In the Banking tab of the Index to Reports window, you can print the Statement of Cash Flow report. This report shows how your cash position has changed over a period of time, what profit you have earned, where you received additional cash, and where your cash was spent. For information on displaying, customising and printing reports, see Chapter 12, ’Reports,’ starting on page 185.

2

There are several account reports that can help you track your financial information. These reports are listed below.
Report
Profit & Loss Statement Balance Sheet Trial Balance

Description
Shows your profit and loss figures. Reviews your financial position as of the end of a period. Identifies amounts incorrectly entered. When reviewing this report, check for: • entries that seem unusually high or low for the account that has been affected • debit amounts for accounts that normally have credit entries and vice versa • unusually high or low ending balances • an unusually high or low number of entries for a specific account.

REVIEWING FINANCIAL INFORMATION

2 3 5

Auditing your records
The following features are available to help you ensure the accuracy of the records in your company file.

Audit trail
Transaction journal changes are tracked by the audit trail system. You can print the Journal Security Audit report, which lists the changes made to transaction dates, accounts and amounts, and also lists all transaction reversals and deletions made within a specified date range. The changes that are tracked are outlined below:
Change type
Transactional

Company Data Auditor
The Company Data Auditor allows you to check the accuracy of the records in your company file. You can use this tool to perform maintenance tasks and reconcile bank or credit card accounts. The Company Data Auditor also checks your transactions for exceptions such as invoices that do not reconcile with your receivables account, future‐dated transactions, and audit trail changes. For more information on how to use the Company Data Auditor, see ‘Run the Company Data Auditor’ on page 240.

Description
• • • • • • • • • • • • deletion of transaction change of card selection change of ID # change of date change of amount on any line change of account on any line change of item selection change of job selection. deselection of tax code on any line of a sales or purchase transaction change of tax code for a sales or purchase transaction change of tax amount for a sales or purchase transaction adding transactions with a tax code other than the default code for the selected card or account (invoices only, not orders or quotes) adding transactions with a changed taxable amount change of the linked account selection in any of the Tax Code Information windows.

Tax

• •

236

C H A P T E R 1 5

F I N A N C I A L C O N T R O L

Change type
Account

Description
• • • • change of the current account number change of the account’s opening balance addition of a new account deletion of an account.

Payroll

[AccountRight Plus only]

Changes to the setup of an employee’s card, including: • employment category • employment status • termination details • pay basis, pay rate or pay frequency • the default wages expense account • ‘Carry Over’ entitlements • pay history • tax table • withholding variation rate • extra tax amount • total rebate amount. Changes to the setup of a payroll category include: • Type of Wages selection and pay rate • Type of Entitlement field • superannuation calculation basis • Type of Deduction field or Deduction Limit field • Type of Expense field and Expense Limit field. • • Change of the linked account selection in any of the Linked Accounts windows change to the lock periods security preference (this includes changes of the lock period date and the selection/deselection of the preference) change to the Transactions CAN'T be Changed; They must be Reversed preference.

System

•

AUDITING YOUR RECORDS

2 3 7

238

C H A P T E R 1 5

F I N A N C I A L C O N T R O L

16 End-of-period procedures
It is important to ensure that your accounting records are accurate. Reconciling the accounts regularly will assure you and your accountant that your books are complete, accurate and balanced. Month‐end procedures You should reconcile your company file information with any source documents and resources available to you. For example, each month your bank account can be reconciled with your bank statement, creditors balances can be checked against statements, and your customers’ balances can be verified. Typical end‐of‐month procedures include reviewing your trial balance, reviewing your budgets and cash flow, paying payroll taxes (AccountRight Plus only) and sending out customer statements. Year‐end procedures End‐of‐year procedures need to be carried out to prepare your company file for the coming year. These include any adjustments you need to make to your company file so that it agrees with your accountant’s final records before you start a new year. If possible, your inventory should be counted, valued and, where necessary, adjusted in your company file. By closing the year in your company file, you are effectively bringing the company file up to date. End of payroll year [AccountRight Plus only] Closing a payroll year includes processing final pays, printing payroll reports and preparing payroll forms. You must close the payroll year in the last month of your payroll year or soon after. Otherwise, you will not be able to enter pays for the next payroll year.

Month-end procedures
The following is a list of tasks we suggest you complete at the end of each month. Depending on the nature of your business, some of these tasks may not apply to you.
Task
1 2 3 Run the Company Data Auditor Reconcile bank accounts Review reports

Task
4 5 6 7 8 9 Report and pay superannuation contributions [AccountRight Plus only] Report and pay payroll tax [AccountRight Plus only] Send customer statements Record depreciation Lodge your activity statement (BAS or IAS) Lock periods

See page 244 page 244 page 245 page 246 page 247 page 248

See page 240 page 243 page 243

239

Task 1: Run the Company Data Auditor
The Company Data Auditor is a series of windows that guide you through the process of checking and ensuring the accuracy of the records in your company file. You can use the auditor to: display basic information about the company file, such as the file name, release number, location, lock periods, last backup date, etc. perform maintenance tasks, such as back up your company file and set lock periods display bank and credit card account details, including the current balance and the date when they were last reconciled reconcile your bank and credit card accounts check your transactions for exceptions and audit trail changes.
1

This window shows you: the company file name the AccountRight release version the location of the company file the date on which the company file was last backed up the end month and year of the current financial year the locked period date, if one has been specified [AccountRight Plus only] the date of the payroll tax tables. If necessary, you can perform the following maintenance tasks from this window:
To…
Back up your company file Set a locked period for your company file Load PAYG Withholding tax tables [AccountRight Plus only]

Do this…
Click Back Up and complete the backup procedure. Click Lock Period and select the date defining the locked period (that is, a period before which data cannot be entered). Click Load Tax Tables and then follow the on‐screen instructions.

See page 260 page 248

Go to the Accounts command centre and click Company Data Auditor. The Company File Overview window appears.

page 258

240

C H A P T E R 1 6

E N D ‐ O F ‐ P E R I O D P R O C E D U R E S

2

When you have completed the required maintenance tasks, click Next. The Account Reconciliation Review window appears.

6

Click Run Review to start the transaction review of the following:
Review task
Reconcile invoices with the linked receivables account

Description
The total of all customers balances is compared to the current balance of the linked receivables account. If there is an out‐of‐balance amount, click Display to view the Receivables Reconciliation Exceptions report and analyse the details of the report. The total of all suppliers balances is compared to the current balance of the linked payables account. If there is an out‐of‐balance amount, click Display to view the Payables Reconciliation Exceptions report and analyse the details of the report. The total value of items on hand is compared to the current balance of the linked inventory account. If there is an out‐of‐balance amount, click Display to view the Inventory Value Reconciliation Exception report and analyse the details of the report. The company file is checked for any transactions dated later than the current date. If there are such transactions, click Display to view the Future Dated Transactions report and analyse the details of the report. The company file is checked for any prepaid transactions. These transactions include all customer and supplier payments (excluding deposit payments) that have a payment date prior to the date of the invoice or purchase. If there are such transactions, click Display to view the Prepaid Transactions report and analyse the details of the report.

Reconcile purchases with the linked payables account

This window shows you: your bank and credit card accounts the balance of each account the date on which each account was last reconciled.
3

Compare item values with inventory account

If you want to reconcile an account, select the account and click Reconcile Accounts. For information on how to reconcile your accounts, see ‘Reconciling your bank accounts’ on page 56. Click Next. The Transaction Review window appears.

Scan for future‐dated transactions

4

Scan for prepaid transactions

5

Enter the start date and end date of the period you want to review.

MONTH‐END PROCEDURES

2 4 1

Review task
Scan for deposits paid

Description
The company file is checked for any deposits paid (within the date range specified) on sales orders or purchase orders. If any orders have a payment flagged as a deposit transaction, click Display to view the Deposit Transactions report and analyse the details of the report. The company file is checked for transaction changes made during the review period. If any such changes are found, click Display to view the Journal Security Audit report and analyse the details of the report. If you have selected the Warn if Jobs Are Not Assigned to All Transactions option in the Preferences window, the company file is checked for cash transactions (within the date range specified) that have no job number. If any transactions are detected with no job number, click Display to view the Job Exceptions—Cash Transactions report and analyse the details of the report. If you have selected the Warn if Jobs Are Not Assigned to All Transactions [System‐wide] option in the Preferences window, the company file is checked for sales and purchase transactions (within the date range specified) that have no job number. If any transactions are detected with no job number, click Display to view the Job Exceptions—Invoice Transactions report and analyse the details of the report. If you use integrated payroll, the total of payroll liabilities transactions that are unpaid is checked against the balance of the linked accounts payable account Payroll Category. If there is an out‐of‐balance amount, click Display to view the Payroll Liabilities Reconciliation Exceptions report and analyse the details of the report.

7

When you have finished viewing and, if necessary, printing the transaction review reports, click Next. The Tax Exception Review window appears.

Review audit trail changes

Check for job exceptions [Cash Transactions]

8 9

Enter the start date and end date of the period you want to review. Click Run Review to do the following:
Review task
Check for Tax amount variances [Sales]

Description
The company file is checked for variations between the tax amount posted and the tax amount calculated for the tax codes assigned to sales transactions. If a variation is found, click Display to view the Tax Amount Variance report and analyse the details of the report. The company file is checked for variations between the tax amount posted and the tax amount calculated for the tax codes assigned to purchase transactions. If a variation is found, click Display to view the Tax Amount Variance report and analyse the details of the report.

Check for job exceptions [Invoice Transactions]

Check for Tax amount variances [Purchases]

Reconcile payroll liability payments (AccountRight Plus only)

242

C H A P T E R 1 6

E N D ‐ O F ‐ P E R I O D P R O C E D U R E S

Review task
Check for Tax code exceptions [Invoice Transactions]

Description
The company file is checked for sale and purchases transactions without a tax code assigned or where the entered tax code is different to the default tax code. If such a transaction is found, click Display to view the Tax Code Exceptions—Invoice Transactions report and analyse the details of the report. The company file is checked for Spend Money and Receive Money transactions without a tax code assigned or where the entered tax code is different to the default tax code. If such a transaction is found, click Display to view the Tax Code Exceptions—Cash Transactions report and analyse the details of the report. The company file is checked for variances between the balance of the linked tax accounts and the amount of tax that has been collected and paid on transactions. If variances are found, click Display to view the Tax Code Reconciliation Exceptions report and analyse the details of the report.

Task 3: Review reports
There are several reports that we recommend you review at the end of each month. You can use these reports to identify and correct any discrepancies in your records, as well as spot any trends in your business.
Report
Accounts List [Summary]

Description
Lists all accounts and their balances. Make sure you set the report filters to print account balances. Lists all your outstanding receivables. Lists all your outstanding payables. Shows your company’s sales activity and trends on a month‐by‐month basis. Displays your company’s monthly purchases. Lists items on hand and items that need to be ordered. Reviews changes made to recorded transactions. Displays your profit and loss figures. Displays your financial position as of the end of a month. Use this report to identify incorrectly entered amounts. When reviewing this report, check for: • entries that seem unusually large or small for the account that has been affected • debit amounts for accounts that normally have credit entries, and vice versa • unusually high or low ending balances • an unusually high or low number of entries for a specific account.

Check for Tax code exceptions [Cash Transactions].

Receivables Reconciliation Summary Payables Reconciliation Summary Analyse Sales—Customer Analyse Purchases—Supplier Items List Summary

Reconcile Tax code details with linked accounts

10

Click Finish. A message appears asking if you would like to print a summary report of the audit findings. Click Yes to print the report or click No to close the Company Data Auditor without printing the report.

Journal Security Audit Profit & Loss Statement Balance Sheet Trial Balance

Task 2: Reconcile bank accounts
To ensure the accuracy of your business records, you should keep your record of each bank account balance matched up with your bank’s records. For details on reconciling, see ‘Reconciling your bank accounts’ on page 56.

MONTH‐END PROCEDURES

2 4 3

Report
Balance Sheet [Multi‐Period Budget]

Description
Lists account balances as at the end of a selected month, along with the budgeted amounts for them. If changes need to be made to the amounts you’ve budgeted for the coming months, adjust your budget. Lists profit and loss account balances for a selected period, along with the budgeted amounts for them. If changes need to be made to the amounts you’ve budgeted for the coming months, adjust your budget. Shows how your cash position has changed over a period of time, what profit you have earned, where you received additional cash, and where your cash was spent. Use this report if your accounting is done on an accrual basis. Displays a summary of tax charged, but not necessarily collected or paid. For a more detailed view, use the GST [Detail – Accrual] report. Use this report if your accounting is done on a cash basis. Displays a summary of GST collected and paid. For a more detailed view, use the GST [Detail – Cash] report.

Task 4: Report and pay superannuation contributions
AccountRight Plus only If you have employees, you are required to pay superannuation guarantee contributions at least quarterly. These contributions must be paid within 28 days of making the final contribution for the quarter.
Superannuation guarantee
1 July–30 September 1 October–31 December 1 January–31 March 1 April–30 June

Profit & Loss [Multi‐Period Budget]

Cut‐off date for superannuation guarantee contributions
28 October 28 January 28 April 28 July

Statement of Cash Flow

GST [Summary – Accrual]

You can use reports to view superannuation contributions payable to superannuation funds and use the Pay Liabilities feature to record payments. For information, see ‘Superannuation reporting’ on page 126 and ‘Payroll liabilities’ on page 124.

GST [Summary – Cash]

Task 5: Report and pay payroll tax
AccountRight Plus only If your monthly or annual wages are over a certain amount, you may be liable to pay state or territory payroll tax. Usually, state or territory payroll tax is paid monthly. You can use the Payroll Tax report and the Amount by Category (Payroll Tax) report to view your payroll tax liability. You can access these reports in the Payroll tab of the Index to Reports window.
NOTE : Filter the Payroll Tax report for the entire month When you produce the Payroll Tax report, you should enter the date range for the entire month for which you want to view your payroll tax liability.

244

C H A P T E R 1 6

E N D ‐ O F ‐ P E R I O D P R O C E D U R E S

Once you have confirmed the amount you need to pay, you can create a Spend Money transaction to record the payment.
Before you can calculate payroll tax You need to set up your payroll tax information in your company file before you can calculate payroll tax. For information about setting up your payroll tax information, see ‘Payroll tax reporting’ on page 128.
NOTE :

make your selections. For more information, see ‘Customising how you send form batches’ on page 198.
7

Click in the select column ( printing statements for. Click Print.

) next to the customers you are

8

To email a customer statement

Task 6: Send customer statements
Most businesses send statements to customers who have outstanding balances at the end of a month. You can print or email the statements.

1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Print/Email Statements. The Review Statements Before Delivery window appears. Click the To Be Emailed tab. In the Statement Type field, select the type of statement you want to email. Invoice statements list all invoices aged as at a specified date. Activity statements list all sales invoices, payments and orders with a customer deposit for a specified date range. Activity statements include a running account balance. Specify the statement period. If you selected Invoice as the statement type, enter an ageing date to display invoices outstanding as at that date. If you want to include only invoices recorded up to the statement date, select the Only include invoices up to Statement Date option. If you selected Activity as the statement type, enter the statement date range in the From and To fields. If you want to filter the customer list or select a different statement form, click Advanced Filters and make your selections. For more information, see ‘Customising how you send form batches’ on page 198. Click in the select column ( want to email statements. ) next to the customers to whom you

2 3

To print a customer statement
1

Go to the Sales command centre and click Print/Email Statements. The Review Statements Before Delivery window appears. Click the To Be Printed tab. In the Statement Type field, select the type of statement you want to print. Invoice statements list all invoices aged as at a specified date. Activity statements list all sales invoices, payments and orders with a customer deposit within a specified date range. Activity statements include a running account balance. Specify the statement period. If you selected Invoice as the statement type, enter an ageing date to display invoices outstanding as at that date. If you want to include only invoices recorded up to the statement date, select the Only include invoices up to Statement Date option. If you selected Activity as the statement type, enter the statement date range in the From and To fields. Type the number of statements you want to print per customer in the Print field. If you want to filter the statement information or change the type of form the statement will be printed on, click Advanced Filters and
4

2 3

4

5

6

5

7

6

If you want to change a customer’s email address, select the customer’s name and then select another address from the Email Address list or type a different address in the Email Address field at the top of the window.

MONTH‐END PROCEDURES

2 4 5

A message appears asking if you would like to update the employee's card. Click Yes if you want to update it or No if this is a temporary change.
8

Type the subject and message of the email or accept the default subject and message. If you want to change the default message, click Email Defaults and make the changes as appropriate. Click Send Email.
2

In the following example, we have a header account, Motor Vehicles numbered 1‐2400, and a detail account Motor Vehicles At Cost numbered 1‐2410. We have created a new asset account called Accum. Depr. Motor Vehicles numbered 1‐2420. Notice that the header account shows the current book value of the vehicles.

9

Task 7: Record depreciation
Your company’s vehicles and equipment lose value each year. Part of the cost of vehicles and equipment can be allocated as an expense to your company each year you benefit from their use. The allocation of the cost of a piece of equipment over its useful life is called depreciation. There are several methods of recording depreciation. Consult your accountant to see which method is best for you.
NOTE : If you depreciate your assets at the end of the financial year, make this step a part of your end-of-year routine. Consult your accountant for information about when to depreciate your assets.

Create a new expense account. You may want to call it Depreciation. Once you’ve determined your depreciation amounts, make journal entries to credit the new accumulated depreciation asset account (for example, the Accum. Depr. Motor Vehicles account) and debit the new depreciation expense account. The accumulated depreciation asset accounts will always have a negative balance to show a reduction in the value of the depreciable assets.

3

Depreciation isn’t calculated automatically, but you can record your depreciation figures with a journal entry.

To record depreciation
Before you can record depreciation for an asset, you need to create an asset account and an expense account for each type of asset you depreciate. You only need to create these accounts once.
1

Create a new asset account for each type of asset you depreciate. Add the words ‘Accum. Depr.’ (for Accumulated Depreciation) at the start of each new account name. Give the new account a number that allows it to come after its corresponding asset account in the accounts list. For more information on creating a new account, see ‘Setting up accounts’ on page 24.

246

C H A P T E R 1 6

E N D ‐ O F ‐ P E R I O D P R O C E D U R E S

Task 8: Lodge your activity statement (BAS or IAS)
You can use the BASlink feature to prepare your Business Activity Statement (BAS) or Instalment Activity Statement (IAS). Before you begin, you need to set up your activity statement information.
NOTE : Electronic activity statement lodgement If you plan to lodge your activity statement using the ATO’s Electronic Commerce Interface (ECI) or Business Portal software, you need to set up the software on your computer and import your Electronic Certificate from the ATO to that application. For more information, contact the ATO.

3

If you have recorded end‐of‐year adjustments in your company file and you want to include them in your activity statement, select the Include Year‐End Adjustments option. Click Prepare Statement. A message appears informing you that the details you added in the BAS Information window will determine the basis of the MYOB BASLink statement. Click OK to continue. A disclaimer window appears, stating that BASlink is a calculation tool, and does not provide tax advice. Click OK to continue. The AccountRight BASlink window appears.
NOTE : BASlink help If you are using BASlink for the first time, a window also appears with the option to open the BASlink Help window. Click Yes if you need setup assistance.

4

To set up your activity statement information
1

Go to the Accounts command centre and click BASlink. The BASlink window appears. Click BAS lnfo. The BAS Information window appears.
For information about the fields in this window, choose Show Field Help in the Help menu and then hover over a field.
TIP :

2

3

Specify your activity statement information. If registered for GST or PAYG, you need to specify: GST information (such as your accounting basis, reporting frequency and calculation method) PAYG Instalments information PAYG Withholdings information. Click OK.
5

4

To prepare your activity statement
1

Go to the Accounts command centre and click BASlink. The BASlink window appears. Select the last month of your reporting period.

If you are setting up BASlink for the first time, or you have added new tax codes, payroll categories or accounts since your last reporting period, you need to review the setup of each field. You need to do this on each sheet of the BAS.

2

MONTH‐END PROCEDURES

2 4 7

Click the Setup and Link buttons next to the applicable fields to set the information that will appear in them. Click on a field label for more information about a field.
6

To record your activity statement transaction in your company file
1

Click Check to check your activity statement for errors. If there are any errors—for example, a field has not been completed or has an invalid amount—an Error List appears detailing the error and the field name. If you need a copy of the activity statement for your records (recommended), click Print. You can also use the printed statement to copy the field values to the ATO’s paper or electronic activity statements. Print the ATO transaction that you need to record in your company file. a Click Transaction to view a report showing the Spend Money or Receive Money transaction. b Click Print. Click Save Setup & Exit to save your current BASlink setup and the details of your current activity statement reporting period. A window appears, reminding you to back up your activity statement. Click Yes to create a backup copy of your activity statement details.

Go to the Banking command centre and click: Spend Money, if you are recording a payment to the ATO. The Spend Money window appears. Receive Money, if you are recording a receipt from the ATO. The Receive Money window appears. Enter the details as appears in the transaction you printed at step 8 in ‘To prepare your activity statement’, above. Note that you should assign the N‐T (not reportable) code to all transaction lines. Click Record.

7

2

8

3

Task 9: Lock periods
After you have completed your month‐end tasks, you should lock that period using the Lock Periods feature. This will prevent anyone from inadvertently making an entry in a period in which you don’t want new entries. To do this:
1

9

Go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. The Preferences window appears. Click the Security tab. Select the Lock Periods: Disallow Entries Prior to option, and select the relevant date. This selection places a temporary lock on the date you select and the period before it. If you need to make an entry in a locked period at a later time—for example, you locked 31st of May, and now want to make an entry in April— you can unlock that date in the Preferences window.

2

To lodge your activity statement with the ATO
Once you have prepared your activity statement information using BASlink, you can lodge your activity statement electronically or by post. Completing the activity statement manually and sending by post. Copy the BASlink values to the Business Activity Statement or Instalment Activity Statement sent to you by the ATO. Also send the tax payable to the ATO by the payment due date on the activity statement. Lodging the activity statement electronically. If you use the ATO’s Electronic Commerce Interface (ECI) software or Business Portal, type the BASlink values in the corresponding fields on the electronic version of the activity statement.

3

248

C H A P T E R 1 6

E N D ‐ O F ‐ P E R I O D P R O C E D U R E S

Closing a financial year
This section describes the tasks you should perform at the end of your financial year. However, you don’t need to close your financial year at any particular time. You can continue to use your company file after the last month of your current financial year. Complete the tasks listed below to close your financial year and start a new one.
Task
1 2 3 4 5 6 Complete month‐end tasks Perform a stocktake Provide information to your accountant Enter end‐of‐year adjustments Back up your company file Close a financial year

Task 2: Perform a stocktake
If you track inventory quantities and values, you should perform a stocktake when all transactions affecting inventory for the financial year have been entered. For more information on how to perform a stocktake, see ‘Recording stocktakes’ on page 155.

See below below below page 250 page 251 page 251

Task 3: Provide information to your accountant
Once you have completed your year‐end tasks, you can send your accounting data to your accountant. If your accountant uses MYOB Accountants Office, you can export your accounts list, journal entries, sales and purchases directly to your accountant as a text file. This file can be sent by email or saved to disk. When you export financial information to MYOB Accountants Office, the Receivables Reconciliation Exceptions, Payables Reconciliation Exceptions and Bank Reconciliation reports are included in the file. If inventory or tax exceptions are found, the Inventory Value Reconciliation Exceptions, Tax Amount Variance and Tax Code Exceptions reports are also included. These reports are designed to alert your accountant to any irregularities in your company file and provide them with supplementary information to analyse your accounts. You can also export your accounting data to other accounting packages using the export function.

Task 1: Complete month-end tasks
Make sure you complete each of the month‐end tasks. See ‘Month‐end procedures’ on page 239.

CLOSING A FINANCIAL YEAR

2 4 9

To export to MYOB Accountants Office
1

b If you want, you can change the email address and edit the

Go to the Accounts command centre and click Send to Accountant. The Reporting Period window appears.

subject line. c Click Send. Disk—If you want to save the file to disk: a Click Disk. The Save As window appears. a Enter a name and location for saving the export file. The default file name is companyname.MYE. You can change the file name if you want but you must retain the ‘.MYE’ extension. A .zip file of the reports is also saved. b Click Save.

Task 4: Enter end-of-year adjustments
Your accountant is likely to provide you with a number of adjustments that will need to be entered in your company file as journal transactions. If the adjustments have been provided on paper, you can manually enter them in the Record Journal Entry window. If you send information to your accountant using the Send to Accountant feature (see Task 3: Provide information to your accountant), you can import the adjusting journal entries your accountant sends you. Make sure your accountant has sent you the journal adjustment file as a text file with a .txt extension. For more information about importing journal entries, see ‘Importing data’ on page 268.

2

Select the month or range of months you want to export. To select a range of months, click and hold the mouse button on the first required month and then drag the cursor over the names of the remaining months.
CAUTION : Choose the reporting months carefully It is important not to include dates you have included in a previous export because this would result in double‐counting your transactions. As a precaution, we recommend that you tell your accountant the periods you have selected.

To record adjustments manually
3

Select the type of information to be provided from the Information required list. Select the method you want to use to send the information. Email—If you want to email the file: a Enter your accountant’s card in the Linked Card for Accountant field and then click Email. The Email window appears. An export file is automatically attached to the email (called companyname.MYE). A .zip file of the reports is also attached.

1

Go to the Accounts command centre and click Record Journal Entry. The Record Journal Entry window appears. The general journal number and transaction date appear by default. You can change these if necessary.

4

2

Select the Year‐End Adjustment option to identify the transaction as an adjustment journal entry. When you prepare reports for the period, you can exclude these adjustments from appearing. [Optional] In the Memo field, enter a comment to describe the transaction, for example, ‘EOY adjustment from accountant’.

3

250

C H A P T E R 1 6

E N D ‐ O F ‐ P E R I O D P R O C E D U R E S

4

Each row of information entered in the scrolling list is a line item. The line item details are identified in the journal adjustments provided by your accountant. For each line item: a Type the account number (or name), or select it from the account list. b In the Debit and Credit fields, enter the debit or credit amount for the line item. c [Optional] In the Job field, enter the job number for the line item. d [Optional] In the Memo field, enter a description of the line item. e If necessary, change the default code in the Tax column by typing the required tax code or selecting it from the list.
Journal entry must be balanced The journal entry cannot be recorded until the Out of Balance field is zero.
NOTE :

Task 6: Close a financial year
Before closing a financial year, make sure you have: completed tasks 1 to 5 of the ‘Closing a financial year’ procedure, starting on page 249. entered all transactions and adjustments as instructed by your accountant checked with your accountant to ensure no further entries are required in the company file for the current year. If you have done all of the above, you are now ready to close the financial year. Note that you can’t enter new or edit existing transactions in a financial year once you have closed it. When you close the financial year: The monthly totals for all accounts are changed to last year categories. If last year amounts already existed, those amounts will be replaced. The balance of your current‐year earnings account is transferred to your retained earnings account. The balances of your income, cost of sales, expense, other income and other expense accounts are returned to zero.

5

Click Record to record the journal entry.

Task 5: Back up your company file
Make a backup of your company file after you have finished entering adjustments and store it in a safe location. See ‘Backing up and restoring company files’ on page 260.
1

To close a financial year
Go to the File menu and choose Close a Financial Year. The Close a Financial Year Assistant opens. Follow the on‐screen instructions. If you need help in any of the windows, click Help and then choose Help for This Window.

2

CLOSING A FINANCIAL YEAR

2 5 1

Closing a payroll year
AccountRight Plus only You must close the payroll year in the last month of your payroll year or soon after. Otherwise, you will not be able to enter pays for the next payroll year. Do the following tasks to close your current payroll year and start a new one.
Task
1 2 3 4 5 6

Task 2: Print payroll reports
Review the following reports to make sure payroll transactions are correct. Register Detail report—shows the pay history of your employees. Activity Summary report—shows the pay amounts recorded. Note that this report does not include manual adjustments, for example, changes to pay history balances entered in the Payroll Details tab of an employee’s card.

Process the last pays for the year Print payroll reports Prepare payment summaries Back up your company file Close a payroll year Load the PAYG tax tables

See below below below page 257 page 257 page 258

Task 3: Prepare payment summaries
You can use the Payment Summary Assistant to prepare Individual Non‐Business, Labour Hire and Employment Termination Payment (ETP) summaries. You can use either preprinted forms available from the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) or plain paper, and you can save a copy of the payment summaries as PDF files, to reprint at a later date. You can also use the assistant to prepare the electronic file (EMPDUPE file) for lodging these payment summary types with the ATO. Printing payment summaries on plain paper Plain paper payment summaries are designed to be printed on A4 plain paper. These forms are approved by the ATO. Payment summaries must be printed clearly. You may want to print a sample payment summary to ensure your printer quality is adequate.

Task 1: Process the last pays for the year
You must make sure that all pays for the payroll year you are about to close have been entered.

252

C H A P T E R 1 6

E N D ‐ O F ‐ P E R I O D P R O C E D U R E S

Check the information in the payment summary file you send to the ATO The Payment Summary Assistant will prompt you to save your payment summary data as an EMPDUPE file. This is the file that you send to the ATO. Before creating the EMPDUPE file, you can check the information it will contain by viewing the Payment Summaries Verification report. The Payment Summaries Verification report details the individual payment summary amounts that will be listed in the EMPDUPE file. We recommend you print the verification report and then compare the amounts to other payroll activity information, for example, with information in the Payroll Activity report. Payroll category totals, gross amounts and tax withheld amounts, etc., should reconcile between the reports. If they do not, you can go back and adjust these figures before you finalise your payment summaries and create the EMPDUPE file. Sending the EMPDUPE file to the ATO The EMPDUPE file can be mailed to the ATO or submitted electronically using the Electronic Commerce Interface (ECI) system. If mailing the EMPDUPE, save it to an ATO accepted storage medium, such as a CD or other media. The file must be named EMPDUPE. ETP payroll categories You need to have created and set up ETP payroll categories if you are preparing ETP payment summaries. For more information, see ‘Create payroll categories for termination payments’ on page 130.

To prepare payment summaries
1

Go to the Payroll command centre and click Print Payment Summaries. The Payment Summary Assistant opens.

2 3

Click Next. The Company Information window appears. Enter any company information that does not already appear by default.

CLOSING A PAYROLL YEAR

2 5 3

4

If you are a third party (such as a bookkeeper or accountant), preparing the payment summaries on behalf of a business: a select the I use a third party service to lodge my payment summaries option and then click Next. The Service Provider Details window appears. b Complete the details in this window. Click Next. The Payment Summary Fields window appears.

6

5

If you are preparing ETP payment summaries: a Link the ETP fields to the relevant payroll categories. These fields are located at the bottom of the list. b Link payroll categories used to record bona fide redundancy, approved early retirement or invalidity payments to the Lump Sum Payments A Redundancy field. c Link payroll categories used to record all other Lump Sum Payment A amounts to the Lump Sum Payments A Termination field. d Repeat for each required field. Click Next. The Reportable Employer Super window appears.

7

Link payment summary fields to payroll categories Select a payment summary field in the left column and then select all the payroll categories that are reportable in this field in the right column. For example, select Gross Payments and then click all the payroll categories that are calculated as part of gross payments, such as base salary, base wages, overtime, holiday pay, backpay, etc.

254

C H A P T E R 1 6

E N D ‐ O F ‐ P E R I O D P R O C E D U R E S

Report superannuation amounts
8

9

Click Next. The Reportable Fringe Benefit window appears.

Select the reportable superannuation payroll categories: a Click Link Superannuation Categories. The Link Superannuation Categories window appears, showing a list of your superannuation payroll categories.

Report Fringe benefit amounts b Click in the column next to each superannuation category you

want to select and click OK. The Reportable Employer Super window reappears. If a selected superannuation category is linked to an employee’s pay, an amount appears next to their name in the list. c If you want to, you can type a different amount. d If you manually change an amount in error or if you change an employee’s pay details after starting the Payment Summary Assistant, click Reset All to recalculate the amounts.

10

Enter any reportable fringe benefits against the employees whose payment summaries you are preparing, then click Next. The Review the Payment Summaries window appears.

CLOSING A PAYROLL YEAR

2 5 5

11

Click the zoom arrow next to an employee’s name. The Employee Payment Summary Information window appears.

Save or print employee payment summaries
16

If you want to: a save payment summaries as PDFs, click in the select column next to the employee names and click Save Payment Summaries. b print payment summaries for employees, click in the select column next to the employee names and click Print Payment Summaries. Click Next. The Verify your Payroll Information window appears. A summary of the total and type of payment summaries you are preparing is displayed. You can check these amounts against other payroll reports.

17

Review the payment summary details
12

Review the details of the amounts in the top section of the window and make any required changes.
Labour Hire payment summaries If this employee is employed under labour hire arrangements, this window will only show the Gross Payments and Total Tax Withheld.
NOTE :

13

[ETP summaries only] In the Employment Termination Payment Additional Information section of the window enter the payment date and select appropriate options relating to the payment. Click OK. The Review the Payment Summaries window reappears. Repeat from step 11 above for each employee.

Verify your payment summary information
18

14 15

Verify your payment summary information before preparing the EMPDUPE file: a Click Preview Verification Report and print the Payment Summaries Verification report. b Check that these amounts reconcile with other payroll activity reports before creating the EMPDUPE file. If they don’t reconcile, you can go back and adjust them.

256

C H A P T E R 1 6

E N D ‐ O F ‐ P E R I O D P R O C E D U R E S

19

If you are manually completing the ATO payment summary forms: a Click Preview Verification Report and print the Payment Summaries Verification report. b Click Close to close the Payment Summary Assistant and use the Payment Summaries Verification report to complete your ATO forms. You do not need to complete the rest of this procedure. Click Next. The Create EMPDUPE File window appears. Create the EMPDUPE file

Task 4: Back up your company file
Before you start a new payroll year, make sure that you back up your company file. Once the year is closed, detailed payroll information will no longer be available for editing. Backing up your company file allows you to restore a closed payroll year so you can print reports and reprint payment summaries. For more information, see ‘Backing up and restoring company files’ on page 260.

20

21 22

Click Create EMPDUPE File. The Save As window appears. Select the location to store the EMPDUPE file and click Save. A window appears giving you the option to print the Magnetic Media Information form. Click Yes to print the Magnetic Media Information form. Click Next. The Make a Backup window appears. Back up your company file

Task 5: Close a payroll year
Closing the payroll year will: clear the payroll history from employee cards prevent you from preparing payment summaries for the previous year using the Payment Summary Assistant carry over entitlement balances that have the Carry Remaining Leave Over to Next Year preference set in the Entitlement Information window of the entitlement category clear any entitlement balances that do not have the Carry Remaining Leave Over to Next Year preference set in the Entitlement Payroll Category window of employee cards prevent you from editing or deleting pay amounts for the previous year.

23 24

25

If you want to back up your company file: a Click Backup. A window appears with backup options and company file error checking options. b Select the options you want and click Continue. The Back Up window appears. c Select the location to store the backup file and click Save. d Click Finish. The Payment Summary Assistant closes. If you do not want to back up your company file, click Finish. The Payment Summary Assistant closes.

26

CLOSING A PAYROLL YEAR

2 5 7

To close the payroll year
1

Go to the File menu, choose Close a Year, and then Close a Payroll Year. The Close a Payroll Year Assistant opens. Click Next and set the new payroll year details. Click Next. If you want to create a backup file before purging payroll information, click Backup and follow the instructions in the windows that appear. When you are ready to close the year, click Close the Payroll Year. The Conclusion window shows the details of the new year.

2 3 4

5

Task 6: Load the PAYG tax tables
Australian tax legislation usually changes at the start of each payroll year. If the tax legislation has changed for the payroll year you are starting, you need to update the tax tables in your company file before processing pays. Note that you first need to obtain the current tax tables by updating your software or downloading them from the website.
NOTE : Receive alerts for tax table updates and software updates You can register to be alerted about updates to your tax tables, as well as compliance updates and updated versions of your software. For more information, see ‘Managing software updates’ on page 263.

1

Go to the Start menu, open the MYOB AccountRight program folder (in the MYOB folder) and choose Check for updates (requires internet access). If there is a tax table update, follow the on‐screen instructions to install it. You then need to load the tax tables in your company file. Go to the Setup menu and click Load Payroll Tax Tables. The Load Tax Tables window appears Click Load Tax Tables.

2

3

4

258

C H A P T E R 1 6

E N D ‐ O F ‐ P E R I O D P R O C E D U R E S

17 Managing user accounts and company files
This chapter explains how you can perform maintenance tasks on your company file (including backing up, restoring and optimising) and how you can control access to your company file using user accounts.

Managing user accounts
If you have several people entering transactions into the one company file, you may want to control which command centres, windows and transactions they can access by creating user accounts and assigning specific roles to them. A user can only open a company file by completing the Sign‐on window. The user must enter a user ID and password to gain access to the company file. Then, whenever a user enters a transaction, it is labelled with the user ID. This allows you to keep track of who entered particular transactions, which is useful when following up disputes with suppliers or customers, and for pinpointing fraudulent transactions. Administrator account The Administrator account is a user account that’s set up automatically when you create a company file. This user account is given the administrator role, which is required in order to create, edit and delete other user accounts. User accounts A user account is required to sign on to a company file. The account consists of a user ID and optionally, a password. When someone wants to open this company file, they will need to enter a user ID and the password, if specified. Once the user has signed on to the company file, their access to windows and functions is determined by the roles assigned to their user account. Roles A role is a predefined profile made up of set of windows and functions that a user may access or do. For example, a user account assigned the ‘sales’ role can access features in the Sales, Time Billing and Card File command centres, and other sales related areas, such as lists. Note that a user can be assigned more than one role. For a more detailed explanation of roles, click the help link in the User Access window.

259

To create a user account
1

Start AccountRight and select the company file to be opened, then click Open File. The Sign‐on window appears. Type Administrator in the User ID field, type the administrator’s password in the Password field, and click OK. Note that if you have not set a password for the Administrator account, leave this field blank.

2

3 4 5

Go to the Setup menu and choose Users. In the User Access window, click New. Type the user’s name in the User ID field, then type the password in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
6

In the Roles list, select the roles you want to assign to this user account. For example, if you want to give the user access to all banking features, select the Banking role.

7 8

Click Save. If you want to create another user account, click New and repeat from step 5 above, otherwise, click Close.

Backing up and restoring company files
Backing up is the copying of a company file to some form of storage medium, such as a CD, different hard disk or other media. You can use the backup function in AccountRight to create a compressed archive file with a .zip extension that takes up less space. The Restore command closes the company file you’re currently using, decompresses a backup file so you can use it, and then opens the backup file. Precautions when backing up Avoid common mistakes that can cause you to lose backups of company files: Don’t store backups on the same hard disk as the currently used company file. A single disaster can wipe out all your records. Make separate backups. A disk failure can corrupt your data in such a way that you may not notice it during a session. If you accidentally copy some corrupted data over your previous backup file, that backup is no longer valid. Without a valid backup, you would need to re‐create your company file. You can reduce the risk by making separate backups to protect your company data—for example, at the end of each business day.

260

CHAPTER 17

MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS AND COMPANY FI LES

Store backups off site. Store monthly and yearly backups in a safe place, preferably away from your office. Except for daily rotational backups, do not re‐use media.

7

If you are storing the backup file on a removable storage device, label all your backups with enough information to tell you when they were done and where you were up to in data entry—for example, ‘Friday, 13.05.12’ or ‘Backup as of 13.05.12’.

To make a backup of your company file
1 2

Close any open windows, other than the Command Centre. Go to the File menu and choose Back Up. The Back Up Company File window appears.

To restore a backup
1

If the backup file is on a removable disk, insert the disk into the disk drive. Close any open windows, other than the Command Centre. Go to the File menu and choose Restore. The company file that was open is closed and the Restore Backup File window appears.

2 3

A default filename is assigned.
Default filename
MYOBmmddyyyy.zip

further details
• • mmddyyyy is the month, day and year from your computer’s clock .zip is the file extension and cannot be changed.

4 5

Click Browse and select the backup file you want to restore. If the backup is password‐protected, enter the password in the window that appears, and click OK. If you want to change the AccountRight library or library folder that the file will be restored to, click Change and select the location for the restored company file. Rename the restored file’s name if required. You cannot overwrite an existing file. Click Restore to complete the restore.

6

3 4 5

[Optional] You can change the name of the backup file. Click Browse and select where you want to save the backup file. If you want to protect the backup from unauthorised use, enter and confirm a password. This password will need to be entered when restoring the backup file. Click Back Up. The backup process begins.
7

8

6

BACKING UP AND RESTORING COMPANY FILES

2 6 1

Confirming activated company files
After a company file is activated, once or twice a year you must confirm its activation for the life of the file. The confirmation verifies to MYOB that you are running a legal installation of AccountRight. When confirmation is due and you attempt to open an activated company file, the Company File Confirmation window appears. You have a period of grace in which to confirm the company file, indicated in this window.
NOTE : Frequent requests to confirm Under normal circumstances, confirmation occurs once or twice a year. If, after confirming a company file, you are prompted within a short time to confirm it again, see ‘Troubleshooting activated company files’ on page 263.

To confirm a company file online
1 2

Ensure you are connected to the internet. In the Confirmation Assistant window, click I use this company file to record or edit my business transactions. Select the Confirm Online confirmation option. Click Next. Your serial number and company file code are sent to the MYOB confirmation server, which returns a confirmation code and extends the file activation. The Conclusion step of the assistant appears. Click Close. The company file has been confirmed and you can continue to enter transactions.

3 4

5

If you don’t want to confirm immediately, select the Confirm Later option and click Next to open the file. After the period of grace expires, the company file can be opened only in read‐only mode, in which you can still view transactions, print reports or export data, but will not be able to enter any transactions.
Confirming a read‐only file If you open a company file that is overdue for confirmation in read‐only mode, but then change your mind, go to the Help menu and choose Confirm Company File. The Confirmation Assistant window appears.
NOTE :

To confirm a company file by telephone
1

In the Company File Confirmation window, click I use this company file to record or edit my business transactions. Select the Confirm by Phone confirmation option. Click Next. The Confirm by Phone step of the assistant appears. Call the telephone number displayed in this step of the assistant. You will need to provide the details shown in this window. A licence file will be emailed to you. When you receive the email, detach the licence file. In the Confirm by Phone step of the Confirmation Assistant, click Browse and then select the licence file you received. Click Confirm. The Conclusion step of the assistant appears.
NOTE : Confirmation code used only once After you confirm your company file, the confirmation code cannot be used to confirm this or any other company file again. You must get a new confirmation code each time you are prompted to confirm.

2 3 4

These procedures show you how to confirm an activated company file and set up automatic confirmation: ‘To confirm a company file online’ below. ‘To confirm a company file by telephone’ below. ‘To set up automatic company file confirmation’ on page 263.

5

6

7

262

CHAPTER 17

MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS AND COMPANY FI LES

8

If you have an internet connection and you prefer to perform subsequent confirmations automatically, select the I want to use Automatic Confirmation option. Click Close. The company file has been confirmed and you can continue to enter transactions.

From now on, your company file is confirmed automatically and a notification of successful confirmation is displayed each time.

9

Troubleshooting activated company files
The activation and confirmation of company files is sensitive to changes of the date in your computer’s system clock. In some circumstances, changes in the system date may require you to confirm the company file again. Note that if you confirm a company file several times within a short period of time, you may be prevented from using the file until you contact MYOB Customer Service.
NOTE : Confirmation help For more information about the confirmation process, and additional troubleshooting tips, click Help in the Confirmation Assistant window.

To set up automatic company file confirmation
You can confirm company files over the internet automatically.
1 2 3 4

Open your company file. Go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. In the Preferences window, click the Security tab. Select the I Prefer to Use Automated Online Company File Confirmation option and click OK.

Managing software updates
AccountRight software updates are regularly provided to help you better manage your business and to ensure that your business complies with current government legislation, such as PAYG withholding amounts (AccountRight Plus only). Software Manager is a web‐based tool that notifies you when your software has been updated, and enables you to install the update from the web. Software Manager checks for updates periodically and alerts you when an update is available. You can install the update immediately or download it to your computer to install later. You can also manually check for and install updates at any time. Before you can receive updates via Software Manager, you need to register for software updates and be a current MYOB Cover subscriber.

MANAGING SOFTWARE UPDATES

2 6 3

To register for software updates
You need your 12‐digit AccountRight serial number to register for updates.
TIP : Locating your AccountRight serial number A 12‐digit serial number was provided to you when you purchased your software. You can also find your serial number in the Company Information window of your company file (go to the Setup menu and choose Company Information).

To manually install software updates
1

Go to the Start menu, open the MYOB AccountRight program folder (in the MYOB folder) and choose Check for updates. The Software Manager window appears.

1 2

Make sure you are connected to the internet. Go to the Start menu, open the MYOB AccountRight program folder (in the MYOB folder) and choose Register for updates. The Register for Software Updates window appears.

2

If an update is available, select the update and click: Install to install the update immediately. Download Only to save the update file to your computer to be installed later.
TIP : You can re‐use the update file Copy the update file to a portable media device (such as a USB stick) so you can transfer it to each computer that you use AccountRight on. Note that you do not need to retain the downloaded update file after you have installed the update on each computer.

3 4 5

Enter your 12‐digit AccountRight serial number. Click Register for Updates. Repeat this procedure on each computer that you run AccountRight on.

3

Repeat this procedure on each computer that you run AccountRight on.

To check for updates
Go to the Start menu, open the MYOB AccountRight program folder (in the MYOB folder) and choose Check for updates.

264

CHAPTER 17

MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS AND COMPANY FI LES

18 Importing and exporting data
You can take data entered in your company file and use it in other software or in other company files. This process is called exporting data. You can also take data entered in other software programs and incorporate it into your company file, or incorporate information from one company file into another company file. This process is called importing data. The following table lists the record types that you can import and export.
This record type
Accounts Activities Activity Slips Budgets Cards Ceedata Contact Logs

This record type
Custom Lists Disbursements General Journal entries, including tax information and BAS reporting Items Jobs MYOB Accounts Lists

Can be… imported and exported imported imported and exported imported and exported imported and exported imported and exported imported exported imported imported and exported exported imported and exported imported and exported

Can be… imported and exported imported and exported imported and exported imported and exported imported and exported exported imported and exported

Receipts Receive Money transactions RetailManager and Retails Basics journals Sales Spend Money transactions Tax Code List Transaction Journal entries (no tax information and BAS reporting)

265

Exporting data
Your company file data can be exported to a tab‐delimited or comma‐separated text file: Tab‐separated files contain fields that are separated by tab characters. For example, if a tab character appears between Brewster and 300 Roundhill Drive in a file of customer information, the file counts Brewster and 300 Roundhill Drive as two separate fields in a record. Tab‐separated files are a common export format in spreadsheet programs. Comma‐separated files contain records that are separated by commas. For example, if a comma appears between Brewster and 300 Roundhill Drive in a file of customer information, the file counts Brewster and 300 Roundhill Drive as two separate fields in a record. Comma‐separated files are often used by popular database programs. If you’re exporting data for use in another company file, you can choose either comma‐separated or tab‐separated formats. Note that comma‐separated is automatically selected during import and export processes. Exporting customised forms You can export customised forms from one company file to another. For more information, see ‘Exporting and importing customised forms’ on page 206. Exporting to Accountants Office If your accountant uses MYOB Accountants Office, you can export financial information (including your accounts list, journal entries, BAS information, sales and purchases) directly to MYOB Accountants Office as a tab‐separated text file. This file can be sent by email or saved to disk. For more information, see ‘Provide information to your accountant’ on page 249.

To export data
1

Go to the File menu and choose Import/Export Assistant. The Import and Export Assistant window appears. Select Export data and click Next. Select the type of data you want to export from the Export list. If additional options appear in this window, you can complete them to filter the data that will be exported. Click Next.
NOTE : Exporting timesheets (AccountRight Plus only) When you export timesheets, only the entries that don’t have activity slips associated with them are included. You must export activity slips to complete the process.

2 3

4

Select whether the data in the exported file should be separated using tabs or commas, and whether the first row in the file should display the field headers. Click Next. Choose the fields you want to export and the order in which you want to export them. To do this, click on the first field you want to

5

266

C H AP T E R 18

I MP O R T I NG AN D E X PO R T I N G DA T A

export in the Available fields column and then click Add. The field name will appear in the Fields to export column.

7

If you want to change the order in which the fields are exported, select the field you want to move and then click the up or down buttons. When you have selected the fields, click Export. In the Save As window that appears, enter a name and location for the export file and click Save. The data is exported and saved as a text file. When the data has finished exporting, click Close.

8 9

10

To export data for use with Ceedata
1

Choose AccountantLink from the File menu and then choose Send to Ceedata. The Export File window opens with Ceedata Format as the Export File Format. Select the journal you want to export from the Source Journal menu. You can choose these individually to export each journal as a separate file or you can select All to export all journals as one file. Enter the date range of the transactions you want to be exported. It’s important not to include dates you’ve included in a previous export, since this would result in double‐counting your transactions. As a precaution, we recommend that you tell your accountant the date range you’ve selected.

2

Required fields for importing and exporting data When you import or export data, certain data fields must have valid matching fields in the target software. If a field has an asterisk (*) next to it, you must select a matching field to it. If two fields have a caret (^) next to them, you must select a matching field to one or both fields.
NOTE :

3

4 6

Click the Export button. The Save window appears, displaying the default file name, ceedata.tfr . If you want, you can change the name of this file, but the new file name must keep the extension .tfr. When you’re satisfied with the name and location of the file, click Save.

Repeat the previous step for each field you want to export. If you want to remove a field’s name from the Fields to export column, click its name and then click Remove. If you want to export all the fields, click Add All.

EXPORTING DATA

2 6 7

Importing data
You can import data into your company file from a tab‐delimited or comma‐separated text file. Before you start the import process, you will need to export the data you want from the program you’ve used to create the data. Importing customised forms You can import customised forms from one company file to another. For more information, see ‘Exporting and importing customised forms’ on page 206. If you are importing an accounts list If your accountant uses MYOB Accountants Office, you can import an accounts list from it. For more information, see ‘Importing an accounts list from MYOB Accountants Office’ on page 269.
4

Click Browse to locate and select the file you want to import, and then click Next. Select the import file format, the type of the first record, and the method of handling duplicate records. Click Next and match the import fields with fields in the Available Fields column. To do this: a Click the name of a field in the Import fields column. b Click the matching field in the Available fields column. The import field you selected appears in the Matched Import fields column.
NOTE : Some fields must be imported Fields that have an asterisk (*) next to them must have matching import file fields assigned to them.

5

6

To import data
Before you import data you should make a backup of your company file. See ‘Backing up and restoring company files’ on page 260.
NOTE :

c If all the fields in the import file match those in the Available

1

Go to the File menu and choose Import/Export Assistant. The Import and Export Assistant window appears. Select Import data and click Next. Select the type of data you want to import from the Import list.
Importing timesheets [AccountRight Plus only] When you import timesheets, only the entries that don’t have activity slips associated with them are included. You must import activity slips to complete the process.
NOTE :

fields column, including their order, click Match All. If the fields in your import file are not in the same order, click Auto Match to match the fields that have the same names.
7

2 3

Click Next. If you didn’t make a backup prior to starting the import process, click Back up to make one now. Click Import to import the data. If you get a warning or an error message indicating that the import was not successful, refer to the import log file, which you can access from the Conclusion step of the assistant.

8

9

When the data has finished importing, click Close.

268

C H AP T E R 18

I MP O R T I NG AN D E X PO R T I N G DA T A

Importing from MYOB RetailManager or MYOB RetailBasics
If you use MYOB RetailManager or MYOB RetailBasics as your point‐of‐sale software, you can import information to your AccountRight accounting software. Some of the types of information you can import are: your supplier details goods received transactions (imported as bills) general journal entries summarising other transactions (such as sales income and cost of sales). Before you can import your data, you must export the data from RetailManager or RetailBasics as a text file (Retail.txt) and save it in your AccountRight software program folder. The import file will be detected and the import process will automatically begin when you open your company file. Note that if you save the import file in another location, you will need to import it manually.

Importing an accounts list from MYOB Accountants Office
When you create a company file, you can choose to import an accounts list from a file provided by your accountant (see ‘Create a company file’ on page 18). If the file was created by MYOB Accountants Office—with a .txt extension—follow this procedure to import the accounts list. (Ask your accountant for a new file if it does not have a .txt extension.) Once you have imported an accounts list from MYOB Accountants Office, you can import journal transactions from your accountant. For more information, see ‘Enter end‐of‐year adjustments’ on page 250.

To import the accounts list provided by your accountant
1

Go to the File menu, choose AccountantLink, then Receive from Accountant, and choose List of Accounts. A message appears, informing you that the account levels might be reset. Click Yes if you want to continue the import. The Open window appears. Select the file containing the accounts list sent by your accountant. The default name of the file is MYOB_SET.txt. However, your accountant may have renamed the file. Click Open to open the file and begin the import process. The accounts are imported and a message is displayed, giving you the results of the import. If you get a warning or an error message indicating that the import was not successful, refer to the import log file for a list of errors or warnings.

2

To import RetailManager or RetailBasics data
1

3

In your AccountRight software, go to the Setup menu and choose Preferences. The Preferences window appears. Click the System tab and select the I use MYOB RetailManager option. Click OK and exit your AccountRight software.
You only need to set this preference the first time you import from MYOB RetailManager.
NOTE :

4

2

3

4

Start your AccountRight software and open your company file. If there are transactions that need to be imported, the import process will occur automatically. If you get a warning or an error message indicating that the import was not successful, refer to the import log file in your AccountRight software program folder for a list of errors or warnings.

IMPORTING DATA

2 6 9

270

C H AP T E R 18

I MP O R T I NG AN D E X PO R T I N G DA T A

Glossary
A
account Something to which transactions are assigned. Accounts in AccountRight software are in one of eight classifications: Asset Liability Equity Income Cost of sales Expense Other income Other expense Accounts can be set up as header or detail. Transactions are assigned directly to detail accounts. Header accounts are used to summarise and group multiple detail accounts. Each AccountRight account must have a unique number. account classification One of the eight accounts groups in the Accounts List: Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Income, Cost of Sales, Expense, Other Income, Other Expense. account number The account number identifies an account. Each AccountRight account must have a unique number. accounting period A part of your financial year. AccountRight software treats each calendar month as a separate accounting period. accounts list Commonly referred to as a chart of accounts, this is a list of all your asset, liability, equity, income, cost of sales and expense, other income and other expense accounts. accounts payable What you owe someone else for goods or services delivered. The sum of all accounts payable is recorded as a liability account. Any time you record a purchase in the Purchases command centre, the unpaid balance of the purchase is added to your accounts payable. Every time you pay a bill (using Pay Bills in the Purchases command centre), the amount is subtracted from your accounts payable balance. accounts receivable What your customers owe you. The sum of all accounts receivable is recorded as an asset account. Any time you record a sale in the Sales command centre, the unpaid balance of the sale is added to your accounts receivable balance. Every time you enter a customer payment (using the Sales command centre), the amount is subtracted from your accounts receivable balance. accrual method (basis) This is a method of accounting which records sales and purchases at the time they’re delivered, not at the time they’re paid for. This is the opposite of the cash method of accounting. accrued expenses but not yet paid. These are expenses for goods or services received

Administrator A role you can assign to a user, that gives them access to the entire company file. The Administrator ID is created automatically upon creation of the company file. A user with an administrator role can create other user accounts. ageing: payables The number of days between receiving a bill from a supplier and an ageing date (usually today).

271

ageing: receivables The number of days between invoicing a customer and an ageing date (usually today). allocation accounts In AccountRight software, when writing a cheque or recording a payment, the allocation accounts are the expense, income, etc. accounts that balance the transaction. assets Assets are things you own. Your bank account is an asset. So is your computer. If someone owes you money, the total owed to you is an asset. Current assets are assets that can be turned into cash within a relatively short period of time (less than a year). Things that take longer to turn into cash, like your factory building, are called fixed assets. Assets normally have a debit balance.

C cash drawer Where the money is kept between leaving the customers’ hands and being deposited in the bank. Many businesses set up their cash drawer as a bank account. cash method (basis) The opposite of the accrual method of accounting. The cash method records the sale and purchase of goods and services at the time they’re paid for, not when they’re delivered. cleared A withdrawal or deposit is cleared when your bank adjusts your account balance for it. closed period An accounting period in which all entries are completed. AccountRight software does not require that you actively close a period. However, in Preferences you can prevent accidental posting to a closed (locked) period. closed purchases Purchases that have been paid in full. closed sales Sales that have been paid in full.

B bad debt Money owed to you that is unlikely to be paid. Many businesses create a contra‐asset account to approximate the value of their bad debt. That way, they have a clearer picture of the actual value of their assets. balance The sum of all the money added to and subtracted from an account. balance sheet The balance sheet is a financial snapshot of a company’s position at a particular time. A balance sheet lists the company’s asset, liability and equity accounts. It is called a balance sheet because the total value of the asset accounts minus the total value of the liability accounts always equals the total of the equity accounts. bill The record of a supplier’s invoice.

company information Found in AccountRight software’s Setup menu, your company information contains your company’s name, address, tax information and information about your company’s financial year. contra account This is an account that normally carries the opposite balance of the accounts of the same type. Assets, for example, normally have a debit balance; a common contra‐asset account is the accrued depreciation of an asset. By using a contra account, you can show a company a car that’s worth $12,000, by listing the asset at its $15,000 purchase price followed by the ‐$3,000 balance of the accrued depreciation account. conversion month The conversion month is the earliest month in the financial year for which transactions are to be recorded. For example, suppose you purchase your AccountRight software in October but want to record transactions dated from 1 September. In this case, your

budgets Expected monthly net activity for an account. Budgets are useful for planning for the future and for analysing actual performance against planned performance.

272

GLOSSARY

conversion month is September. The conversion month determines the opening balances you will enter when you set up your company file. cost item The cost of an inventory item. Your AccountRight software uses average cost. That is, the total cost of all your purchases for a particular item currently on hand divided by the number of items on hand. cost of sales Sometimes called cost of goods sold, this account type works just like an expense account. The only difference is where it appears on the profit & loss statement. Cost of Sales accounts appear after your income accounts but before your expense accounts. Cost of Sales is subtracted from your income to produce gross profit. Your expenses are subtracted from your gross profit to produce net profit. You are not required to use Cost of Sales accounts. credit amount Appears on the right side of the ledger (a debit amount occupies the left side). A credit amount increases the balance of accounts with a credit balance and decreases the balance of accounts with a debit balance. Accounts that normally carry a credit balance are liability, equity and income accounts. credit invoice A credit invoice is a sale with a negative balance due. Usually caused by a return or adjustment, a credit invoice is settled by writing a refund cheque or applying the amount to another open invoice. credit terms Terms are the agreed upon rules governing the number of days between delivery and payment discounts for early payment and penalties. You can set default terms for all customers. creditors A creditor is someone to whom you owe money. See also accounts payable. current assets Assets that can be turned into cash within a relatively short time (less than a year) are called current assets. Some of your current assets are your bank accounts, accounts receivable and petty cash. Current assets usually do not lose their value over time. Current assets normally have a debit balance.

current liabilities Liabilities that become payable within the next year are called current liabilities. When recording a liability that is to be paid over a long period, many accountants split it into two liabilities. The part that is to be paid off within the next year is entered as a current liability; the remaining part is entered as a long‐term liability. current year earnings Current year earnings is an equity account. Its balance equals your income minus cost of sales and expenses. Current year earnings are zero at the beginning of a financial year. Current year earnings are kept as a running total as the financial year progresses. When you start a new financial year, current year earnings are reset to zero when its balance is moved into the account called Retained Earnings. customer Someone to whom you sell goods or services. In AccountRight software, you must enter a customer card before you record a sale.

D debit Appears on the left side of the ledger (the credit amount occupies the right side); a debit amount increases the balance of accounts with a debit balance and decreases the balance of accounts with a credit balance. Accounts that normally carry a debit balance are assets and expense accounts. debit purchase A debit purchase is a purchase with a negative balance due. Usually caused by a return or adjustment, a debit purchase is settled by recording a supplier’s refund cheque or applying the amount to another open bill. debtors A debtor is someone who owes you money. See also accounts receivable. deposits from customers Advances received for goods or services not yet delivered. Customer deposits are kept in a liability account. deposits to suppliers Advances paid to suppliers for goods or services not yet delivered.

GLOSSARY

2 7 3

depreciation The expense allocation of the cost of an asset over a period of time. Most accountants create a contra‐asset account to track the depreciation of an asset. See also contra account. A typical depreciation transaction credits the contra asset account and debits a depreciation expense account. Depreciation is most often recorded as a general journal entry. detail accounts be assigned. An AccountRight account to which transactions can

software. Equity accounts usually carry a credit balance. Some common equity accounts are current year earnings, retained earnings and shareholder’s equity. expense A cost associated with running a business. Expense is an account type in AccountRight software. Expense accounts usually carry a debit balance.

F finance charge The amount added to an outstanding balance as a penalty for late payment. financial statements The balance sheet and income (profit & loss) statement. The balance sheet is your company’s financial picture at a particular time. The income statement shows your company’s financial performance over a period of time. financial year The 12‐month period you use to define your accounting year. Your AccountRight software does not require that it match the calendar year. fixed assets Fixed assets are assets that have a relatively long life. Your buildings, cars and computers are fixed assets. Fixed assets are usually depreciated; that is, they lose some of their value as you use them.

discount early payment The amount taken off the balance due in return for payment within an agreed number of days. discount volume purchase The amount taken off an item’s cost because of a special supplier or customer arrangement. discount days Discount days are the number of days from a sale or purchase within which full payment of the balance due entitles the payee to a discount. double‐entry accounting A method of bookkeeping in which every entry is balanced by another entry. Correct double‐entry accounting always provides a balanced set of books; that is, the total value of your asset accounts minus the total of your liability accounts will equal the total of your equity accounts.

E earnings Income minus cost of sales and expenses. See also current year earnings. electronic payment A payment that directly debits or credits your bank. For example, you can choose to pay a supplier electronically by setting up electronic payment details in the supplier card. entitlements Hours that accumulate on paycheques; used to pay special wages, such as annual leave or personal leave. equity This is a company’s net worth. The equity of a company equals its assets minus its liabilities. Equity is an account type in AccountRight

G general journal A journal used to record miscellaneous transactions not entered in other journals, for example, year‐end adjustments and depreciation expense. general ledger This is where all your account information—sales, purchases, inventory, cash in, cash out—come together. You draw your financial statements (balance sheet and income statement) from the general ledger. gross profit Gross profit is your income minus cost of sales.

274

GLOSSARY

H header account A header account in AccountRight software is used to group similar detail accounts. You cannot post a transaction to a header account. historical balance The balance of an account prior to converting your records to AccountRight software. You are not required to enter historical balances in AccountRight software. Enter them only if you wish to compare a current month’s activity to the activity for the same month last year.

J job A job is work for which you wish to track income and expenses. In AccountRight software, a job can be a profit centre, a product line, a project or any other subset of your business that requires a separate income statement. journal A journal is a tool for organising your accounting entries. All entries are grouped into one of six journals: general, disbursements, receipts, sales, purchases or inventory.

L I identifiers A one‐letter code used to sort and select cards in the card file. You can assign up to 26 identifiers to a card. income Revenue from the sale of goods or services. Income is an account type in AccountRight software. Income accounts usually carry a credit balance. income statement Also called a profit & loss statement, the income statement shows your company’s performance over a period of time. An income statement begins with income. It then subtracts cost of sales to produce a gross profit. Expenses are subtracted from gross profit to produce operating profit. ‘Other income’ accounts are added to operating profit and ‘other expense’ accounts are subtracted from operating profit to produce net profit. inventory Physical items kept for possible sale to a customer. Most accountants record an inventory’s value in a current asset account. invoice The written record of a sale. liability Liabilities are things you owe. Your working capital loan is a liability. Your accounts payable, what you owe someone for a purchase, is also a liability. Liabilities that are due within the next year are called current liabilities. When a liability is not due for more than a year, it is called a long‐term liability. Liabilities normally have a credit balance. library The location on your computer or a network computer where AccountRight company files are stored. line item The information entered in one row of the scrolling list for a transaction (sale, purchase, nominal journal entry). linked account Linked accounts are what AccountRight software uses to post your inventory, sales and purchase transactions to the proper account. When, for example, you link your receivables account, you are telling AccountRight software which account to post the balance due from a sale to. long‐term liability Something you owe that does not have to be paid for at least a year.

item A unit in your items list. An item can be physical inventory, like a widget or a pair of shoes, or it can be non‐physical, like an hour of your time.

GLOSSARY

2 7 5

M miscellaneous purchases Miscellaneous purchases are used in AccountRight software to record non‐item purchases that do not require a printed purchase order. miscellaneous sales Used in AccountRight software to record non‐item sales that do not require a printed invoice.

other income An account type used to record income that is not directly related to your company’s operations, such as interest income. ‘Other income’ accounts usually have a credit balance. out of balance When the total credit amount does not equal the total debit amount in a transaction, it is out of balance. AccountRight software does not allow you to record an out‐of‐balance transaction.

P payables What you owe someone else for items or services delivered. See also accounts payable. pricing levels Different prices at which an item is sold to different kinds of customers. Up to six pricing levels can be set. profit & loss statement See income statement.

N net income Net income (net profit or loss) is the total of all income accounts minus the sum of your expense and cost of sales accounts. net profit The total of all income accounts minus the sum of your expense and cost of sales accounts. Also called net income. Number of Days after EOM A setting to indicate that the payment due date and early payment discount date are based on a set number of days after the end of the month.

profit centre A subset of your business for which you want to track income and expenses. In AccountRight software profit centres are called ‘jobs’. promised date The date a pending sale or pending purchase is due to be delivered. If a pending sale is not delivered as of its promised date, a reminder is posted to your To Do List.

O open bill open sale A purchase with an outstanding balance due. A sale with an outstanding balance due.

R recap transaction A function that lets you look at a journal entry before it is recorded. Recap transaction is particularly useful for those transactions, like invoices and bills, for which the journal entry is not immediately obvious. receivables What someone else owes you for items or services delivered. See accounts receivable. reconciling The process of checking that your records agree with your bank’s records.

opening balance The balance of an account as at the start of the first day of your conversion month. operating profit This is your profit before considering Other Income and Other Expense. other expenses An account type used to record expenses that are not directly related to your company’s operations, such as loan interest, fines, etc. ‘Other expense’ accounts usually have a debit balance.

276

GLOSSARY

recurring transaction An accounting entry that is made periodically, such as weekly payroll, monthly rent, etc. restoring The process of reopening a backup company file.

T terms Terms are the agreed upon rules governing the number of days between delivery and payment, discounts for early payment and penalties for late payment. transaction An entry in AccountRight software that affects the balance of accounts. trial balance This is a report showing all the activity for an account or accounts within a selected date range. It shows the balance of the account at the beginning of the date range, the activity within the date range, and the balance at the end of the date range. A trial balance is useful for checking your entries prior to doing your period‐end processing.

retained earnings Money from previous years’ earnings that has been left in the company. At the end of a financial year any money earned (or lost) during the financial year is transferred to retained earnings. Retained earnings are recorded in an equity account. revenue Income from the sale of goods or services. Revenue is recorded in an income account in AccountRight software. Income accounts usually carry a credit balance.

role A set of windows and functions that a user can access in the company file. The Administrator role is assigned to users who require full access to the company file.

U undeposited funds account The linked account into which individual cash‐receipts transactions are recorded when not credited directly to cheque or credit card accounts. Amounts from individual transactions in the undeposited funds account are grouped together. When deposited, they are recorded as a single bank deposit transaction on the bank or credit card statement. user accounts User accounts are the basis for the software’s security system, and can be used to keep track of the actions of each person who performs tasks that affect the company file. A user ID and password is entered when signing on to the company file.

S settle a credit invoice When someone returns something, and you record an invoice that has a negative balance due, it is called a credit invoice. Paying off this negative amount is called settling a credit invoice. settle a debit purchase When you return something to a supplier, and you record a purchase with a negative balance due, it is called a debit purchase. Paying off this negative amount is called settling a debit purchase. standard pay The current values of an employee's payroll details (wages, superannuation, entitlements, deductions, employer expenses and taxes) that are automatically used when processing the employee's pay. supplier Someone from whom you buy goods or services. In AccountRight software you must enter a supplier card before you can record a purchase. See also accounts payable.

Z zoom arrow An icon that allows a user to review, or ‘zoom to’ more detailed information about a specific topic, such as a transaction.

GLOSSARY

2 7 7

278

GLOSSARY

Index
A
Account Information window 25 account levels, to track financial information 225 Account Opening Balances window 27 account types 23 accountant receiving accounts list from 269 receiving adjustments from 250 sending data to 249 AccountantLink receiving accounts list from accountant 269 sending data to Accountants Office 249 AccountRight updates 28 263 accounts adding 25 adjusting to reflect work in progress 148 assigning tax codes to 166 budgets for 231 changing 168 classifications 23 for statement of cash flows 25 combining 169 creating 25 detail 24 entering opening balances 26 exporting 265 finding 167 grouping, detail 26 header 24 importing 265 indenting 26 list of 19 new 25 numbering 23 opening balances bank accounts 26 reconciling 56 for the first time 39 transfer money between 54 types of 23 Accounts List window 25 accounts payable analysing 93 paying 95 reconciling accounts at month‐end 241 year‐end 241 reports 93 reviewing 93 accounts receivable payments 52 72 reconciling 241 accrual accounts setting up for items received without a supplier bill 89 activation of company files 21 circumstances requiring 21 confirming activation automatically 263 by telephone 262 over the internet 262 troubleshooting 263 activities billing rates, setting 139 changing 141 creating time billing 140 definition 140 deleting 141 exporting 265 inactivating 141 Activities List window 140 Activity Information window 140 activity slips adjusting book value of work in progress 148 creating multiple 144 single 142 to pay an employee 143 deleting 145 exporting 265 finding 144 including in employee’s pay 118 multiple 144 reviewing 144 single 142 timer, create using 143 adjustments entering in 13th period 250 importing from accountants 250 making year‐end 250 administrator account passwords 29 purpose of 259 See also user accounts analyse payables 93 Analysis menu (command centres) 11 arrows 13 assets accounts 23 audit trail 236 auditing company file information 240 Auto‐Build Inventory window 154 auto‐building items 154 Automatically Adjust Base Hourly or Base Salary Details 103 average cost 158

B backing up, company file 260 backorder items purchased on 86 items sold on 64 backup file, restoring 260 bad debts, accounting for 81 bank accounts adding 25 deposits 47 for electronic payments 37 opening balances 26 reconciling 56 for the first time 39 out of balance amounts, correcting 57 Bank Register window finding a transaction using 175 Get Statement button 58

279

recording transactions in 52 Split button 53 bank service charges, recording 56 bank statement adding transactions from 59 Get Statement button 56 importing 58 formats supported 58 reconciling 56 for the first time 39 out of balance amounts, correcting 57 BAS Information window 247 BASlink lodging activity statements using 247 setting up 247 billing for time. See time billing billing rates, setting for activities 139 customers 139 employees 139 suppliers 139 bills editing paid 177 paying 52 96 See also accounts payable blank lines, inserting between line items 66 88 bona fide redundancy payment 130 Budget Shortcuts window 232 budgets 231 allocating for jobs 229 choosing accounts for 231 half‐yearly 233 monthly 233 quarterly 233 reports for 232 yearly 233

Business Activity Statement, lodging using BASlink 247 business contacts, maintaining list of 212 Business Insights 70 234 business insights 93

reactivating 168 synchronising cards and Outlook contacts 217 view a contact on a map 214 cash wages, recording a cheque transaction 123 cashflow analysis using Business Insights 234 categories changing 168 creating 226 deleting 169 enabling assignment to 226 finding 167 setting up 226 See also payroll categories Ceedata 267 cheques custom 199 customising 199 203 customising form layout 199 entering 49 52 previewing 50 printing 196 recurring 50 stubs, customising 203 voiding 59 See also payroll closing a financial year 249 closing a payroll year 252 combining accounts 169 cards 169 command centres 8 Company Data Auditor 236 240–243 company file creating 18 Company File Confirmation window 262

C calculator 13 calendar 11 Card ID field 223 Card Information window 83 cards 209 adding 209 customer 61 employee 110 209 personal 209 supplier 83 adding pictures to 223 assigning tax codes to 166 changing 168 combining 169 creating for customers 61 employees 110 personal contacts 209 suppliers 34 custom lists and fields 215 customising 222 employee payroll information 110 exporting 265 finding 167 identification code 223 importing 265 inactivating 168 organising in groups 214

company files activating 21 circumstances requiring 21 auditing 240 backing up 260 checking for errors 240 confirming automatically 263 by telephone 262 over the internet 262 troubleshooting 263 restoring from backups 260 serial number, entering 22 confirmation codes generated during internet confirmation 262 confirmation of company files automatic confirmation 263 by telephone 262 over the internet 262 troubleshooting 263 contact log 212 contact management 209 See also cards contra accounts 81 contra payments 81 conversion month 18 Copy From button 149 cost of an item average 158 last 158 standard 150 cost of sales accounts selecting for tracking 150 setting up 24 credit card customer paying by 45 purchases 60

280

INDEX

credit card statement adding transactions from 59 matching transactions with 59 reconciling 56 credit control credit holds 76 credit limits 75 credit terms 33 64 finance charges 77 Credit Limit & Hold window 75 Credit Limit Override Password window 76 credit limits password, changing 76 prevent recording sales when customer exceeds 76 setting 75 warn when customer exceeds 75 credit terms changing when recording purchases 86 sales 64 default for sales 33 setting for customers 62 setting for suppliers 84 creditors See accounts payable current financial year 18 custom fields creating for cards 222 recording card details using 222 recording item details using 161 custom forms adding graphics and logos 203 adding lines to 203 adding shapes to 203 adding tables to 202 arranging elements on 205 custom cheques 199 data fields 201

deleting elements from 205 editing objects 204 elements of 191 exporting 206 importing 206 page properties, setting 200 previewing 199 removing elements 205 resizing elements 204 size of 200 text fields 202 tool palette 201 undo changes 205 custom lists creating 216 for cards 215 grouping items with 160 custom price levels 159 assigning to a customer 160 custom reports saving 193 customer credits deleting 177 issuing 78 recording 78 refunding by cheque 80 settling 79 customer payments 72 discount for early payment 73 editing 177 group with undeposited funds 46 73 See also receiving money customer statements emailing 245 printing 245 sending at month‐end 245 customers analysing 70 assigning a price level to 160 billing rates for 139 cards, creating 61 163

credit holds 76 credit limits 75 credit terms 33 64 credits deleting 177 issuing 78 recording 78 refunding by cheque 80 settling 79 discounts for early payment 73 volume 64 invoices entering 63 payments for 52 72 payments from 52 72 quoting 63 who are also suppliers 81 customising forms See custom forms

payroll categories changing 107 108 creating 102 deleting 169 deleting records 169 transactions 177 deposits recording 52 recurring 46 53 depreciation accounts for 246 recording 246 detail accounts 24 jobs 227 discounts early payment discounts giving 73 receiving 96 volume discounts giving 64 receiving 87

D data exporting Ceedata 267 to accountants 249 importing from other applications 268 from RetailBasics 269 from RetailManager 269 data fields adding to forms 201 changing size of 204 dates, entry with calendar 11 debtors See accounts receivable Deduction Information window 107 deductions definition 102 paying 124

E early payment discount 73 Edit Accounts window 25 electronic clearing account, setting up 37 electronic payments ABA files 51 employee payments 122 changing bank details for current pay 121 setting up 36 supplier payments 51

INDEX

2 8 1

emailing forms in a batch 196 invoices 66 pay slips 123 purchases 88 remittance advices 97 in a batch 196 statements 245 emailing forms 197 Employee Pays window 118 employees activity slips, including in pay 118 bank information 38 113 billing rates, setting 139 bona fide redundancy payments 130 bonuses 117 cash payments 122 cheque payments 122 commissions 117 creating cards for 110 electronic payments 122 changing bank details for current pay 121 emailing pay slips 111 employment classification 111 employment termination payments 130 holiday pay, distributing 119 hours worked, entering 119 pay details, editing 118 pay history entering 35 113 viewing 133 paying 116–124 payment method 113 payment summaries 252 payments, changing, deleting or reversing 121 payroll information entering 110 viewing 133

payroll liabilities paying 125 reviewing 135 printing paycheques 122 sick pay, distributing 119 standard pay, entering 113 terminating 129 time billing information including in employee pays 118 timesheets 114 viewing sales history for 71 Employer Expense Information window 108 employer expenses definition 102 paying 124 payroll categories changing 108 creating 102 deleting 169 employment category, entering 111 employment classification adding to list of 111 entering 111 employment status, entering 111 employment termination payments 130 preparing payment summaries 252 end‐of‐month. See month‐end tasks entitlements balances changing 134 viewing 134 definition 102 linking wages categories 106 payroll categories changing 105 creating 102 deleting 169 Entitlements Information window 105

equity accounts 23 error, checking for in company file 240 Excel, viewing reports in 186 expense accounts 24 expenses definition 102 exporting data Ceedata 267 to accountants 249 to Outlook 218 See also synchronising cards and Outlook contacts

customising cheques 203 displaying 199 emailing 196 finding 195 invoices 199 payslips 199 printing 196 See also custom forms freight charging customer for 65 paying suppliers for 87

G F finance charges calculating 77 charging 77 deleting 77 100 paying 100 setting up 77 financial year budgets for 231 closing 249 starting 251 Find Transactions menu (command centres) 11 Find Transactions window 174 finding records 167 transactions 173 finished item 153 forms adding fields to 201 batch sending 196 cheques 199 customising 199 general journal entries 250 assigning categories to 226 creating recurring transactions for 179 See also journal entries Getting Started guide 7 graphics adding to forms 203 See also pictures GST codes. See tax codes

H half‐yearly budgets 233 header accounts 24 jobs 227 headers, using to group line items in transactions 66 88 help 8 Help centre 8

282

INDEX

I
Identifiers, using to group cards 214 Import and Export Options window 221 import log file 268 importing data 268 accounts list from MYOB Accountants Office 269 from accountants 250 from other applications 265 from Outlook 220 See also synchronising cards and Outlook contacts from RetailBasics 269 from RetailManager 269 transactions 268 importing statements file formats supported 58 Get Statement button 58 matching transactions 59 inactivating records not used frequently 168 Index to Reports window 185 internet banking, importing statements 58 inventory adjusting 152 changing prices of 157 counting 155 custom fields 161 custom lists and reports 160 custom price levels 159 insufficient quantities on‐hand 67 minimum levels 151 opening cost values, entering 43 opening quantity values, entering 43 performing stocktakes 155 quantity breaks 159

receiving items without a supplier bill 89 reconciling at year‐end 249 reports 156 reviewing 156 transferring 153 viewing history 156 See also items Inventory Count Sheet printing 43 inventory count sheet, printing 155 invoices blank lines, inserting 66 customising form layout 199 emailing 196 entering 63 headers, inserting 66 line items, entering 64 overdue invoices, list of 71 payments 72 previewing 66 printing in a batch 196 recurring 66 subtotal, adding 66 time billing invoices 145 Item Information window 149 items adding 149 adjusting quantities and values 152 asset account for tracking value of 150 assigning tax codes to 166 items sold 151 auto‐building 154 average cost 158 creating 149 custom lists to group 160 default supplier number 151 expense account for tracking cost 150 exporting 265

finding 167 finished item, defined 153 I Buy this Item option 150 I Inventory this Item option 150 I Sell this Item option 150 importing 265 last cost 158 number per selling unit 151 opening quantities and values, entering 43 price levels, setting custom 159 prices, setting 157 purchase history 94 157 receiving without a supplier bill 89 setting up accrual account for 89 sales history 71 157 setting up 149 standard cost 150 time billing invoices, including on 138 using custom fields for recording details of 161 Items List Summary report 157 Items Register, finding transactions using 175

exporting 265 finding 167 header jobs 227 importing 265 job‐tracking tasks 227 opening balances, entering 228 setting up 225 227 sub‐jobs 227 using to track income and expenses 227–229 journal entries creating recurring transactions for 179 exporting 265 finding 173 importing 265 recording 250

L last cost 158 layout customising forms 199 sales 64 leave payments 119 Leave Tracking Information window 120 letters mail merge 210 personalised 210 liabilities accounts for tracking 23 paying payroll 124 line items on transactions defined 86 entering for purchases 86 entering for sales 64 inserting blank lines between 66 88

J jobs assigning to payroll categories 120 purchases 87 Receive Money transactions 46 sales 65 Spend Money transactions 50 budget allocation 229 budget amounts, entering 229 changing 168 creating 227 detail jobs 227

INDEX

2 8 3

showing subtotal of 66 88 using headers to group 66 88 lines drawing on forms 203 linked account for electronic payments 37 for items received 89 for purchases 89 for sales 77 lists adding records to 163 creating custom for contacts 215 deleting records from 169 inactivating records in 168 searching 167 logos adding to forms 203 See also pictures

paying payroll tax 244 recording depreciation 246 reports 243 running the Company Data Auditor 240–243 sending customer statements 245 monthly budgets 233 mouse shortcuts 14 MYOB Accountants Office exporting data to 249 importing accounts list from 269

to an invoice 69 purchase orders receiving items against 89 sales orders 63 Outlook contacts. See synchronising cards and Outlook contacts overdue invoices viewing list of 71 See also credit terms, accounts receivable

payment method, default customer 33 employee 113 payment summaries employment termination payment (ETP) summaries 252 individual non‐business 252 labour hire 252 printing at year‐end 252 saving 256 verification report 253 Payment Summary Assistant 252 payments electronic 51 setting up 36 exporting 266 making 49 52 96 receiving 45 52 72 recurring 179 payroll activity slips including in employee pays 118 automatically adjusting base pay details for leave 103 categories 102–109 contribution types 104 employee information, entering 110 entitlement balances 134 information 133 leave calculating 106 paying 119 liability payments 124 pay details, previewing 118 pay history 133 pay slips emailing 124 printing 123 paycheques, printing 122 paycheques, prior year 134 payment summaries 252 processing pays 116–124

N navigation shortcuts 10 new year starting a new financial year 251 starting a new payroll year 257

P
Pay Bills window 95 96 Pay Employee window 118 Pay History section 133 Pay Liabilities window 125 Pay Period window 117 pay slips emailing 124 printing 123 payables See accounts payable paycheques printing 122 prior year 134 PAYG Withholding 102 tax tables checking for latest 258 loading 35 258 variations 112 viewing tax table information for 109 paying employees 116 –124 See also payroll

M
Mail Merge button 71 mailing labels, printing 196 212 Match Transaction window 59 Microsoft Outlook contacts. See synchronising cards and Outlook contacts minimum inventory levels 151 month‐end tasks 239 checking the accuracy of records 240–243 entering budgets 231 locking periods 248 lodging business activity statement 247 making superannuation contributions 244

O
OfficeLink creating personalised letters 210 online banking importing statements 58 online help 8 opening balances accounts 26 items 43 jobs 228 orders converting several orders to invoices 69 several orders to purchases 93 to a purchase 92

284

INDEX

reports 252 setting up 35 using the Payroll Easy Setup Assistant 35 taxes 102 checking for latest 258 loading tax tables 35 258 state and territory 244 timesheets changing details during pay run 118 entering employee hours 114 excluding from a pay run 118 See also superannuation payroll categories base hourly adjusting 120 automatically adjusting for leave payments 103 base salary adjusting 120 automatically adjusting for leave payments 103 calculated value 113 changing 109 creating 102 deleting 169 editing 109 finding 179 reviewing 35 Payroll Category List window 102 109 Payroll Details tab 110 payroll liabilities paying 125 reconciling at month‐end 242 reconciling at year‐end 242 reviewing 135 payroll tax paying 244 reporting 244 setting up 128

payroll year closing 252 closing the payroll year 257 end‐of‐year tasks 252 starting a new year 257 when to close 239 252 payslips customising layout 199 pending purchases. See purchases periods, locking 248 personalised letters creating 210 printing 196 petty cash account for allocating expenses to 55 tracking expenses 55 pictures adding to cards 223 forms 203 removing 223 replacing 223 Portable Document Format (PDF) file creating for reports 186 creating for sales 66 Portable Document Format (PDF) file, creating purchase 88 preferences Register for updates 35 Apply Customer Payments Automatically to Oldest Invoice First 80 I Prefer to Use Automated Online Company File Confirmation 21 I Use Timesheets for ... and My Week Starts on ... 114 If Credit Limit is Exceeded on Sale 75 76 recommended 28

setting up 28 time billing 138 Transactions CAN’T be Changed; They Must be Reversed 28 Prepare Bank Deposit window 178 Prepare Budgets window 232 Prepare Electronic Payments window 51 122 previewing cheques 50 custom forms 199 invoices 66 pay details 118 purchases 88 remittance advices 50 price levels assigning to customer 160 creating custom 159 prices quantity breaks 159 setting 157 printing cheques 50 97 forms 196 invoices 66 88 in a batch 196 pay slips 123 paycheques 122 payment summaries 252 purchases 88 in a batch 196 receipts 74 remittance advices 50 97 in a batch 196 statements 245 prior year paycheques 134 Process Payments window 121 Process Payroll window 116 purchase activity, viewing 174 purchase debits, creating 98

purchase history, viewing for suppliers 94 purchase orders creating from a sale 91 purchases additional information about, entering 87 analysing using business insights 93 applying a supplier debit to an unpaid purchase 98 assigning job to 87 assigning tax to 87 blank lines, inserting 88 changing credit terms when recording 86 changing type of 92 creating from a sale 91 credit card 60 credit terms, entering 86 customising form layout 199 deleting 177 emailing 88 in a batch 196 headers, adding 88 history, viewing 94 layout 86 overdue purchases, list of 94 paying 95 petty cash 55 previewing 88 printing 88 in a batch 196 quotes 85 receiving items without a bill 89 recording 52 recurring 88 179 remittance advice sending 50 reports 94 reversing 98 saving as a PDF file 88 sending 196

INDEX

2 8 5

subtotals, adding 89 type of, choosing 86 viewing list of unpaid purchases 156 Purchases Register finding transactions 174 viewing purchases 93 Purchases window 85

grouping with undeposited funds 46 73 importing transactions 265–268 invoice payments 72 receipts 74 receiving payments. See receiving money reconciled transactions, deleting 178 reconciling accounts payable 241 accounts receivable 241 bank accounts 56 for the first time 39 linked inventory account 241 out of balance amounts, correcting 57 undoing 57 record journal entries 250 Record Journal Entry window 250 records 169 adding 163 using Easy‐Add 163 changing 168 deleting 169 inactivating 168 reactivating 168 searching 167 Recurring Schedule Information window 180 recurring transactions 179–184 automatically recording 181 changing 182 cheques 46 50 53 creating 180 creating from an existing entry 181 deleting 182 editing 182 pre‐dated 180 purchases 88 recording multiple 183

single 183 rescheduling 182 responding to reminders for 184 sales 66 saving 179 scheduling 180 setting reminders for 181 refund cheque, receiving 99 refunds. See customer credits; supplier debits registration. See activation of company files reimbursable expenses tracking 229 remittance advices preparing 195 previewing 50 sending 50 80 195 reportable employer super contributions 127 reports 185–193 adding a picture to 191 adding data to 189 adding graphics to 190 adding shapes and lines to 190 adding text to 190 adding watermark 191 changing background of 191 customisation tools 191 customising 187 filters 187 deleting custom 193 designing 189 displaying 185 elements editing 191 filtering data in 187 previewing 186 printing 185 186 purchases reports 94 reviewing at month‐end 243

Q quantity breaks, inventory 159 quarterly budgets 233 quotes converting to orders or bills 92 converting to orders or invoices 69 customer 63 supplier 85

sales reports 71 saving 186 saving as comma‐separated values (CSV) files 187 PDF files 186 tab‐delimited values files 186 saving custom 193 saving in other formats 186 sending 186 sorting columns in 189 sorting data in 187 viewing in Microsoft Excel 186 Reports menu (command centres) 11 restoring a backup 260 RetailBasics, importing data from 269 RetailManager, importing data from 269 returns. See customer credits; supplier debits reversing transactions 178

R rates, setting time billing 139 receipts, printing 74 receivables See accounts receivable Receive Money window 46 Receive Payments window 73 receiving items without a supplier bill 89 receiving money 45 52 cash payments 45 cheque payments 45 credit card payments 45 customer payments 72 exporting transactions 265

S sales analysing using Business Insights 70 assigning tax code to a sale 65 87 batch printing 196 changing status of 69 choosing type of 64 deleting 177 emailing 66 in a batch 196 entering 52 63 exporting 265 266 history, viewing for item, customer or employee 71

286

INDEX

importing 265 income account for tracking sales 150 insufficient on‐hand item quantities 67 invoice 63 layout 64 orders 63 previewing 66 printing 66 88 in a batch 196 quote 63 recurring 66 179 reports 71 saving as a PDF file 66 viewing list of unpaid sales 71 Sales command centre 63 Sales Register window finding transactions using 174 viewing and editing sales in 174 Sales window 64 Select a Recurring Transaction window 183 select columns 13 selection lists 13 serial number entering into company files while activating over the internet 22 Set Item Prices window 157 Settle Returns & Credits window 80 Settle Returns & Debits window 99 Show Me How movies 9 Software Manager 28 263 software updates 28 263 Spend Money window 49 spending money 48 96 bill payments 95 definition 48

electronic payments 51 exporting transactions 265 importing transactions 265 petty cash 55 sending remittance advice 50 transactions recording 48 Split button 53 standard cost 150 standard pay 113 starting a new payroll year 252 state and territory payroll tax calculating 128 reporting 244 setting up 128 statements emailing 245 importing 58 printing 245 reconciling 56 out of balance amounts, correcting 57 sending at month‐end 245 sub‐jobs 227 subpasswords. See user accounts subtotal, showing in transactions 66 88 superannuation checking calculations for a pay run 127 checking the exclusions and threshold amounts 127 choice of superannuation fund 112 126 employee details, entering 112 funds, creating 126 paying 124 244 payroll categories changing 103 creating 102

definition 102 deleting 169 reportable 127 reporting 126 244 Standard choice form 112 126 Superannuation Information window 103 supplier debits deleting 177 recording 97 refund cheques 99 settling 98 suppliers bank information for 37 billing rates, setting 139 bills entering 85 paying 95 cards, creating 34 83 credit terms changing when recording purchase 86 debits deleting 177 recording 97 refund cheques 99 settling 98 discounts early payment 96 volume 87 orders 85 paying 52 95 electronically 51 several bills at once 97 purchase history, viewing 94 purchases 85 quotes 85 receiving items without an invoice 89 who are also customers 81 Synchronisation results window 219 222

Synchronise Cards window 218 synchronising cards and Outlook contacts export cards to Outlook contacts 218 import Outlook contacts to cards 220 including custom fields 217 219 when you use a PDA or mobile device 218 219

T tax codes assigning to accounts 166 cards 166 items sold 151 purchases 87 sales 65 changing 168 177 creating 164 exporting 265 importing 265 See also taxes tax tables checking for latest 258 loading 35 258 receive update alerts 258 taxes change amount assigned to purchases 87 Receive Money transactions 46 sales 65 Spend Money transactions 50 employee tax information, entering 112 PAYG Withholding 102 109 variations 112

INDEX

2 8 7

paying using the Pay Liabilities window 124 payroll, state and territory 128 244 See also tax codes Termination Details window 132 termination of employment 129–132 bona fide redundancy payment 130 determining outstanding entitlements 129 employment termination payment 130 entering termination details 132 recording the final termination pay 132 time billing activities creating 140 definition 140 deleting 169 activity slips 142 including in employee pays 118 multiple 144 single 142 adjusting accounts to reflect work in progress 148 including items on invoices 138 invoices 145 147 preferences 138 using special billing units 138 work in progress 148 timesheets changing details during pay run 118 delete 114 employee hours, entering 114 excluding from a pay run 118 report 118 setting up 114 time billing information, entering 114 unpaid hours clearing 115 deleting 115

reporting 118 view timesheet reports 114 To Do List making supplier payments from 97 To Do List menu (command centres) 11 tool palette 201 tracking employees’ time. See time billing Transaction Journal window 175 transactions changing 177 create recurring from an existing entry 181 deleting 177 exporting 266 finding 11 173–176 identifying user who entered 259 importing 268 from bank or credit card statement 59 recurring 179–184 reversing 178 unchangeable 177 178 Transactions CAN’T be Changed; They Must be Reversed preference 178 transferring inventory 153 money 54 tutorial 10

grouping payments 46 73 Undo Last Reconciliation window 58 Use Recurring button 183 user accounts creating 260 managing 259 passwords 260 purpose of 259 See also administrator account user IDs. See user accounts year financial 249 payroll 252 year‐end financial 249 –251 payroll 252–258 year‐end tasks entering budgets 231 financial 249 –251 close a financial year 251 entering end‐of‐year adjustments 250 provide information to your accountant 249 reconcile accounts 241 reconcile inventory 249 payroll 252–258 back up company file 257 close the payroll year 257 print payment summaries 252 print payroll reports 252 process the last paycheques for the year 252 yearly budgets 233 wages cash wages, recording a cheque transaction 123 definition 102 payroll categories changing 102 creating 102 deleting 169 See also payroll, employees Wages Information window 103 work in progress adjusting accounts to reflect 148 tracking 148

Y

V
View Contact Log window 212 void cheque 59 volume discounts giving 64 receiving 87

W

Z zoom arrows 13

U unchangeable transactions 177 178 uncleared transactions, matching 59 undeposited funds

288

INDEX